Toyota Camry 2007 Owners Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

2014-12-11

: Toyota Toyota-Camry-2007-Owners-Manual-121656 toyota-camry-2007-owners-manual-121656 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 635

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Foreword
Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and
quality construction of each vehicle we build.
This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants
follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For
important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.
When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
U.S. OWNERS:
Toyota Customer Experience Center
Toll−free:1−800−331−4331
Hawaii:
Servco Automotive Customer Services
Toll−free:1−888−272−5515
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
CANADIAN OWNERS:
Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre
Toll−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of
continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may
find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
Please access our websites for further information.
The U.S. mainland
www.toyota.com
Hawaii
www.toyotahawaii.com
Canada
www.toyota.ca



2006 TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION
All rights reserved. This material may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of Toyota
Motor Corporation.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Important information about this manual
Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Safety symbol

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle damage warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to
avoid possible injury or damage.
The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are
used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION
This is a
injury to
informed
order to
others.

warning against anything which may cause
people if the warning is ignored. You are
about what you must or must not do in
reduce the risk of injury to yourself and
When you see the safety symbol
shown above, it means: “Do not...”;
“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this
happen”.

NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning
is ignored. You are informed about what you must or
must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of
damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Important information about your Toyota

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help
reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the
event of a collision. None of these systems, either individually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the
event of collision. However, the more you know about
these systems and how to use them properly, the greater
your chances become of surviving an accident without
death or serious injury.

Occupant restraint systems
Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to
read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In
terms of helping you understand how you can receive the
maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this
vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is
the most important Section for you and your family to
read.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of
the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear
seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be
secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for
their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,
and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes
for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing
the risk of head, chest and knee injuries by preventing
contact of the head, chest and knee with interior portions
of the vehicle.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concerning seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you
should be aware of. These systems work together along
with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide
occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of
each system is enhanced when it is used properly and
together with other systems. No single occupant restraint
system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the
equal level of restraint which these systems can provide
when used together. That is why it is important for you and
your family to understand the purpose and proper use of
each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

iii

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources
of death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an
airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has
been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the
time of deployment. This is just one example of how the
instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help
ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and
increase the safety they can provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.

Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in
driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a
system to record data in a crash or a near car crash
event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record
some or all of the following information:

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section
1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time
of ownership of this vehicle.

Engine speed
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
Position of the transmission selector lever
Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat
belts or not
Driver’s seat position
Front passenger’s occupant classification

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SRS airbag deployment data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a
third party except when:

SRS airbag system diagnostic data

An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control
(VSC) system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another EDR. There are a variety of driving situations
which include activating the VSC under which the VSC
EDR will record certain information. The VSC EDR may
record some or all of the following information:

Officially requested by the police or other authorities
Used as a defense for Toyota in a law suit
Ordered by the court
However, if necessary Toyota will:

Behavior of the vehicle

Use the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety
performance

Steering wheel angle
Vehicle speed

Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,
and only when it is deemed necessary

To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
To what extent the brake pedal was applied

Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification information to a non−Toyota organization for
research purposes

To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of
the 4 wheels
Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
The information above is intended to be used for the
purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike
general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound
data such as conversation between passengers.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Important health and safety
information about your Toyota

New vehicle warranty
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited
warranties:

CAUTION

New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty

WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

Others

ents, and a wide variety of automobile components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. In addition,
oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as
well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm.

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Your responsibility for
maintenance

Battery

posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your
hands after handling. Used engine oil contains
chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory
animals. Always protect your skin by washing
thoroughly with soap and water.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the specified maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of
these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section
6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Accessories, spare parts and
modification of your Toyota

Spark ignition system of your
Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories
for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.
You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or
adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment
Standard.

Installation of a mobile
two−way radio system

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine
Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota
products could affect its performance, safety or durability,
and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the
modification may not be covered under warranty.

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in
your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as
multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, electronic throttle control system, cruise
control system, anti−lock brake system, traction control
system, vehicle stability control system, SRS airbag system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check
with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or
special instructions regarding installation.

vii

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Smart key system

Scrapping of your Toyota

Users of any electrical medical devices such as implanted pacemakers should consult the manufacturer of
the device for information about its operation under the
influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.
For details, see “Keys” on page 16 in Section 1−2.

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is
scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they
are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to
have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by the qualified service
shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your
vehicle.

Tires and loading on your
Toyota

Leak detection pump

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of
steering ability and braking ability, leading to an
accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be sure to keep the load limits given in
this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation
pressure and load limits, see pages 385 and 310.

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment for several minutes. It
does not indicate a malfunction.

viii

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

QU 5
Quick index
If a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on . . . . . . . . 146
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Tips for driving during break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Complete index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NO TAG

Gas station information
Fuel type:
UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher.
See page 286 for detailed information.
Fuel tank capacity:
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)
Engine oil:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.
See page 381 for detailed information.
Tire information: See pages 385 through 393.
Tire inflation pressure: See page 411.

Publication No. OM33669U
Part No. 01999-33669
Printed in Japan 01−0601−00

(

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual
tells you how to maintain your vehicle and
enables you to correctly perform your own
maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top
running order is to maintain it properly from
the moment you drive it off the showroom
floor.
The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is
packed with literally everything you need to
know to perform your own maintenance in
virtually every area of your new vehicle.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Maintenance procedures for the engine,
chassis, body, electrical system, and more,
are clearly explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune−up
Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent small problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and clearly explains how to do the
work yourself step−by−step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil
and filter replacement.

Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for CAMRY may be purchased
from any Toyota dealer or the Material Distribution Center. To purchase the repair manual,
please contact your Toyota dealer or call the Material
Distribution
Center
toll−free
at
1−800−622−2033.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Toyota belts are:

Comfortable
Easy to use
Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 1

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Overview of instruments and controls
Instrument panel overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Steering switches and overhead console overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Instrument cluster overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Indicator symbols on the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Instrument panel overview
Manual transmission models
1. Side defroster outlets
2. Side vents
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Power door lock switches
6. Power window switches
7. Glove box
8. Cup holder
9. Rear console box
10. Parking brake lever
11. Manual transmission gear shift lever
12. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock
release lever
13. Hood lock release lever
14. Window lock switch

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Automatic transmission models
1. Side defroster outlets
2. Side vents
3. Instrument cluster
4. Center vents
5. Power door lock switches
6. Power window switches
7. Glove box
8. Cup holder
9. Rear console box
10. Rear vents
11. Auxiliary box and/or power outlet
12. Automatic transmission selector lever
13. Seat heater switches
14. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock
release lever
15. Hood lock release lever
16. Parking brake pedal
17. Window lock switch

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

With manual air conditioning controls
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Theft deterrent system/engine
immobilizer system indicator light
4. Clock
5. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light
6. Emergency flasher switch
7. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system (For the
navigation system, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
8. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
9. Air conditioning controls
10. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
11. AUX adapter
12. Power outlet
13. Auxiliary boxes
14. Ignition switch
15. Power rear view mirror control switches

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

With automatic air conditioning controls
1. Headlight, turn signal and front fog
light switches
2. Wiper and washer switches
3. Theft deterrent system/engine
immobilizer system indicator light
4. Clock
5. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights and front passenger’s
seat belt reminder light
6. Emergency flasher switch
7. Audio system or navigation system
including audio system (For the
navigation system, see the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.)
8. Air conditioning controls
9. Tire pressure warning system reset
switch
10. Rear window and outside rear view
mirror defogger switch
11. AUX adapter
12. Power outlet
13. Auxiliary boxes
14. Ignition switch (with smart key system)
15. Ignition switch
(with key cylinder type ignition switch)
16. Power rear view mirror control switches

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Steering switches and
overhead console overview
Overhead console

Steering switches
1. Audio remote control switches
2. Climate remote control switches
3. Multi−information display control switch
4. Cruise control switch
5. Speech command switch
6. Telephone switches

Type A

Without moon roof

Type B

With moon roof

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

1. Personal lights
2. Interior light
3. Moon roof switches
4. Microphone
5. Auxiliary box
6. Garage door opener
7. Interior light switch

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Instrument cluster overview
Without multi−information display

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge
2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights
3. Tachometer

4. Automatic transmission shift position
indicator lights

7. Trip meter reset knob/instrument panel
light control knob

5. Speedometer

8. Odometer and two trip meters and
outside temperature display

6. Fuel gauge

9. Automatic transmission shift range
display

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

With multi−information display

1. Engine coolant temperature gauge
2. Service reminder indicators and
indicator lights
3. Tachometer

4. Automatic transmission shift position
indicator lights

7. Trip meter reset knob/instrument panel
light control knob

5. Speedometer

8. Multi−information display

6. Fuel gauge

9. Automatic transmission shift range
display

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel
Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1
or

Brake system warning light∗1
or

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Low windshield washer fluid level warning
light∗1
Vehicle stability control system and traction
control system warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

Low tire pressure warning light∗1

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Master warning light∗1

Front fog light indicator light

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

Slip indicator light

“AIRBAG ON” indicator light

Cruise control indicator light∗2

“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light

∗1 :
∗2 :

Headlight indicator light

For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers” on page 146 in Section 1−6.
If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 181 in Section 1−7.

Tail light indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 2

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Keys and Doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Smart key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electric moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14
18
20
30
36
43
46
49
49
51
53

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Keys (with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds
of keys.
1. Master keys (black)—
These keys work in every lock. Your
Toyota dealer will need one of them to
make a new key with a built−in transponder chip.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the head of
the master and sub keys. These chips are
needed to enable the system to function
correctly, so be careful not to lose these
keys. If you make your own duplicate key,
you will not be able to cancel the system
or start the engine.

Since the doors and trunk lid can be
locked without a key, you should always carry a spare master key in case
you accidentally lock your keys inside
the vehicle.
Type A

Type B only—This key is fitted with the
wireless remote control transmitter. For
information on use of the wireless remote control transmitter, see “Wireless
remote control” on page 20 in this Section.
2. Sub key (gray)—
This key will not work in the glove box,
trunk and the door located behind the
rear seat armrest (on some models).
To protect items locked in the trunk or
glove box when using valet parking,
leave the sub key with the attendant.

Type B

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

NOTICE
When using a key containing a transponder chip, observe the following
precautions:
When starting the engine, do not
use the key with a key ring resting
on the key grip and do not press
the key ring against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts.

When starting the engine, do not
use the key with other transponder
keys around (including keys of other vehicles) and do not press other
key plates against the key grip.
Otherwise the engine may not start,
or may stop soon after it starts. If
this happens, remove the key once
and then insert it again after removing other transponder keys (including keys of other vehicles) from the
ring or while gripping or covering
them with your hand to start the
engine.

Do not bend the key grip.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Keys (with smart key system)
Do not cover the key grip with any
material that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key hard against
other objects.
Do not leave the key exposed to
high temperatures for a long period,
such as on the dashboard and hood
under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key in water or
wash it in an ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key with electromagnetic materials.

KEY NUMBER PLATE
Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by a Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

The key consists of an electronic key
and a mechanical key. The mechanical
key is for emergency use. If the electronic key does not operate, you can
open the driver’s door using the mechanical key.
1. Electronic keys—These keys can lock
or unlock all the doors and can open
the trunk by using the wireless remote
control function or entry function of the
smart key system.
2. Mechanical keys—These keys can lock
or unlock the driver’s door, the glove
box and the door located behind the
rear seat armrest.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Spare keys should not be left in the
cabin. In the event that a spare key is
left in the cabin, the smart key system
will remain actuated even after the
doors have been locked. Under these
circumstances, the trunk can be opened
even after the driver has exited and
locked the vehicle, increasing the danger of theft. (Refer to “OPENING
TRUNK WITH SMART KEY SYSTEM” on
page 46 in this Section.)
To protect items locked in the trunk or the
glove box when using valet parking, leave
the electronic key with the attendant. Keep
the mechanical key with you. For details
about locking the trunk opener switch, see
“—Luggage security system” on page 47
in this Section.
A transponder chip for engine immobilizer
system has been placed in the electronic
keys. These chips are needed to enable
the system to function correctly, so be
careful not to lose these keys.

CAUTION

NOTICE

People with implanted pacemakers

When using a electronic key containing a transponder chip, observe the
following precautions:

or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system
antennas, because the radio waves
may affect the operation of such
devices. For the antenna locations
see “ANTENNA LOCATION” on page
32 in this Section.

Users of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information
about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves
could have unexpected effects on
the operation of such medical devices.

If necessary, the entry function can
be disabled. See “DISABLING THE
SMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 36
in this Section.

Do not affix any material that cuts
off electromagnetic waves (such as
a metal seal) on the electronic key.
Do not knock the electronic key
hard against other objects.
Do not leave the electronic key exposed to high temperatures for a
long period, such as on the dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the electronic key in
water or wash it in an ultrasonic
washer.
Do not keep the electronic key together with the products emitting
electromagnetic waves such as a
cellular phone.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Engine immobilizer system
The engine immobilizer system is a
theft prevention system using an electronic code. The transponder chip in
the key has an electronic code and
transmits the code to the vehicle. Only
when the electronic code in the chip
corresponds to the register ID code for
the vehicle, the engine immobilizer system will be canceled and the engine
will start.

USING A MECHANICAL KEY

KEY NUMBER PLATE

When you use the mechanical key push
the release button and take out the mechanical key as shown. Be sure to put the
mechanical key back when not it use.

Your key number is shown on the plate.
Keep the plate in a safe place such as
your wallet, not in the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you
need additional keys, duplicates can be
made by Toyota dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in a safe place.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If any of the following indicator conditions
occur, contact your Toyota dealer.

When the system is canceled, the indicator light will go off.

The indicator light stays on except

For your Toyota dealer to make you a
new key with built−in transponder chip,
your dealer will need your key number
and master key (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or electronic key
(vehicles with smart key system). However, there is a limit to the number of additional keys your Toyota dealer can make
for you.

when the theft deterrent system is setting or activating. (See “Theft deterrent
system” on page 49 in this Section.)

The indicator light does not start flashing under the following situations.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—When the key is removed from
the ignition switch.
Vehicles with smart key system—When
the ignition switch is turned off.

The engine immobilizer system is automatically set when:

The indicator light flashes inconsistent-

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—The key is removed from the ignition switch.

The engine immobilizer system is automatically canceled when:

Vehicles with smart key system—The ignition switch is turned off.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—
You insert the key to the ignition switch.

The indicator light will start flashing to
show that the system is set.

ly.

NOTICE
Do not modify, remove or disassemble the engine immobilizer system. If any unauthorized changes or
modifications are made, proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

Vehicles with smart key system—
You enter the vehicle carrying a key with
smart key system and press the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch (engine switch).
Even if the key battery is discharged, the
engine can be started. See “Smart key
system” on page 30 in this Section.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Wireless remote control—
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
Key cylinder−type ignition switch
FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY
FCC ID: MOZRI−21BTY
Smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB−1

For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS−210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Vehicles with smart key system

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

1. Indicator light
2. Lock switch
3. Alarm switch
4. Unlock switch
5. Trunk opener switch

The wireless remote control function is
designed to lock or unlock all the
doors, open the trunk lid, or activate
the alarm from a distance within
approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

If the wireless remote control transmitter
does not actuate the doors, or does not
operate from a normal distance, or if the
indicator on the transmitter is dimmed or
does not come on:

When you operate any switch, push it
slowly and securely.

Check for closeness to a radio trans-

When the switch is operated, the indicator
light flashes once. If not, the battery may
be discharged. Replace the battery at the
earliest opportunity.
The wireless remote control transmitter is
an electronic component. Observe the following instructions in order not to cause
damage the key.

Do not leave the transmitter in places
where the temperature becomes high
such as on the dashboard.

Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other
objects or dropping it.

Avoid putting it in water.

mitter such as a radio station or an
airport which can interfere with normal
operation of the key.

The battery may have been consumed.
Check the battery in the key. To replace the battery, see “—Replacing battery” on pages 26 or 28 in this Section.
If you lose your wireless remote control
key, contact your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible to avoid the possibility of
theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose
your keys” on page 356 in Section 4.)
It is possible to disable the wireless remote control system. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.

You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys (for vehicles with key cylinder−
type ignition switch) or 5 wireless remote
control transmitters (for vehicles with
smart key system) for the same vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for detailed
information.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is
no guarantee that interference will not
occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Locking and unlocking
doors
To lock or unlock all the doors, push
the switches slowly and securely.
To lock: Push the lock switch. All the
doors are locked simultaneously. At this
time one beep will sound and turn signal
lights flash once.
Check to see that the doors are securely
locked.

Locking operation (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch)

Locking operation (vehicles with smart
key system)

If any of the doors is not securely closed,
or if the key is in the ignition switch (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or key left in the vehicle (vehicles
with smart key system), locking cannot be
performed by the lock switch and a beep
will sound continuously for 10 seconds.
To stop the beep, take out the key from
the vehicle or push the unlock switch.
The answerback function (the turn signal
flash and the beep) can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Unlocking operation (vehicles with key
cylinder−type ignition switch)

Unlocking operation (vehicles with smart
key system)

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Opening trunk lid
To unlock: Push the unlock switch once to
unlock the driver’s door alone. Pushing
the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks
all the doors simultaneously. Each time
the unlock switch is pushed, two beeps
will sound and turn signal lights flash
twice.
This double switch operation to unlock all
doors can be changed to a single switch
operation. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.
If the key is in the ignition (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
ignition switch is set to ACC or ON (vehicles with smart key system), the vehicle
cannot be unlocked via the unlock switch.

The automatic locking time can also be
set to 30 seconds. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
If the lock or unlock switch is kept
pressed in, the locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the switch
and then push again.
When you unlock doors using the wireless
remote control, the illuminated entry function will be activated. (For further information, see “Illuminated entry system” on
page 128 in Section 1−5.)
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch

You have 60 seconds to open a door after
using the wireless remote unlock feature.
If a door is not opened by then, all the
doors will be automatically locked again.
If the wireless remote control is used to
lock the doors near the window or door
handle, there is a possibility that the door
may not unlocked by entry function of
smart key system. Under these circumstances, use the wireless remote control
to unlock the doors.

Vehicles with smart key system

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Activating alarm
To open the trunk lid, push and hold
the trunk opener switch of the transmitter for 1 second. A long beep will
sound.

Pushing the alarm switch for 1 second
or more blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights, turn signal
lights, tail lights and interior light.

If the key is in the ignition (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
ignition switch is set at ACC or ON (vehicles with smart key system), the trunk
lid cannot be opened by the trunk opener
switch.

Vehicles with smart key system only—
When pushing the switch, the indicator
light flashes.

Opening of the trunk lid with the wireless
remote control can be changed as follows.
Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop
the alarm midway, push any button on the
wireless remote control or set the ignition
switch to ON.

Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunk
opener switch twice in succession.

The alarm switch is used to deter vehicle
theft when you witness anyone attempting
to break into or damage your vehicle.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch

If the key is in the ignition (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the
ignition switch is set at ACC or ON (vehicles with smart key system), the alarm
does not work.

Trunk lid opens by pushing the trunk
opener switch once regardless of how
long the switch is being pressed.

Opening of the trunk lid is disabled

This alarm function can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

using the wireless remote control transmitter.

Vehicles with smart key system

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Replacing battery
(with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium
battery or equivalent.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed battery or components.

NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the components.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.

1. Open the cover using a flathead screwdriver wrapped with plastic tape.

2. Remove
frame.

the

module

from

the

key

Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the battery by following these
procedures:

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

5. Install the battery case cover and then
install the module into the key frame.
Close the cover.
6. When pushing either switch on the
wireless key, make sure the indicator
light comes on.

NOTICE
Do not bend the terminals.
Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.
3. Open and remove the battery case
cover using a coin.

4. Take out the discharged transmitter
battery and put in a new battery with
the positive (+) side up.

Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the battery and that
dust or oils do not adhere to the
case.
Close the cover securely.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Replacing battery
(with smart key system)
After replacing the battery, check that the
key operates properly. If the key still does
not operate properly, contact your Toyota
dealer.

The transmitter can easily be damaged
when replacing the battery. We recommend having the battery replaced by your
Toyota dealer. If you have to do it yourself, use a CR1632 lithium battery or
equivalent and a flathead screwdriver.

CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children from swallowing
the removed transmitter battery or
components.

NOTICE

1. Push the release button and take out
the mechanical key.

Be careful not to touch the circuit,
as this may generate static electricity that can damage the transmitter.
When replacing the transmitter battery, be careful not to lose the components.
Replace only with the same or
equivalent type recommended by a
Toyota dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according
to the local laws.
Replace the transmitter battery by following these procedures:

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

2. Using a flathead screwdriver or equivalent, open the transmitter case.

3. Remove the discharged transmitter battery by flathead screwdriver or equivalent. Insert the guide groove and lift as
shown in the above illustration.

4. Put in a new battery with the positive
(+) side up. Install the cover and insert
the mechanical key into the transmitter.
Close the transmitter case securely.

NOTICE
Do not modify the battery case. It
may cause a transmitter malfunction.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Smart key system
NOTICE

The smart key system consists mainly
of the following functions.

Make sure the positive side and
negative side of the battery are
faced correctly.

Engine immobilizer function (For de-

Do not replace the battery with wet
hands. Water may cause unexpected
rust.

Wireless remote control function (For

Do not touch or move any components inside the transmitter, or it
may interfere with proper operation.

Push button start function (For details,

Be careful not to bend the electrode
when inserting the transmitter battery and that dust or oils do not
adhere to the case.

Entry function and start function (See

Close the transmitter case securely.

LOCK FUNCTION” described below.)

After replacing the battery, check that the
transmitter operates properly. If the transmitter still does not operate properly, contact your Toyota dealer.

tails, see “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 18 in this Section.)
details, see “Wireless remote control”
on page 20 in this Section.)
see “How to start the engine” on page
316 in Section 3.)
“ENTRY
FUNCTION
AND
FUNCTION” described below.)

START

Steering lock function (See “STEERING

CAUTION

People with implanted pacemakers
or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system
antennas, because the radio waves
may affect the operation of such
devices. For the antenna locations
see “ANTENNA LOCATION” on page
32 in this Section.

If necessary, the entry function can
be disabled. See “DISABLING THE
SMART KEY SYSTEM” on page 36
in this Section.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

ENTRY
FUNCTION
FUNCTION

AND

START

Simply by carrying the key, you can
lock and unlock the doors and start the
engine.
Entry function—You can lock and unlock
the doors and open the trunk without inserting the key in the keyholes. For further information, see “Side doors” on page
36 and “Trunk lid” on page 46 in this
Section.
Entry function

Start function—You can shift the power
supply mode and start the engine when
the electronic key is in the vehicle. For
further information, see “Ignition switch”
on page 159 in Section 1−7 and “How to
start the engine” on page 316 in Section
3.

STEERING LOCK FUNCTION
When the driver’s door is opened after
turning off the engine, the steering wheel
will lock.
The steering lock is automatically unlocked when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch (engine switch) is pressed. If the
indicator light on the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch flashes green, this indicates
that the steering wheel remains locked. If
the amber indicator light flashes, this indicates that the steering lock is malfunctioning. For details, see “How to start the
engine” on page 316 in Section 3.

If the smart key system does not operate properly because of a system malfunction, consult your Toyota dealer.
Make sure to bring all of the keys. They
may be necessary to repair the system.

Start function

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

ANTENNA LOCATION
1. Antenna inside cabin and trunk
2. Antenna outside cabin and trunk

ACTUATION AREA
The entry function and start function
are available to use when a registered
key is in the actuation area.
1. Entry function actuation area—About
0.7 m (2 ft.) from each outside front
door handle and the trunk opener
switch
Only the door handle of the actuation
area that the key holder is in can be
operated.
If the key is close to the door handle,
windows or the center of the rear
bumper, on the ground or above the
roof, the entry function may not be
activated.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

2. Start function actuation area—Inside
of the cabin

When the electronic key is near a

The start function may not be activated, if the key is in the auxiliary box
of the driver’s side instrument panel
and glove box, on the instrument panel, on the package tray, on the floor,
etc.

When you are carrying an electronic

In the following cases, the smart key
system may not operate properly.

or vehicle body shape, the key may
not work well even within the actuation
area.

When facilities issuing strong electromagnetic waves such as TV towers,
electric power stations, broad casting
stations are nearby.

In places where automated payment facilities are installed (such as gas stations).

When you are carrying a electronic key
together with a mobile communications
system such as a two−way radio or
cellular phone.

When the electronic key is in contact
with or covered by a metallic object.

When another person is operating a
wireless remote control function
another vehicle near your vehicle.

When the battery is discharged. To replace the battery, see “—Replacing battery” on page 28 in this Section.

high−voltage or noise−emitting device.

key together with a key for another
smart key system equipped vehicle or
another
instrument
emitting
radio
waves.

Depending on the position of the key

When the key surface is covered by a
sticker, etc. that may cut off electromagnetic wave.

Even if the smart key system does not
operate properly, you can still enter and
start the engine. For further information,
see “Side doors” on page 36 and “Trunk
lid” on page 46 in this Section, and see
“How to start the engine” on page 316 in
Section 3.

STARTING THE ENGINE WHEN
ELECTRONIC
KEY
BATTERY
DISCHARGED

THE
IS

If the key indicator does not flash and
the engine cannot be started by using
the start function, the battery may be
discharged. Replace the key battery as
soon as possible. (See “Wireless remote control” on page 20 in this Section.)
However the engine can be started in the
following procedures.
1. While the brake pedal is depressed,
touch the Toyota logo side of the
electronic key to the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

2. Start the engine within 5 seconds after
the green indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch comes
on and a buzzer sounds.
BATTERY POWER SAVING
Both the vehicle and key transmitters are
always sending signals to each other. To
prevent battery drain, the smart key system is automatically deactivated in the following conditions:

If the electronic key is left outside of
the vehicle and within the effective
range of the entry function actuation
area for more than 10 minutes.

To reactivate the smart key system, perform any of the following:
(a) Press the lock button on the front outside door handle or trunk open button
while carrying the electronic key.
(b) Perform a wireless remote control operation.
(c) Insert and turn the mechanical key in
the keyhole of the driver’s door.

If the electronic key receives strong electromagnetic waves over a period of time,
the battery can be drastically run down.
You should always keep the following
electrical appliances at least 1 m (3 ft.)
away from the electronic key.

TV
Personal computer
Cellular phone or cordless phone recharger unit

Electric light stand
Fluorescent desk light

If the door lock or unlock operation is
not performed more than 2 weeks.
The key and the vehicle are communicating even while the vehicle is not being
driven. Do not leave the key near the
vehicle (within 2 m [7 ft.]).
The vehicle battery may drain if the
vehicle is not used for a long period of
time. To prevent battery drain, disconnect
the battery negative (−) terminal or disable
the smart key system. (For details about
disable the smart key system, see
“DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM”
on page 36 in this Section.)

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF−3
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Side doors—
—Locking and unlocking door
with key
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.

DISABLING THE SMART KEY SYSTEM
The following functions can be disabled:

A function that allows you to lock/unlock the doors and open the trunk by
simply carrying a key

A function that causes the vehicle to
beep if keys are forgotten inside the
vehicle or trunk and a door is closed

A function that shifts the power supply
mode and starts the engine when the
electronic key is in the vehicle.

Warning lights and buzzers
For details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch

If the smart key system does not operate properly because of a system malfunction, consult your Toyota dealer.
Make sure to bring all of the keys. They
may be necessary to repair the system.

Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of
the device.

Vehicles with smart key system

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Locking and unlocking with
smart key system
Insert the key into the keyhole and turn
it.
To lock: Turn the key forward.
To unlock: Turn the key backward.
With wireless remote control—All the
doors lock and unlock simultaneously with
the driver’s door. Turning the key once
will unlock the driver’s door and twice in
succession will unlock all the doors simultaneously.
Without wireless remote control—All the
doors lock and unlock simultaneously with
either front door. In the driver’s door lock,
turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in succession will unlock all the doors simultaneously.
This double key turning operation to unlock all the doors can be changed to a
single key turning operation. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
Vehicles with smart key system—For three
seconds after the doors have been locked,
the doors cannot be re−unlocked via the
smart key system.
When you unlock the doors, the illuminated entry system will be activated. (For
further information, see “Illuminated entry
system” on page 128 in Section 1−5.)

When you carry the registered key with
smart key system into the actuation area,
you can lock and unlock the side doors
without using the key. For further information of actuation area, see “Smart key
system” on page 30 in this Section.

Locking operation
Push the lock button on the front outside door handle slowly and firmly. All
the doors lock simultaneously. At this
time one beep will be heard and turn
signal lights flash once.
In the following cases, you cannot be
locked by pushing the lock button and a
beep will sound as an indicator.

When any of the doors is not securely
closed. A beep will sound continuously
for 10 seconds.

When the lock switch is pressed while
opening or closing the door. A beep
will sound continuously for 10 seconds.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

When the engine is not turned off. A

Wearing gloves may slow response time.
For three seconds after the doors have
been locked, the doors cannot be re−unlocked via the smart key system.

beep will sound continuously for 2 seconds.

When the key is left in the vehicle. A
beep will sound continuously for 2 seconds.

The answerback function (the turn signal
flash and the beep) can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When attempting to lock the doors with

When you enter the entry function actuation area, the interior light comes on for
about 15 seconds. After the light comes
on, all the side doors can be unlocked by
grasping the outside door handle.

the key near a window or a door handle. A beep will sound continuously for
2 seconds.
The beep may not sound if the key is on
the instrument panel, on the package tray,
in the glove box or on the floor, etc.
The answerback function (the turn signal
flash and the beep) can be disabled. For
details, contact your Toyota dealer.

Unlocking operation
Grasp the front outside door handle
(sensors are located on the underside
of the door handles). Only the driver’s
door unlocks when the driver’s door
handle is grasped. All the doors unlock
when the front passenger’s door handle
is grasped. At this time two beeps will
be heard and the turn signal lights
flash twice.
The doors may not unlock if the handle
is grasped too quickly. Be sure to confirm
that the doors are unlocked before pulling
the door handle. If the doors do not open
when the handle is pulled, return the handle to its original position.

You have 60 seconds to open a door after
using the unlocking function. If a door is
not opened by then, all the doors will be
automatically locked again.
The automatic locking time can also be
set to 30 seconds. For details, contact
your Toyota dealer.
The doors may unlock if the key is within
the entry function actuation area and a
large amount of water splashes on the
door handle (for example, in the rain or
in a car wash).
When you unlock the doors, the illuminated entry system will be activated. (For
further information, see “Illuminated entry
system” on page 128 in Section 1−5.)

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Locking and unlocking with
inside lock knob
SELECTING DOORS TO BE UNLOCKED
WITH ENTRY FUNCTION
The unlocking operation has 2 modes.
To change the mode, within 1 m (3 ft.)
of the vehicle press the lock switch and
the alarm, trunk opener or unlock
switch simultaneously for five seconds.

Mode

Door to be
unlocked

Wireless
remote
control
buzzer

All doors

2 beeps

Driver’s
door
only
(from
driver’s
door
switch)

Indicator
and meter
buzzer

1 beep

The ignition must be turned off.
When the mode is changed, the buzzer
will sound and an indicator is displayed on
the multi−information display as follows:

All
doors
(from front
passenger’s
door
switch)

3 beeps
1 beep

Repeating the above process allows you
to toggle between 1 and 2.

Move the lock knob.
To lock: Push the knob forward.
To unlock: Pull the knob backward.
The front doors can be opened by pulling
the inside handle even if the lock knobs
are in the locked position.

CAUTION
Do not pull the inside handle of the
front doors while driving. The doors
will open and an accident may occur.
Toyota strongly recommends that all
children be placed in the rear seat of
the vehicle.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Locking and unlocking with
power door lock switch
Closing the door with the lock knob in the
lock position will also lock the door. Be
careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle.

Push the switch.
To lock: Push the switch down on the
right side.
To unlock: Push the switch down on the
left side.

Doors cannot be locked when either front
door is open and the key is in the ignition
(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or key is left in the vehicle (vehicles with smart key system).

All the doors lock or unlock simultaneously.

Driver’s side

When the front doors are locked from the
outside or locked with the wireless remote
control transmitter, the power door lock
switch will not work until either front door
is unlocked with the key, lock knob, or
wireless remote control transmitter.

Passenger’s side

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Automatic door locking and
unlocking functions
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING
You can select the following functions:

Locking linked with the shift position
(automatic transmission models only)
All doors are automatically locked when
the selector lever is moved out of “P”
position.

Locking linked with vehicle speed
All doors are automatically locked when
the vehicle speed goes above about 20
km/h (12 mph).
You can set or cancel the automatic
door locking functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when
performing the following operations.

To select the locking linked with the
shift position:

To select the locking linked with the
vehicle speed:

1. Close all doors and set the ignition
switch to ON.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

2. Automatic transmission models only—Shift the selector lever from “P” to
the “N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds of setting the ignition switch to ON, press and hold the
driver’s side power door lock switch in
the lock position for 5 seconds and
then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
You can select the following functions:

Unlocking linked with the shift position (automatic transmission models
only)
All doors are automatically unlocked
when the selector lever is moved to
“P” position.

Unlocking linked with the driver’s
door
All doors are automatically unlocked
when the driver’s door is opened within
10 seconds after the ignition switch is
set from ON to ACC or OFF.
You can set or cancel the automatic
door unlocking functions:

To select the unlocking linked with the
shift position:

To select the unlocking linked with the
driver’s door:

1. Close all doors and set the ignition
switch to ON.

2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

2. Automatic transmission models only—Shift the selector lever from “P” to
the “N” position.

3. Within 10 seconds
tion switch to ON,
driver’s side power
the unlock position
then release.

of setting the ignipress and hold the
door lock switch in
for 5 seconds and

The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.

3. Within 10 seconds
tion switch to ON,
driver’s side power
the unlock position
then release.

of setting the ignipress and hold the
door lock switch in
for 5 seconds and

The doors will be locked and unlocked
to indicate that the function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.

Be sure to apply the parking brake when
performing the following operations.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Rear door child−protectors

Power windows
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the doors
are closed and locked, especially
when small children are in the vehicle. Along with the proper use of
seat belts, locking the doors helps
prevent the driver and passengers
from being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”
position as shown on the label.

The windows can be operated with the
switch on each door.

When the child−protector is locked, you
cannot open the rear door by the inside
door handle. We recommend using this
feature whenever small children are in the
vehicle.

The power windows work when the ignition
switch is set at ON.
Key off operation: All windows work for
about 45 seconds even after the ignition
switch is turned off. They stop working
when either front door is opened.
OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW
Use the switch on the driver’s door.
Normal operation: The window moves as
long as you hold the switch.
To open: Lightly push down the switch.
To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Automatic operation:
Type A—Push the switch completely down
and then release it. The window will fully
open. To stop the window partway, lightly
pull the switch up and then release it.

Window
lock
switch

Type B—Push the switch completely down
or pull it completely up, and then release
it. The window will fully open or close. To
stop the window partway, lightly move the
switch in the opposite direction and then
release it.
Jam protection function (type B only):
Type A (to open only)

During automatic closing operation, the
driver’s window stops and opens about
half way if something gets caught between
the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.
If the driver’s window switch is completely
pulled up and held, this function does not
work.

Type B (to open and close)

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

OPERATING
WINDOWS

THE

PASSENGERS’

Use the switches on the passengers’
doors. The driver’s door also has
switches that control the passengers’
windows.
The window moves as long as you hold
the switch.
To open: Push down the switch.
To close: Pull up the switch.
If you push in the window lock switch on
the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows
cannot be operated.

CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following.

Before you close the power windows, always make sure there is
nobody around the power windows.
You must also make sure the
heads, hands and other parts of the
bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone closes the power
windows, make sure he or she operates the windows safely.

Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the power window switches and
get trapped in a window. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in a death or serious injury.

The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the window fully closed.

When small children are in the vehicle, never let them use the power
window switches without supervision. Use the window lock switch to
prevent them from making unexpected use of the switches.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Trunk lid—
To open the trunk lid from the outside,
insert the master key (vehicles with key
cylinder−type ignition switch) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key
system) and turn it clockwise.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 310
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.
To close the trunk lid, lower it and press
down on it. After closing the trunk lid, try
pulling it up to make sure it is securely
closed.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch

The trunk lid can be opened with the wireless remote control transmitter, see
“—Opening trunk lid” on page 24 in this
Section.

CAUTION
Keep the trunk lid closed while driving. This not only keeps the luggage
from being thrown out but also prevents exhaust gases from entering
the vehicle.

OPENING
SYSTEM

TRUNK

WITH

SMART

KEY

When you carry the registered key into
the actuation area, the trunk can be
opened. For further information of actuation area, see “Smart key system” on
page 30 in this Section.

Vehicles with smart key system

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Lock release lever

—Luggage security system

To open the trunk lid from the driver’s
seat, pull up on the lock release lever.

This system helps protect things locked
in the trunk by safeguarding the trunk
lid lock release lever from unwanted
access.

A warning buzzer may sound when:

The key is brought into the cabin after
the trunk is opened, and the trunk is
then closed.

The key is near the trunk when the
trunk is closed.
The buzzer may sound even when the key
is not in the trunk. This does not indicate
a problem. However, under these circumstances, the trunk cannot be opened using
the smart key system. Open the trunk
using other methods.
If you left the key in the trunk and close
it when all side doors are locked, a beep
will sound continuously for 2 seconds. You
can open the trunk pushing the trunk
opener switch without carrying another
key. However, in some instances, the
beep may not sound when the trunk is
closed depending on the location of the
key in the trunk. In addition, when the
doors are open or unlocked, the beep may
not sound when the trunk is closed. When
closing the trunk, make sure that the key
is not left in it.

To deactivate this lock release lever from
opening the trunk lid, see “—Luggage security system” described below.

1. Close the trunk lid. Insert the master
key (vehicles with key cylinder−type
ignition switch) or mechanical key
(vehicles with smart key system) and
turn it counterclockwise to deactivate the trunk lid lock release lever.
After the operation, try pulling up on the
trunk lid lock release lever to make sure
it is locked.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Internal trunk release strap
CAUTION

Always lock the trunk lid and all
doors, and keep away the vehicle
keys out of children’s reach.

Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle. Unsupervised children
may lock themselves in the vehicle
or trunk and suffer serious injuries
or death.

2. Vehicles with trunk storage extension—After closing the door located
behind the rear seat armrest, insert
the master key (vehicles with key
cylinder−type ignition switch) or mechanical key (vehicles with smart key
system) and turn it clockwise to lock
the door.

NOTICE

If a person is locked in the trunk,
he/she can pull up the phosphorescent
strap on the inside of trunk lid to open
the trunk lid.
The phosphorescent (glow−in−the−dark)
strap will continue to glow for a time after
the trunk lid is closed. Exposing the strap
to stronger light will cause it to glow longer.

Implement the above steps to maximize security of the luggage in the
trunk whenever the vehicle is unattended.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Hood

Theft deterrent system

To open the hood:
1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The
hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood
is closed and securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open unexpectedly while driving and an accident may
occur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the
hood.
Before closing the hood, check to see that
you have not forgotten any tools, rags,
etc. Then lower the hood and make sure
it locks into place. If necessary, press
down gently on the front edge to lock it.

To deter vehicle theft, the system is
designed to sound an alarm if any of
the doors, trunk or hood is forcibly unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then reconnected when the
vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently
and flashes the headlights, tail lights, turn
signal lights and interior light.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The indicator light will remain on when all
the doors, trunk and hood are closed and
locked.

All the doors will be automatically locked
again when the following two conditions
are met:

The theft deterrent system will automatically be set after 30 seconds. When the
system is set, the indicator light will start
flashing again.

If any of the doors is unlocked without

4. After making sure the indicator light
starts flashing, you may leave the vehicle.

(vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or the ignition switch is set to
off (vehicles with smart key system).

Never leave anyone in the vehicle when
you set the system, because unlocking
from the inside will activate the system.

After one minute, the alarm will automatically stop and the indicator light will start
flashing again.

SETTING THE SYSTEM

WHEN THE SYSTEM IS SET

Reactivating the alarm

1. Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—The key is removed from the
ignition switch.

Activating the system

Once set, the system automatically resets
the alarm after the alarm stops.

Vehicles with smart key system—The
ignition switch is turned off.
The engine immobilizer system is set and
the indicator light will start flashing. (For
details, see “Engine immobilizer system”
on page 18 in this Section.)
2. Have all passengers get out of the
vehicle.
3. Close and lock all the doors, trunk and
hood.

The system will sound the alarm under
the following conditions:

If any of the doors is unlocked or if
the trunk or hood is forcibly opened
without the key, wireless remote control
or entry function of the smart key system.

If the battery terminal is disconnected
and then reconnected.

If the ignition is hotwired.
The indicator light will come on when the
system is activated.

the key, wireless remote control or
entry function of the smart key system.

If the key is not in the ignition switch

The alarm will activate again under the
same
circumstances
described
in
“Activating the system”.
Stopping the alarm
The alarm will be stopped by the following
three ways:

Set the ignition switch to ON.
Unlock any of the doors with the key
or wireless remote control.

Open the trunk with the key, wireless
remote control or entry function of the
smart key system.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Fuel tank cap
CANCELLING THE SYSTEM
The system will be cancelled
above mentioned 3 ways.

the

If the tail lights come on for 2 seconds,
the theft deterrent system has been
alarmed. Check to see if there is any
abnormality with your vehicle.
TESTING THE SYSTEM
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the system as described above.
The doors should be locked with the
key, wireless remote control or entry
function of the smart key system. Be
sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
3. Unlock any door from the inside. The
system should activate the alarm.

This indicates that the fuel filler door
is on the left side of your vehicle.

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the
lever up.
When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

4. Stop the alarm as described above.
5. Repeat this operation for the other
doors, trunk and hood. When testing
the hood, also check that the system
is activated when the battery terminal
is disconnected and then reconnected.
If the system does not work properly,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames when refueling.
The fumes are flammable.

When opening the cap, do not remove the cap quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could cause
injury by spraying out of the filler
neck if the cap is suddenly removed.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in
the event of an accident.

Use only a genuine Toyota fuel tank
cap for replacement. It is designed
to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn
the cap slowly counterclockwise,
then pause slightly before removing
it.
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh
when the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be stored on
the back side of the fuel filler door.

To prevent damage to the cap, apply
force only in the turning direction to
the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

When installing the cap, turn the cap
clockwise until you hear a click. When
you hear the click, the cap is fully closed.
If the cap is not installed securely, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on.
Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Electric moon roof
To operate the moon roof, use the
switches on the overhead console.
The moon roof works when the ignition
switch is set at ON.
The sun shade can be opened or closed
by hand.
Sliding operation—
To open: Push and hold the switch for 1
second toward the vehicle’s rear.

Sliding operation

The roof will open and stop partway 40
mm (1.6 in.) from the fully opened position. When you push the switch again, the
moon roof will open fully. To stop the roof
partway, push one of the moon roof
switches briefly.
As driving with the moon roof opened fully
will cause wind throbs, we recommend
you to drive with the moon roof partway
40 mm (1.6 in.) from the fully opened
position.
The sun shade will be opened together
with the roof.
To close: Push and hold the switch for 1
second toward the vehicle’s front.

Tilting operation

Tilting operation—
To tilt up: Push and hold the “TILT” switch
for 1 second on the “UP” side.
The roof will fully tilt up automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.
To tilt down: Push and hold the “TILT”
switch for 1 second on the “DOWN” side.
The roof will fully tilt down automatically.
To stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.
Key off operation: If both front doors are
closed, the moon roof works for about 45
seconds even after the ignition switch is
turned off. It stops working when either
door is opened.
Jam protection function: If something
gets caught between the moon roof and
frame during closing operation, the moon
roof stops and opens.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact,
this function may work even if nothing is
caught.

The roof will fully close automatically. To
stop the roof partway, push one of the
moon roof switches briefly.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
To avoid death or serious personal
injury, you must do the following.

While the vehicle is moving, always
keep the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could be killed or seriously injured if the vehicle stops
suddenly or if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

Before you close the moon roof,
always make sure there is nobody
around the moon roof. You must
also make sure nobody places his
or her head, hands and other parts
of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get
caught in the closing roof, it could
result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof,
first make sure it is safe to do so.

Never leave anyone (particularly a
small child) alone in your vehicle,
especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could
use the moon roof switch and get
trapped in the roof opening. Unattended person (particularly a small
child) can be involved in a serious
accident.

Never sit on top of the vehicle
around the roof opening.

Never try jamming any part of your
body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally, as it could result in a death or serious injury.

The jam protection function may
not work if something gets caught
just before the moon roof is fully
closed.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 3

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

56
56
60
63
64
65
65
76
95

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Front seats—
—Front seat precautions

Seats
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should have the seatback
upright, sit well back in the seat and properly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

Do not drive the vehicle unless the
occupants are properly seated. Do
not allow any passengers to sit on
top of a folded−down seatback, or
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons not properly
seated and/or not properly restrained by seat belts can be killed
or severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.

During driving, do not allow any
passengers to stand up or move
around between seats. Otherwise,
death or severe injuries can occur
in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.

Driver seat

Slightly recline the back of the
CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with
considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if
the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for driver airbag
is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of
inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides
you with a clear margin of safety.
This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your
breastbone. If you sit less than 250
mm (10 in.) away now, you can
change your driving position in several ways:

Move your seat to the rear as far

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,
many drivers can achieve the 250
mm (10 in.) distance, even with the
driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the
seat somewhat. If reclining the back
of your seat makes it hard to see
the road, raise yourself by using a
firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise
the seat if your vehicle has that
feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable,
tilt it downward. This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view
of the instrument panel controls.

as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Seat adjustment precautions
Front passenger seat

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also
deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the
airbag as possible with the seatback
adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.

The SRS side airbags are installed in
the driver and front passenger seats.
Observe the following precautions.

Do not lean against the front door
when the vehicle is in use, since
the side airbag inflates with considerable speed and force. Otherwise,
you may be killed or seriously injured.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the seat while the
vehicle is moving as the seat may
unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

Be careful that the seat does not
hit a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seat position, release the lever and try sliding the
seat forward and backward to make
sure it is locked in position.

Do not use seat accessories which

After adjusting the seatback, push

cover the area where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

your body back against the seat to
make sure the seat is locked in
position.

Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats equipped
with side airbags. Such change may
prevent the side airbag system from
activating correctly, disable the system, or cause the side airbags to
inflate accidentally, resulting in
death or serious injury.

Do not put objects under the seats.
Otherwise, the objects may interfere
with the seat−lock mechanism or
unexpectedly push up the seat position adjusting lever and the seat
may suddenly move, causing the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Adjusting front seats
(manual seat)
While adjusting the seat, do not put
your hands under the seat or near
the moving parts. Otherwise, your
hands or fingers may be caught and
injured.

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER
Hold the center of the lever and pull it
up. Then slide the seat to the desired
position with slight body pressure and
release the lever.
2. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING
(driver’s seat only)

LEVER

Pull up or push down the lever.
3. SEATBACK
LEVER

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Lean forward and pull the lever up.
Then lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Adjusting front seats (power
seat)
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.

Driver’s seat

Passenger’s seat

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Rear seats—
—Adjusting rear seats
(reclining type seat)
1. DRIVER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION,
SEAT HEIGHT AND SEAT CUSHION
ANGLE ADJUSTING SWITCH
PASSENGER’S SEAT: SEAT POSITION
ADJUSTING SWITCH
Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat at
that position.
Do not place anything under the front
seats, as this might interfere with the seat
movement.
2. SEATBACK
SWITCH

ANGLE

ADJUSTING

Move the control switch in the desired
direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback at that position.

CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and
the front passenger are sitting up
straight and well back in the seats. If
you are reclined, the lap belt may
slide past your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen
or your neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a frontal
collision, the more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death
or personal injury.
3. SEAT
LUMBAR
ADJUSTING SWITCH

SUPPORT

Push the control switch in the desired
direction.
The amount of lumbar support will change
while the switch is pushed.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Trunk storage extension
(reclining type and fixed type
seats)
SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING LEVER
Lean forward and pull the lever. Then
lean back to the desired angle and release the lever.

CAUTION

Adjustment should not be made
while the vehicle is moving.

When adjusting the seat, be careful
that the seat does not hit a passenger or luggage.

After adjusting the seatback, push
back your body to make sure it is
locked in position.

When operating the seat, be careful
not to get your hands
pinched in the seat.

feet

1. Pull down the armrest in the rear
seat.

2. Push down the handle and open the
door.
If the door is locked, insert the key and
turn it counterclockwise to unlock. Use the
master key (vehicles with the key cylinder−type ignition switch) or mechanical
key (vehicles with the smart key system).
Lock the door after use to protect items
in the trunk.
See “—Stowage precautions” on page 310
in Section 2 for precautions when loading
luggage.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Fold−down rear seat
(fold−down type seat)
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the door behind the armrest closed when not in use.

FOLDING DOWN REAR SEAT

2. Fold down the seatback.

1. To unlock the seatback, pull the lever in the trunk.

Each seatback can be folded separately.
This will enlarge the trunk as far as the
seatbacks. See “—Stowage precautions”
on page 310 in Section 2 for precautions
when loading luggage.

NOTICE
Make sure the luggage loaded in the
enlarged trunk will not damage the
webbing of the rear center seat belt
when the right seatback is folded
down.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Seat heaters
CAUTION

CAUTION

When returning the seatback to the
upright position, observe the following precautions in order to prevent
death or serious injury in a collision
or sudden stop:

Occupants must use caution when operating the seat heater because it
may make them feel too hot or cause
burns at low temperatures (erythema,
varicella). Use extra caution for the
following:

Make sure the seatback is securely

Babies, small children, elderly per-

locked by pushing forward and rearward on the top of the seatback.
Failure to do so will prevent the
seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not
twisted or caught in the seatback
and are arranged in the proper
position and are ready to use.

sons, sick persons or persons with
physical disabilities

To turn on the seat heater, push the
switch. At this time, the indicator light
will illuminate to indicate the seat heater is operating.
To turn off the seat heater, push the
switch once again.
The ignition switch must be set at ON to
operate seat heaters.

Persons who have sensitive skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or
drugs which induce sleep (sleeping
drug, cold remedy, etc.)
To prevent the seat overheating, do
not use the seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating objects which cover the seat.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Head restraints
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighed objects on the seat and do not stick
sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)
into the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not
use organic substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.). They may damage the heater
and seat surface.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, turn the switch off
when the engine is not running.

Front

Rear (type B)

For your safety and comfort, adjust the
head restraint before driving.
To raise: Pull it up.
To lower: Push it down while pressing the
lock release button.
Rear center head restraint—When an occupant sits on the rear center seat, always pull up the rear center head restraint to the lock position.

Rear (type A)

The head restraint is most effective when
it is close to your head. Therefore, using
a cushion on the seatback is not recommended.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Seat belts—
—Seat belt precautions

Armrest

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and
passengers in the vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase
the chance of injury and/or the severity of
injury in accidents.

CAUTION

Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is closest to the
top of your ears.

After adjusting the head restraint,

The seat belts provided for your vehicle
are designed for people of adult size,
large enough to properly wear them.

make sure it is locked in position.

Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

To use the armrest,
shown above.

pull

out as

Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”
on page 95 in this Section for details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly
restrained in the rear seat than in the
front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the
seat belts should be worn properly. If an
accident occurs and the seat belts are not
worn properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause death or
serious injury to the child.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do not allow any children to stand up or
kneel on either rear or front seats. An
unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or death during emergency braking or
a collision. Also, do not let the child sit
on your lap. Holding a child in your arms
does not provide sufficient restraint.
Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for
specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as
possible over the hips and not on the
waist.
Injured person. Toyota recommends the
use of a seat belt. Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.

CAUTION
Persons should ride in their seats
properly wearing their seat belts
whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely
to suffer serious bodily injury or
death in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe
the following:

Use the belt for only one person at
a time. Do not use a single belt for
two or more people—even children.

Avoid reclining the seatback any
more than needed. The seat belts
provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the
driver and the front passenger are
sitting up straight and well back in
the seats. If you are reclined, the
lap belt may slide past your hips
and apply restraint forces directly
to the abdomen or your neck may
contact the shoulder belt. In the
event of a frontal collision, the
more the seat is reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.

Be careful not to damage the belt
webbing or hardware. Take care that
they do not get caught or pinched
in the seat or doors.

Inspect the belt system periodically.
Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Damaged parts should be replaced. Do not disassemble or
modify the system.

Keep the belts clean and dry. If
they need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them to come into
contact with the belts—they may
severely weaken the belts. (See
“Cleaning the interior” on page 361
in Section 5.)

Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has been used in a
severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage
is not obvious.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Fastening front and rear
seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and is then retracted
even slightly, the belt is locked in that
position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint
system securely. (For details, see “Child
restraint” on page 95 in this Section.) To
free the belt again, fully retract the belt
and then pull the belt out once more.

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit
straight and well back in the seat.
fasten your belt, pull it out of the
tractor and insert the tab into
buckle.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the
retractor, firmly pull the belt and release
it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
up
To
rethe

You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts
to your size and the seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a
sudden stop or on impact. It also may
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A
slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend, and you can move around freely.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the belt is not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in

Take up
slack

Too high

Keep as low on
hips as possible

Adjust the position
shoulder belts.

the

Position the lap belt as low as
on your hips—not on your waist,
just it to a snug fit by pulling the
portion upward through the latch

lap and
possible
then adshoulder
plate.

the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

Both high−positioned lap belts and

Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Failure to
do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause
death or serious injures in a collision.

loose−fitting belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding under
the lap belt during a collision or
other unintended event. Keep the
lap belt positioned as low on hips
as possible.

Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder
anchor—
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to
your size.
To raise: Slide the anchor up.
To lower: Push in the lock release button
and slide the anchor down.
After adjustment make sure the anchor is
locked in position.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Seat belt comfort guides

To release the belt, press the buckle
release button and allow the belt to
retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull
it out and check for kinks or twists. Then
make sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

The outside shoulder belt comfort
guides for the rear seat outside positions will provide added seat belt comfort for children who have outgrown
child restraints and for small adults.
When the outside shoulder belt is inserted through the guide, the comfort
guide pulls the belt away from the neck
and head of an occupant.

Seat belt comfort guides are stored in the
both pockets on the sides of the rear
seatback.

To use the comfort guide, do as follows.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

INSTALLING THE COMFORT GUIDE
Vehicles with reclining type rear seat—
Adjust the seatback to the upright most
position.
1. Pull out the comfort guide from the
pocket.

2. Pinch the two edges of the shoulder
belt for the rear seat outside position with your fingers and slide the
belt past the slot of the guide as
shown above. At this time, the elastic cord must be behind the seat
belt.

CAUTION
Make sure the belt is not twisted and
that it lies flat. The elastic cord must
be behind the belt and the guide
must be on the front.

3. Buckle, position and release the seat
belt. (For wearing the seat belt, see
“—Fastening front and rear seat
belts” on page 67 in this Section.)

CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be kept
away from the neck, and should not
fall off the shoulder. Failure to observe these precautions could reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt in
an accident, causing death or serious
injury.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are not long enough,
a personalized seat belt extender is available from your Toyota dealer free of
charge.
Please contact your local Toyota dealer to
order the proper required length for the
extender. Bring the heaviest coat you expect to wear for proper measurement and
selection of length. Additional ordering information is available at your Toyota dealer.
REMOVING
AND
COMFORT GUIDE

STORING

THE

Pinch the two edges of the seat belt
together so that you can slide them out
of the guide. Store the guide with the
elastic cord into the pocket.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop
while driving, remove and store the
comfort guide in its pocket when it is
not in use.

CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender,
observe the following precautions.
Failure to follow these instructions
could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt restraint system in case of
an accident, increasing the chance of
death or serious injury.

Remember that the extender provided for you may not be safe when
used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different
seating position than the one originally intended.

If the seat belt extender has been
connected to the driver’s seat belt
buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the
driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears the seat belt even if not
wearing it. In this case, the driver’s
airbag may not activate correctly,
causing death or serious injury in
the event of collision. Be sure to
wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Make

sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front
passenger
seat.
If
the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate
correctly, causing death or serious
injury in the event of collision.

Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt extender if you
can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.

Do not use the seat belt extender
when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seat
belt, insert the tab into the seat belt
buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on
the buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt are both facing
outward as shown.
You will hear a click when the tab locks
into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on
the buckle release button on the extender,
not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Seat belt pretensioners
As far as the seat belt extender on the
front passenger side is concerned, do not
fail to disconnect the extender from the
seat belt after the above operation in order to activate the front passenger airbag
correctly when getting into the vehicle
next time.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not activate if no passenger is
detected in the front passenger seat by
the front passenger occupant classification
system. However, the front passenger’s
seat belt pretensioner may activate if luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 91 in this
Section.)

When not in use, remove the extender
and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent you
from properly latching the tab and
buckle.

If the seat belt does not function

The driver and front passenger seat
belt pretensioners are designed to be
activated in response to a severe frontal impact.

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate together in all collisions.

When the sensor detects a severe frontal
impact, the front seat belts are quickly
drawn back by the retractors so that the
belts snugly restrain the occupants.

normally, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat
until the seat belt is fixed, because
it cannot protect an adult occupant
or your child from death or serious
injury.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

7. Airbag sensor assembly
The seat belt pretensioners are controlled
by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag
sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
When the seat belt pretensioners are activated, an operating noise may be heard
and a small amount of non−toxic gas may
be released. This does not indicate that
a fire is occurring. This gas is normally
harmless.

The seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the following components
and their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. Front airbag sensors
2. SRS warning light
3. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights (for front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger
seat)
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
6. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

Once the seat belt pretensioners have
been activated, the seat belt retractors
remain locked.

CAUTION
Do not modify, remove, strike or open
the seat belt pretensioner assemblies,
airbag sensor or surrounding area or
wiring. Failure to follow these instructions may prevent the seat belt pretensioners from activating correctly,
cause sudden operation of the system
or disable the system, which could
result in death or serious injury. Consult your Toyota dealer about any repair and modification.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
seat belt pretensioners in some
cases.
Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
Repairs on or near the front seat
belt retractor assemblies
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure or console

buckle

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 146 in Section 1−6.)
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
seat belt pretensioners are operating
properly.

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than about 6 seconds.

The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

Either seat belt pretensioner assembly
or surrounding area is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

If any seat belt does not retract or
cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant seat
belt pretensioner.

The seat belt pretensioner assembly or
surrounding area has been damaged.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SRS airbags—
—SRS driver airbag, driver knee
airbag and front passenger airbag
In response to a severe frontal impact,
the SRS front airbags work with the seat
belts to help reduce injury by inflating.
The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s
head, chest or knee caused by hitting the
vehicle interior.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the
primary safety protection provided by
the seat belts.
Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED
AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor
vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The
airbag system controls airbag deployment
power for the driver and front passenger.
The driver airbag system consists of the
driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front
passenger’s airbag system consists of the
front passenger occupant classification
sensor etc.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not
activate if there is no passenger sitting in
the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt
is buckled up, regardless of the presence
of an occupant in the seat. (As for the
front passenger occupant classification
system, see “—Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 91 in this
Section.)
Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a supplement to the
primary protection of the driver and
front passenger seat belt systems.
The driver and front passenger can
be killed or seriously injured by the
inflating airbags if they do not wear
the available seat belts properly.
During sudden braking just before
a collision, an unrestrained driver
or front passenger can move forward into direct contact with or
close proximity to the airbag which
may then deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum protection
in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must
wear their seat belts properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of
death or serious injury or being
thrown out of the vehicle. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, see “Seat
belts” on page 65 in this Section.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Improperly seated and/or restrained
infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seat of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seat is the
safest for infants and children. For
instructions concerning the installation of a child restraint system, see
“Child restraint” on page 95 in this
Section.

The SRS front airbags are designed to
deploy in severe (usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and duration
of the forward deceleration of the vehicle exceeds the designed threshold
level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the
severity of the impact is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision
when the vehicle has the impact straight
into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be
considerably higher if the vehicle strikes
an object, such as a parked vehicle or
sign pole, which can move or deform on
impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an
underride collision (e.g. a collision in
which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,
or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions
where the forward deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the
seat belt pretensioners may not activate
together.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side
Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally
designed to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it
rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a
collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may
occur.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Hitting a curb,
edge of pavement
or hard surface

The SRS front airbag system consists
mainly of the following components, and
their locations are shown in the illustration.

Falling into or
jumping over
a deep hole

1. Front airbag sensors
2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights (for front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger
seat)
3. Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy
if a serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.

With manual driver’s seat

4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

6. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
7. Driver’s seat position sensor
8. Airbag sensor assembly
9. Knee airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
10. Airbag module for driver
(airbag and inflator)
11. SRS warning light
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
With power driver’s seat

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The front airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.
If an impact results in a forward deceleration beyond the designed threshold level,
the system triggers the airbag inflators. At
this time a chemical reaction in the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with
non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward
motion of the occupants. The front airbags
then quickly deflate, so that there is no
obstruction of the driver’s vision should it
be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
loud noise and release some smoke and
residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the head and chest, it
may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These
are usually in the nature of minor burns
or abrasions and swelling, but the force of
a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries, especially if an occupant’s
hands, arms, chest or head is in close
proximity to the airbag module at the time
of deployment. This is why it is important
for the occupant to; avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the
occupant and the airbag module; sit
straight and well back into the seat; wear
the available seat belt properly; and sit as
far as possible from the airbag module,
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel
hub, lower portion of driver’s side instrument panel, airbag cover and inflator) may
be hot for several minutes after deployment, so do not touch! The airbags inflate
only once. The windshield may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of
the inflating airbag.

CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is
too close to the steering wheel, lower
portion of driver’s side instrument
panel or dashboard during airbag deployment can be killed or seriously
injured. Toyota strongly recommends
that:

The driver sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while
still maintaining control of the vehicle.

The front passenger sit as far back
as possible from the dashboard.

All vehicle occupants be properly
restrained using the available seat
belts.
For instructions and precautions concerning the seating position, see
“—Front seat precautions” on page
56 in this Section.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do not sit on the edge of the seat

Toyota strongly recommends that all

Do not put anything or any part of

or lean against the dashboard when
the vehicle is in use, since the
front passenger airbag could inflate
with considerable speed and force.
Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates,
can be killed or seriously injured.
Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt
properly.

infants and children be placed in
the rear seat of the vehicle and be
properly restrained.

your body on or in front of the
dashboard, lower portion of driver’s
side instrument panel or steering
wheel pad that houses the front airbag system. They might restrict
inflation or cause death or serious
injury as they are projected rearward by the force of the deploying
airbags. Likewise, the driver and
front passenger should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.

Do not hold a child on your lap or
in your arms. Use a child restraint
system in the rear seat. For instructions concerning the installation of
a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 95 in this Section.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do not modify or remove any wir-

Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch—Do not attach any
heavy, sharp or hard objects such
as keys or accessories to the ignition switch. The objects may restrict the SRS knee airbag inflation
or be thrust into the driver’s seat
area by the force of the deploying
airbag, thus causing a danger.

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike
or open any components such as
the steering wheel pad, steering
wheel, column cover, dashboard
near the front passenger airbag,
front passenger airbag cover, front
passenger airbag, driver knee airbag or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the front airbag
system from activating correctly,
cause sudden activation of the system or disable the system, which
could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
front airbags operation.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS front airbag system in some
cases.
Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
Attachment of a grille guard (bull
bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,
winches or any other equipment to
the front end
Repairs made on or near the front
fenders, front end structure, console, steering column, steering
wheel or dashboard near the front
passenger airbag

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources. (For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 146 in Section 1−6.)
The indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
SRS front airbags are operating properly.

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

The light does not come on when the

The front of the vehicle (shaded in the

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than about 6 seconds.

The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel
or
front passenger
airbag cover
(shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags
In response to a severe side impact, the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help
reduce injury by inflating. The SRS side
airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s or front passenger’s chest, and
the SRS curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s, front
passenger’s or rear outside passenger’s
head.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear outside passengers in
addition to the primary safety protection provided by the seat belts.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger
seat will not activate if there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if luggage is put in
the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up
regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant classification system, see
“—Front passenger occupant classification
system” on page 91 in this Section.)
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the passenger side are activated even with no
passenger in the front seat or rear outside
seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the side airbags are not
activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbag and curtain
shield airbag system is designed
only as a supplement to the primary protection of the driver, front
passenger and rear outside passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident,
the driver and all passengers in the
vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an accident reduces the
chances of death or serious injury
or being thrown out of the vehicle.
For instructions and precautions
concerning the seat belt system,
see “Seat belts” on page 65 in this
Section.

Do not allow anyone to lean his/her

Improperly seated and/or restrained

head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof
side rail from which the SRS side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
deploy even if he/she is a child
seated in the child restraint system.
It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the deploying airbag could cause death or serious injury to the occupant.

infants and children can be killed
or seriously injured by the deploying airbags. An infant or child who
is too small to use a seat belt
should be properly secured using a
child
restraint
system.
Toyota
strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the
rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children.
For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page
95 in this Section.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front
Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system may not activate if the
vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision
to the side of the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the side.
Always wear your seat belts properly.

The SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a
front or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low−speed side
collision.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system consists mainly of the following components, and their locations are
shown in the illustration.
1. SRS warning light
2. “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights (for front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the front passenger
seat)
3. Curtain shield airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
4. Front passenger occupant classification
system (ECU and sensors)
5. Side airbag modules
(airbag and inflator)
6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors
8. Front passenger’s
switch

seat

belt

buckle

9. Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system is controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
In a severe side impact, the side and
curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the
curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain
shield airbag inflators. At this time a
chemical reaction in the inflators quickly
fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help
restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a
fairly loud noise and release some smoke
and residue along with non−toxic gas. This
does not indicate a fire. This smoke may
remain inside the vehicle for some time,
and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to
wash off any residue as soon as possible
to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit
from the vehicle, you should do so immediately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a
fraction of a second, so the airbags must
inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also cause minor burns or
abrasions and swelling.
Front seats as well as parts of the front
and rear pillars, and roof side rail may be
hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags
are designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield
airbags
inflate with considerable
force. To reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front passenger and
rear outside passengers must:

Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their
backs upright and against the seats
at all times.

Do not allow anyone to lean against
the door when the vehicle is in use,
since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured. Special care should
be taken especially when you have
a small child in the vehicle.

Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, distributing your weight evenly
in the seat. Do not apply excessive
weight to the outer side of the
seats with a side airbag and to the
front pillar, rear pillar and roof side
rail with a curtain shield airbag.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do not allow anyone to get his/her

Do not allow anyone to kneel on

Do not allow anyone to get his/her

head close to the area where the
side airbag and curtain shield airbag inflate, since these airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

the passenger seat, facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

head or hands out of windows,
since the curtain shield airbags
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you have a small child
in the vehicle.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do not hook a hanger, heavy or
sharp pointed objects on the coat
hook. If the curtain shield airbag
inflates, those items will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury. When you hang clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly.

Do not use seat accessories which
Do not attach a cup holder or any

Do not attach a microphone or any

other device or object on or around
the door. When the side airbag inflates, the cup holder or any other
device or object will be thrown with
great force, or the side airbag may
not activate correctly, resulting in
death or serious injury. Likewise,
the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their
arms or on their knees.

other device or object around the
area where the curtain shield airbag
activates such as on the windshield
glass, side door glass, front and
rear pillars, roof side rail and assist
grips. When the curtain shield airbag inflates, the microphone or other device or object will be thrown
away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death or serious
injury.

cover the parts where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, causing death or
serious injury.

Do not modify or replace the seats
or upholstery of the seats with side
airbags. Such changes may prevent
the side airbag system from activating correctly, disable the system or
cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do not disassemble or repair the
front and rear pillars and roof side
rails containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable
the system or cause the curtain
shield airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions
can result in death or serious injury.
Consult your Toyota dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for
a person with a physical disability,
consult your Toyota dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS
side airbags and curtain shield airbags operation.

NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following
changes without
consulting your
Toyota dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the
SRS side airbag and curtain shield
airbag system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices
such as a mobile two−way radio,
cassette tape player or compact
disc player
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the side structure of
the passenger compartment
Repairs made on or near the console or front seat

This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are operating properly.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible:

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

The portion of the front pillars, rear

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible.

The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than about 6 seconds.

Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have been inflated.

The portion of the doors (shaded in the
illustration) was involved in an accident
that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain
shield airbags to inflate.

The surface of the seats with the side
airbag (shaded in the illustration) is
scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
pillars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.

NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables
before contacting your Toyota dealer.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Front passenger occupant
classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front
passenger occupant classification system. This system detects the conditions
1—4 in the table on page 93 and based
on these conditions activates or deactivates the following systems;

If the front passenger occupant classification system determines that a person of
adult size sits in the front passenger seat
but the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, one of the following is likely
to have occurred:

Front passenger airbag
Side airbag on the front passenger

A rear passenger lifts the front passenger seat cushion with their legs.

Objects are placed under the front pas-

seat

senger seat.

Front passenger’s seat belt pretension-

The front passenger seatback is in

er
The system monitors the weight and
load on the front passenger seat, and
the seat belt buckle switch to determine
conditions 1—4.
In order for the system to detect the
conditions correctly, do not do any of
the following:

Apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g. seatback pocket).

Attach a commercial seatback table,
etc. to the front passenger seat seatback.

Put weight on the front passenger seat

contact with the rear seat.
The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights indicate the actuation of
the front passenger airbag, side airbag
on the front passenger seat and front
passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will be
illuminated when the ignition switch is set
at ON with the condition 2 in the table
shown below.

To ensure the system correctly detects an
adult sitting in the front passenger seat,
make sure the above do not occur.
Make sure that the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated when an adult is
seated in the front passenger seat. If the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, and with the seat
belt worn correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the
rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.

by putting your hands or feet on the
seatback from the rear passenger seat.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights will be illuminated initially when the ignition switch is set at
ON. After about four seconds, they will
go off. After that, the front passenger
occupant classification system operates
and judges which indicator light be illuminated.

The SRS warning and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights will come on if there is
a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Indicator/warning light
Condition detected
by the front
passenger occupant
classification system

Devices

“AIRBAG ON” and
“AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights

SRS warning
light

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder light

1. Adult∗1

“AIRBAG ON”

Off

Flashing∗4

2. Child∗2 or child
restraint system∗3

“AIRBAG OFF”

Off

Flashing∗4

Deactivated

3. Unoccupied

Not illuminated

Off

Deactivated

4. There is a
malfunction in the
system

“AIRBAG OFF”

Off

Deactivated

Front
passenger
airbag

Side airbag
on the front
passenger
seat

Curtain shield
airbag in the
front
passenger
side

Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner

Activated
Activated
Activated

Deactivated
Activated

∗1 :

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
∗3 : Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 95 in this Section as for installing the
child restraint system.)
∗4 : In the event that the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
∗2 :

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
To avoid potential death or serious
injury when the front passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.

Do not recline the front passenger
seat seatback so that it interferes
with a rear seat as it may cause the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light be illuminated. If the seatback interferes
with the rear seat, return the seatback to a position where it does
not interfere with the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback
as upright as possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness of the seat belt system.

Make

sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated when
using the seat belt extender for the
front
passenger
seat.
If
the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, disconnect the extender
tongue from the seat belt buckle,
then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender
after making sure the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light is illuminated. If you
use the seat belt extender while the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, the front passenger
airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate
correctly, which could cause death
or serious injury in the event of
collision.

an adult sits in the front
passenger seat, the “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light should be illuminated.
If
the
“AIRBAG
OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, ask
the passenger to sit up straight,
well back in the seat, feet on the
floor, and with the seat belt worn
correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light still remains illuminated, either ask the passenger to
move to the rear seat, or if that is
not
possible,
move
the
front
passenger seat fully rearward.

Wear the seat belt properly.
Make sure the front passenger’s
seat belt tab has not been left inserted into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger
seat.

Do not apply a heavy load to the
front passenger seat or equipment
(e.g. seatback pocket).

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Child restraint—
—Child restraint precautions
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands
or feet on the front passenger seat
seatback from the rear passenger
seat.

Do not let a rear passenger lift the
front passenger seat with their feet
or press on the seatback with their
legs.

Do not put objects under the front
passenger seat.

Child restraint systems installed on
the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.

When it is unavoidable to install the
forward−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the
proper order. (As for the installation
order, see “—Child restraint system” on page 97 in this Section.)

Do not remove the seat.
Do not kick the front passenger

Toyota strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint systems for
children.

seat or subject it to severe impact.
Otherwise, the SRS warning light
may come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection system. In this
case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.
and Canada now require the use of a
child restraint system.

The “AIRBAG ON” indicator light may be
illuminated (the front passenger airbag and
side airbag on the front passenger seat
may deploy) even if observing the above
cautions, when a child sits in, or a forward−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat. Refer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” on
page 76 and “Child restraint” on page 95
in this Section.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint
system, the child should sit in the rear
seat and must be restrained using the
vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on
page 65 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a
child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint
system depending on age and size
of the child. Holding a child in your
arms is not a substitute for a child
restraint system. In an accident, the
child can be crushed against the
windshield, or between you and the
vehicle’s interior.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Toyota strongly urges use of a

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

Do not use the seat belt extender

proper child restraint system which
conforms to the size of the child,
installed on the rear seat. According to accident statistics, the child
is safer when properly restrained in
the rear seat than in the front seat.

tem should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.

when installing a child restraint
system on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system with the seat belt
extender connected to the seat belt,
the seat belt will not securely hold
the child restraint system, which
could cause death or serious injury
to the child or other passengers in
the event of collision.

Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the force of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.

On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbags and/or curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could
cause death or serious injury to the
child.

Make sure you have complied with
all installation instructions provided
by the child restraint manufacturer
and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly,
it may cause death or serious injury
to the child in the event of a sudden stop or accident.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small
child or baby must itself be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must
carefully consult the manufacturer’s instructions which accompany the child
restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child
restraint system following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate age
and size of the child for the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system correctly
following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer. General directions are also
provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be
installed on the rear seat. According to
accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than
in the front seat.

—Types of child restraint
system
Child restraint systems are classified into
the following 3 types depending on the
child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following
the instructions provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of a child restraint
system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on
page 109 in this Section.

(A) Infant seat

The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle may also be used.
See “—Installation with child restraint lower anchorages” on page 111 in this Section.

When not using the child restraint system,
keep it secured with the seat belt or place
it in the trunk or somewhere other than
the passenger compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the
event of a sudden stop or accident.
(B) Convertible seat

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Installation with seat belt

(A) INFANT SEAT INSTALLATION
An infant seat must be used in rear−
facing position only.

CAUTION

Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Most upright position

Do not install a child restraint sys-

Vehicles with reclining type rear

tem on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

seat—When installing a child restraint system in the rear center
position, adjust both seatbacks to
the most upright position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.

If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the infant seat following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle
taking care not to twist the belt. Keep
the lap portion of the belt tight.

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

If the seat belt does not function
normally, it cannot protect your
child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Toyota dealer immediately. Do not install the child
restraint system on the seat until
the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make
sure the belt is in the lock mode before
letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing
against the seat
let the shoulder
it will go to hold
ly.

the infant seat firmly
cushion and seatback,
belt retract as far as
the infant seat secure-

100

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the infant seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION
A convertible seat must be used in forward−facing or rear−facing position depending on the age and size of the
child. When installing, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions about the
appropriate age and size of the child as
well as directions for installing the
child restraint system.

101

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Install the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification
system. In order to activate the occupant
classification system correctly, install the
forward−facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat in the following
order:
1. Set the ignition switch to ON.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the
rearward position.
3. Put the child restraint system on the
front passenger seat without putting
your weight on the front passenger
seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat
belt buckle.
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended. To hold the seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.
6. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

Never install a rear−facing child re-

7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child, complying
with the instructions provided by the
child restraint system manufacturer.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light should
be illuminated when the ignition switch is
set at ON and the child is in the child
restraint system after following these procedures. The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
indicates the SRS front passenger airbag
and side airbag on the passenger side will
not deploy. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated, remove the child restraint system and reinstall it with the engine off. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator
light is illuminated when the ignition switch
is set at ON, then the SRS front passenger airbag and side airbag on the passenger side may deploy in an accident. Do
not drive the vehicle in this condition. Remove the child restraint system and contact your Toyota dealer.

straint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be
installed on the front passenger
seat when unavoidable. If you must
install the child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, put the
seat in its most rearward position,
and install the forward−facing child
restraint system in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can
not detect the presence of the child
restraint system and the front passenger airbag and side airbag on
the front passenger seat could
deploy, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

102

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

On vehicles with side airbags and

Move seat
fully back

Never install a rear−facing child re-

A forward−facing child restraint sys-

straint system on the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the
event of an accident, the impact of
the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag could cause death or
serious injury to the child if the
rear−facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger
seat.

curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and/or curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

103

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Most upright position

Do not install a child restraint sys-

Vehicles with reclining type rear

If the driver’s seat position does
not allow sufficient space for safe
installation, install the child restraint system on the rear right
seat.

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through
or around the convertible seat following
the
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt
tight.

104

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it
in the lock mode. When the belt is
then retracted even slightly, it cannot
be extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely,
make sure the belt is in the lock mode
before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat
firmly against the seat cushion and
seatback, let the shoulder belt retract
as far as it will go to hold the convertible seat securely.

105

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different directions to be sure
it is secure. Follow all the installation
instructions provided by its manufacturer.

4. To remove the convertible seat, press
the buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or older child passenger.

106

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

On vehicles with side airbags and
curtain shield airbags, do not allow
the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the
door or the area of the seat, front
or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain
shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in a child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side
airbag and/or curtain shield airbag
inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.

Move seat
fully back

CAUTION

A forward−facing child restraint system should be allowed to be
installed on the front passenger
seat only when it is unavoidable.
Always move the seat as far back
as possible even if the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated,
because the front passenger airbag
could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the
child may be killed or seriously injured.

Most upright position

Vehicles with reclining type rear
seat—When installing a child restraint system in the rear center
position, adjust both seatbacks to
the most upright position. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot be securely restrained and this
may cause death or serious injuries
in a collision.

107

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt
is positioned across the center of
child’s shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from child’s neck, but
not falling off child’s shoulder.
Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

Both high−positioned lap belts and
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run
the lap and shoulder belt through or
around the booster seat and across the
child following the instructions provided
by its manufacturer and insert the tab
into the buckle taking care not to twist
the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly
across the child’s shoulder and that the
lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on
page 65 in this Section for details.

Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in
the buckle as this may prevent your
child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.

loose−fitting belts could cause
death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a
collision or other unintended event.
Keep the lap belt positioned as low
on a child’s hips as possible.

For child’s safety, do not place the
shoulder belt under child’s arm.

After inserting the tab, make sure
the tab and buckle are locked and
that the lap and shoulder portions
of the belt are not twisted.

108

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Using a top strap
Symbol

Anchor brackets

2. To remove the booster seat, press the
buckle release button and allow the
belt to retract.

Follow the procedure below for a child
restraint system that requires the use
of a top strap.

Use the anchor bracket on the package
tray behind the rear seat to attach the top
strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each
rear seating position.
This symbol indicates the locations of the
anchor brackets.

109

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

TO USE THE ANCHOR BRACKET:
1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest position.

2. Open the lid of the anchor bracket.

3. Fix the child restraint system with
the seat belt.
Latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top strap.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child restraint” on
page 95 in this Section.

CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely
latched, and check that the child restraint system is secure by pushing
and pulling it in different directions.
Follow all the installation instructions
provided by its manufacturer.

110

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Installation with child
restraint lower anchorages

Lower anchorages for the child restraint
systems interfaced with the FMVSS225
or
CMVSS210.2
specifications
are
installed in the rear seat.
The anchorages are installed in the clearance between the seat cushion and seatback of both outside rear seats.
Child restraint systems interfaced with the
FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification
can be fixed with these anchorages. In
this case, it is not necessary to fix the
child restraint system with a seat belt on
the vehicle.

CHILD
RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION

SYSTEM

1. Vehicles with reclining type rear
seat—Adjust the seatback to the
most upright position.
Make sure the seatback is locked securely.

Canada only
Type A

111

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

2. Widen the gap between the seat
cushion and seatback slightly and
confirm the position of the lower anchorages near the button on the
seatback.
3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower
straps onto the anchorages and
tighten the lower straps.
Type B—Latch the buckles onto the
anchorages.
For owners in Canada—The symbol on
a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top
strap, it should be anchored. (For the
installation of the top strap, see “—Using
a top strap” on page 109 in this Section.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

When using the lower anchorages
for the child restraint system, be
sure that there are no irregular objects around the anchorages or that
the seat belt is not caught.

Push and pull the child restraint
system in different directions to be
sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by
its manufacturer.

Do not install a child restraint system on the rear seat if it interferes
with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. Otherwise, the child or
front seat occupant(s) may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a collision.

Canada only
Type B

112

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 4

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Steering wheel and Mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auto anti−glare inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

114
114
116
116
117

113

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tilt and telescopic steering
wheel

Outside rear view mirrors—
CAUTION

Do not adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is moving. Doing
so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

After adjusting the steering wheel,
try moving it up and down or forward and rearward to make sure it
is locked in position.
To adjust the steering wheel position,
hold the steering wheel, push down the
lock release lever. Then tilt the steering
wheel to the desired angle, push or pull
it to the desired steering column length
and return the lever to its original position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the side of your vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the outside
rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object
seen in a convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than when seen in a flat
mirror.
On some models, when you push the rear
window defogger switch, the heater panels
in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear
window and outside rear view mirror defoggers” on page 129 in Section 1−5.)

114

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Power rear view mirror
control
CAUTION

NOTICE

Do not adjust the mirror while the

If ice should jam the mirror, do not
operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de−icer to free
the mirror.

vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur
resulting in death or serious injuries.

Since the mirror surfaces can get
hot, do not touch them when the
defogger switch is on.

NOTICE
The outside rear view mirrors are
fixed in place. Do not try to fold the
mirrors. It may damage the mirrors.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.
1. Master switch—To select the mirror to
be adjusted
Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”
(right).
2. Control switch—To move the mirror
Push the switch in the desired direction.
Mirrors can be adjusted when the ignition
switch is set at ACC or ON.

115

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Anti−glare inside rear view
mirror

Auto anti−glare inside rear
view mirror
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just
see the rear of your vehicle in the mirror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving, operate the lever on the lower
edge of the mirror.

This mirror is equipped with auto anti−
glare function. The function is designed
to reduce glare from the headlights of
the vehicle behind you during night
driving.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1
The reflection in the mirror has greater
clarity at this position.
Night driving—Lever at position 2
Remember that by reducing glare you also
lose some rear view clarity.

When the ignition switch is set at ON, the
inside rear view mirror always turns on in
the automatic function mode.
The indicator illuminates to show you that
the function is on.

116

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Vanity mirrors
In automatic function mode, if the mirror
detects light from the headlights of the
vehicle behind you, the mirror surface
darkens slightly to reduce the reflected
light.
To turn off and on the automatic function,
push the “AUTO” switch.
Adjust it before driving so that the rear
view is in the best condition.
When the inside air temperature is low, it
may take a little longer for the mirror to
darken in response to the detection of
headlights.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the
vehicle is moving. Doing so may
cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious injuries.

To ensure correct functioning of anti−
glare mirror sensors located on both
sides of the mirror, do not touch or
cover the sensors with your finger or
a piece of cloth, etc.

To use the vanity mirror, swing down
the sun visor and slide the cover.
On some models—The lights come on
when you slide the cover.

117

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

118

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 5

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Lights, Wipers and Defogger
Headlights and turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wipers and washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers . . . . . . . . . . .

120
125
126
126
126
127
128
128
129

119

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Headlights and turn signals
(for the U.S.A.)
When the tail lights/headlights are turned
on, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob is turned
fully clockwise.
However, the brightness of the instrument
cluster will not be reduced in daytime
even when the tail lights/headlights are
turned on.
Automatic operation—
To turn on or off the lights automatically, twist the headlight/turn signal lever
knob to the “AUTO” position when the
ignition switch is set at ON.

HEADLIGHTS
Manual operation—
To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.
Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights
Position
above

2—Headlights

and

all

the

The headlights and all of the lights in
position 1 automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.
Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.

The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
If you feel that the automatic light control
comes into operation too early or too late,
have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota
dealer.

The headlight indicator lights up in the
instrument cluster.

120

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Automatic light cut off system

NOTICE

Position 1—
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened after the ignition
switch is set to off.
Position 2 or “AUTO” position with the
headlights on—

To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
can make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day. The
DRL system can be helpful in many different driving conditions, but they can be
especially helpful in the short periods after
dawn and before sunset.

The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when any of the doors or trunk
lid is opened and closed after the ignition
switch is set to off.

The DRL system will make your headlights
come on at a reduced brightness when:

The lights can be turned off immediately
by pushing the lock switch on the wireless
remote control transmitter with all the
doors locked and the trunk lid closed.

The light switch is in the “AUTO” posi-

The time period before the lights turn off
can be changed. For details, ask your
Toyota dealer.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept
open, the lights automatically turn off after
20 minutes.
To turn on the lights again, set the ignition
switch at ON or actuate the headlight
switch. If you are going to park for over
one week, make sure the knob is in the
“DRL OFF” position.

The ignition is on with the engine running.
tion with the headlights off or position
1.

The parking brake is released.
To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
position 1.
Twist the knob to position 2 to turn the
headlights to full intensity for night driving.
To turn off the DRL system, twist the knob
to the position 3 (“DRL OFF”) or turn the
ignition switch off.
The daytime running light system can be
disabled. For details, contact your Toyota
dealer.

121

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Headlights and turn signals
(for Canada)

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

TURN SIGNALS

HEADLIGHTS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.

To turn on the following lights: Twist
the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

The ignition switch must be set at ON.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument panel lights

The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.

The tail light indicator (green light) on the
instrument panel will tell you that the tail
lights are on.

To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.

Position
above

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
even when the headlights are off.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 400 in Section 7−3.

2—Headlights

and

all

the

Position 3 (“AUTO”)—Headlights and all of
the lights in the position 1
They automatically turn on or off depending on the darkness of the surroundings.

122

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Automatic light cut off system

Manually twist the knob to the position 2
to turn on the headlights if they are needed immediately when entering a dark tunnel, parking structure, etc.

Position 1—
The lights automatically turn off when the
driver’s door is opened after the ignition
switch is set to off.

When the tail lights/headlights are turned
on, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control knob is turned
fully clockwise.

Position 2 or position 3 with the headlights on—
The lights automatically turn off after 30
seconds when any of the doors or trunk
lid is opened and closed after the ignition
switch is set to off.

However, the brightness of the instrument
cluster will not be reduced in daytime
even when the tail lights/headlights are
turned on.
The automatic light control sensor is on
the top of the instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument
panel, and/or do not affix anything on the
windshield to block this sensor.
If you feel that the automatic light control
comes into operation too early or too late,
have the sensor adjusted by your Toyota
dealer.

The lights can be turned off immediately
by pushing the lock switch on the wireless
remote control transmitter with all the
doors locked and the trunk lid closed.
The time period before the lights turn off
can be changed. For details, ask your
Toyota dealer.
If any of the doors or trunk lid is kept
open, the lights automatically turn off after
20 minutes.
To turn on the lights again, set the ignition
switch at ON or actuate the headlight
switch. If you are going to park for over
one week, make sure the light switch is
in the “OFF” position.

123

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the lights on
for a long period when the engine is
not running.

The ignition is on with the engine running.

The knob is in the “OFF” position,
The parking brake is released.

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn
the headlights on and push the lever away
from you (position 1). Pull the lever toward you (position 2) for low beams.

To turn on the other exterior lights and
instrument panel lights, twist the knob to
position 1.

The headlight high beam indicator light
(blue light) on the instrument panel will
tell you that the high beams are on.

position 1 or position 3 with the headlights off.

Twist the knob to position 2 to turn the
headlights to full intensity for night driving.

Flashing the high
(position 3)—Pull the
back. The high beam
when you release the

beam headlights
lever all the way
headlights turn off
lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights
with the knob turned to “OFF”.

124

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Emergency flashers
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the switch on
longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

TURN SIGNALS
To signal a turn, push the headlight/
turn signal lever up or down to position
1.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
The lever automatically returns after you
make a turn, but you may have to return
it by hand after you change lanes.
To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down to the pressure point (position
2) and hold it.
If the turn signal indicator lights (green
lights) on the instrument panel flash faster
than normal, a front or rear turn signal
bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light
bulbs” on page 400 in Section 7−3.

To turn on the
push the switch.

emergency

flashers,

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn
them off, push the switch once again.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn
other drivers if your vehicle must be
stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work
when the emergency flashers are operating.

125

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Instrument panel light control

Front fog lights

To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights, turn the knob.

To turn on the front fog lights, twist
the band of the headlight and turn signal switch lever. They will come on
only when the headlights are on low
beam.

With the knob turned fully clockwise, the
intensity of the instrument panel lights will
not be reduced even when the tail lights/
headlights are turned on.

Interior light

Without moon roof

Front fog light indicator light on the instrument panel will tell you that the front fog
lights are on.

With moon roof

126

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Personal lights
To turn on the interior light, slide the
switch.
The interior light switch has the following
positions:
“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF”—Turns the light off.
“DOOR”—Turns the light on when the illuminated entry system acts. For details,
see “Illuminated entry system” on page
128 in this Section.

FRONT PERSONAL LIGHTS
To turn on the front personal light,
push the lens. To turn it off, push the
lens once again.

REAR PERSONAL LIGHTS (vehicles with
moon roof)
To turn on the rear personal light, push
the switch. To turn it off, push the
switch once again.
By gently adjusting the shade of the rear
personal light, you can change the direction of the light to suit your preference.
When either of the rear side doors is
opened, the light on that side turns on
automatically. Closing the rear side doors
will turn the lights off.

127

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Illuminated entry system

Windshield wipers and washer

The interior light and ignition switch
light will come on when any of the
doors are opened. After all the doors
are closed, the lights remain on for
about 15 seconds before fading out.

This feature can be disabled and the duration of the lighting can be changed. For
details, ask your Toyota dealer.

Without theft deterrent system—When any
of the front doors are unlocked, the lights
will come on and remain on for about 15
seconds before fading out.

The interior light and ignition switch light
come on and remain on for about 15 seconds when you carry the registered key
into the entry function actuation area. For
further information of entry function actuation area, see “Smart key system” on
page 30 in Section 1−2.

With theft deterrent system—When any of
the doors are unlocked, the lights will
come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before fading out.
If all the doors are closed, when the ignition switch is turned off, the lights will
come on and remain on for about 15 seconds.
If all the doors are closed and the ignition
switch is set at ACC or ON, the lights will
fade out.
If all the doors are locked, the lights will
fade out.
To prevent the battery being discharged,
all of the lights will automatically turn off
the key removed (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or the ignition is
turned off (vehicles with smart key system), and the door is left opened for
about 20 minutes.

ILLUMINATIONS OF ENTRY FUNCTION
(vehicles with smart key system)

To turn on the windshield wipers, move
the lever to the desired setting.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
Lever position

Operation

Position 1

Intermittent operation

Position 2

Low speed operation

Position 3

High speed operation

Position 4

Single sweep operation

Position 5

Washer on

128

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Rear window and outside rear
view mirror defoggers
Rotating the band on the lever lets you
adjust the wiper time interval when the
wiper lever is in the intermittent position
(position 1). Twist the band upward to
increase the time between sweeps, and
downward to decrease it.
To spray washer fluid, pull the lever
toward you.
If the windshield wipers are off, they will
operate a couple of times after the washer
sprays.
For instructions on adding washer fluid,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 399 in
Section 7−3.

When waxing your vehicle, make sure that
the washer nozzles do not become
blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,
contact your Toyota dealer to have the
vehicle serviced.

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

With manual air conditioning controls

In freezing weather, warm the windshield
with the defroster before using the washer.
This will help prevent the washer fluid
from freezing on your windshield, which
can block your vision.

NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may scratch the
glass.

With automatic air conditioning controls

129

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To defog or defrost the rear window,
push the switch.
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the
rear window will quickly clear the surfaces. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the defogger is operating.
On some models, heater panels in the
outside rear view mirrors will also quickly
clear the surfaces.
Push the switch once again to turn the
defogger off.
The system will automatically shut off
when the operation time has been completed. The operation time is between 15
minutes and 1 hour depending on the ambient temperature and vehicle speed.

Make sure you turn the defoggers off
when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the
defoggers on for a long time could cause
the battery to discharge, especially during
stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are
not designed for drying rain water or for
melting snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use a spray de−icer
before operating the switch.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.

CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot
do not touch them when the defogger
switch is on.

130

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 6

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and two trip meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi−information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

132
132
133
133
134
134
146

131

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Engine coolant temperature
gauge

Fuel gauge
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill
the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving
several times. If the indicator lamp does
not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as
soon as possible.

The gauge indicates the approximate
quantity of fuel remaining in the tank
when the ignition switch is on.
Nearly full—Needle at “F”
Nearly empty—Needle at “E”
It is a good idea to keep the tank over
1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low
fuel level warning light comes on, fill the
fuel tank as soon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature when the ignition switch is
on. The engine operating temperature
will vary with changes in weather and
engine load.
If the needle moves into the red zone,
your engine is too hot. If your vehicle
overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the
engine to cool.

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge
needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.

132

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tachometer

Odometer and two trip meters

The tachometer indicates engine speed
in thousands of rpm (revolutions per
minute). Use it while driving to select
correct shift points and to prevent engine lugging and over−revving.

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters when the ignition
switch is on.

Driving with the engine running too fast
causes excessive engine wear and poor
fuel economy. Remember, in most cases
the slower the engine speed, the greater
the fuel economy.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe
operating conditions, such as:

Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high
speed driving.

Idling for a long period with the air
conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

Towing a trailer.
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in
the engine cooling system as this
may cause the engine to overheat.
The thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant to keep the
temperature of the engine within
the specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 342 in
Section 4.

NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get
into the red zone. This may cause
severe engine damage.

1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

distance

You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

133

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Outside temperature display

Multi−information display—

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.

The following information is displayed
on the multi−information display when
the ignition switch is set at ON.

To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.

Cruise information and outside tem-

To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

perature

Odometer and two trip meters
Warning messages

The displayed temperature ranges from
−40C (−40F) up to 50C (122F).
The ignition switch must be set at ON.
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor, “−−”
or “E” will appear on the display. If “−−”
or “E” appears on the display, contact
your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−” appears
momentarily when the ignition switch is
quickly set to ON. It is normal if it goes
out soon.

During ordinary driving, cruise information
is displayed. However, in case the vehicle
has a system malfunction or if there is
some information that the driver should be
informed of, a warning message appears
on the display. See “—Messages” on page
139 for details.
If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the cruise information
display, the display will automatically be
set to the initial mode.
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the display
will be reduced.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

134

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Outside temperature and cruise information
Each time you push the “DISP” button,
the display toggles through the following information.
1. Outside temperature
2. Driving range
3. Average fuel consumption
4. Driving distance
5. Average vehicle speed
6. Cruise information off
7. Zoom display of odometer and trip meter
The display will return to the outside temperature display with pushing and holding
the “DISP” button for 1 second.
The displayed values in the cruise information display indicate general driving
conditions. Accuracy varies with driving
habits and road conditions.
When the ignition switch is on, the last
previously used mode displayed just before the ignition switch is off will appear.

135

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

1. Outside temperature
(“OUTSIDE TEMP”)

2. Driving range
(“CRUISING RANGE”)

3. Average fuel consumption
(“TANK AVG”)

The outside temperature display indicates the outside air temperature.

The distance the vehicle can travel with
the remaining fuel is calculated and
displayed based on the quantity of remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption is calculated
and displayed based on total driving
distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.

The driving range display indicates the
approximate distance that you can drive
until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is
different from the actual distance traveled.

The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.

The displayed value is updated every 1
second while driving.

4. Driving distance
(“SINCE START”)

If the fuel gauge malfunctions, the mileage
figure will not appear.

The driving distance after the engine
starts is displayed.

When the vehicle is refueled, the driving
range is recalculated.

Every time you start the engine, the driving distance display is reset.

The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will be
longer than indicated. If fuel consumption
is poor, the driving range will be shorter
than indicated.

5. Average vehicle speed
(“AVG SPEED”)

The displayed temperature ranges from
−40C (−40F) up to 50C (122F).
If an abnormality exists in the connection
of the outside air temperature sensor, “−−”
or “E” will appear on the display. If “−−”
or “E” appears on the display, contact
your Toyota dealer.
There may be a case that “−−” appears
momentarily when the ignition switch is
quickly set to ON. It is normal if it goes
out soon.

If the low fuel level warning light comes
on, refuel the vehicle even if the display
indicates that the vehicle can be driven
further.

Every time you refuel the vehicle, the displayed value is reset.

Average vehicle speed is calculated and
displayed based on total driving distance and total driving time with the
engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10
seconds.

136

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Odometer and two trip
meters
6. Cruise information off

This meter displays the odometer and
two trip meters.

The display indicates only odometer and
two trip meters.

Selecting the zoom display of the
odometer and trip meter when the
cruise information is displayed causes
the odometer and one of the trip meters to be displayed simultaneously.

7. Zoom display of odometer and trip
meter
The odometer and one of the trip meters
are
displayed
simultaneously.
See
“—Odometer and two trip meters” described below.

1. Odometer—Shows the total
the vehicle has been driven.

Normal display

distance

2. Two trip meters—Show two different
distances independently driven since
the last time each trip meter was set
to zero.
You can use one trip meter to calculate
the fuel economy and the other to
measure the distance on each trip. All
trip meter data is cancelled if the electrical power source is disconnected.

Zoom display

137

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two
trip meters to zero, and also change
the meter display.
To change the meter display, quickly
push and release the knob. The meter
display changes in the order from the
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter
B, then back to the odometer each
time you push.
To reset the trip meter A to zero, display the meter A reading, then push
and hold the knob until the meter is
set to zero. The same process can be
applied for resetting the trip meter B.

138

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Messages
Message

Status

Action

Parking brake is not released.

Release parking brake.

Engine oil pressure is low.

Stop and check.

Engine coolant temperature is high.

Stop your vehicle and allow engine to cool.

Any of doors are opened.

Close doors completely.

Hood is opened.

Close hood completely.

139

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Message

Status

Action

Trunk is opened.

Close trunk completely.

Vehicle stability control system malfunction is
detected.

Take vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Transmission selector lever is not set “P” position.

Shift the transmission selector lever to “P” position.

Brake pedal is not depressed when starting engine.

Depress brake pedal firmly.

Ignition switch is not set to OFF when getting out
j

vehicle carrying the key.

Key is not detected in the vehicle when ignition

Turn off engine.
Take care key.

switch is set at ON.
k

Electronic key battery is low.

Replace key battery.

Steering lock system malfunction is detected.

Contact your Toyota dealer.

140

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Message

Status

Action

Steering lock is stuck.

Rotate steering wheel slightly.

Oil change is nearly due.

Check engine oil.

Oil change is due.

Replace engine oil.

Washer fluid level is low.

Add washer fluid.

Moon roof is opened with ignition switch off.

Close moon roof.

141

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(a)

(c)

This message is to warn the driver that
the parking brake is not completely released at the vehicle speed of 5 km/h
(3 mph) or more.

This message is to warn the driver that
the engine coolant temperature is too
high.

(d)

Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake fully.
The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

Stop the vehicle and allow the engine
to cool.

This message is to remind the driver
that any of the doors are opened.

The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

Close the door securely.

NOTICE
(b)
This message is to warn the driver that
the engine oil pressure is too low.

Do not continue driving with an overheated engine. See “If your vehicle
overheats” on page 342 in Section 4.

The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds
when the vehicle speed rises above 5
km/h (3 mph).
(e)

Turn the engine off as soon as possible
and contact your Toyota dealer.

This message is to remind the driver
that the hood is opened.

The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

Close the hood securely.
The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds
when the vehicle speed rises above 5
km/h (3 mph).

142

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(f)

(h)

(j)

This message is to remind the driver
that the trunk is opened.

This message is to warn the driver that
the transmission is not in the “P” position when leaving the vehicle.

When this message appears in the following cases, a warning tone sounds.

Put the transmission in the “P” position.

when the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is pushed. In this case, the
above message appears for 8 seconds.

Close the trunk securely.
The message appears with the master
warning light a warning tone sounds when
the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h (3
mph).
(g)
This message is to warn the driver that
there is a problem somewhere in the
vehicle stability control system or traction control system.
Contact your Toyota dealer to service
vehicle.
In this case, the brakes will operate when
applied, and normal driving may be resumed.
The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

If the transmission is not in the “P” position with the ignition switch on, the message appears with the master warning
light and a warning tone sounds when the
driver’s door is opened.
(i)
This message is to remind the driver
that the brake pedal is not depressed
when starting the engine.
Depress the brake pedal firmly and press
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. For
the starting procedure, see “How to start
the engine” on page 316 in Section 3.

The key is not detected in the vehicle

The key is not detected in the vehicle
because someone has taken the key
outside of the vehicle without turning
the engine off. At this time, a warning
tone sounds. The above message turns
off if the ignition switch is set at OFF
or the key is in the vehicle.
In addition to either of the above conditions, if you get out from the vehicle,
carrying the key when the transmission
selector lever is in a position other than
“P” and the ignition switch is not set to
OFF, “SHIFT TO P RANGE” and “KEY IS
NOT DETECTED” appear alternately.

If the brake pedal is not depressed, the
message appears and a warning tone
sounds when the engine is started.

143

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(k)

(l)

(n)

This message is to warn the driver that
the electronic key battery of the smart
entry and start system is low.

This message warns the driver that the
steering lock function malfunctions. At
this time, the amber indicator light on
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
flashes.

This message is to remind the driver to
change the engine oil. The message is
a prior notice.

The engine will not start in this case.
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.

If the driving range after the previous oil
change reaches 7200 km (4500 miles), the
message appears for about 15 seconds
with the master warning light and a warning tone sounds.

Change the key battery as soon as possible to ensure that the smart entry and
start system operates properly.
The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.
(m)
This message appears when the steering lock is stuck. The message appears
for 15 seconds. At this time, the green
indicator light on the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch flashes.

Toyota recommends that the engine oil
be changed as soon as possible.

The engine oil maintenance data must be
reset after the engine oil change. See
following “Resetting the engine oil maintenance data”.

To free the steering lock, rotate the steering wheel slightly left or right while pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

144

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(o)

Resetting the engine oil maintenance
data

(p)

This message is to remind the driver to
change the engine oil.

The engine oil maintenance data must be
reset after replacement of the engine oil.
Reset the data by the following procedure:

This message appears when the washer
fluid level becomes very low.

Change the engine oil as soon as possible.

1. Turn off the engine with the trip meter
A reading shown.

If the driving range after the previous oil
change reaches 8000 km (5000 miles), the
message appears with the master warning
light and a warning tone sounds. The
message stays on with the ignition switch
on.

For details, see “—Odometer and two trip
meters” on page 137 in this Section.

The engine
reset after
“Resetting
data” below
system.

oil maintenance data must be
the engine oil change. See
the engine oil maintenance
for the procedure to reset the

2. The ignition switch must be set at ON
while holding down the trip meter reset
knob. A message “OIL MILEAGE
RESET MODE” will appear on the
display.
3. Hold down the knob at least 5 seconds. A message “COMPLETE” will appear, then the message “OIL MILEAGE
RESET” goes off.

Fill the tank as soon as possible.
The message appears with the master
warning light a warning tone sounds.
(q)
This message appears when the driver’s
door is opened with the ignition switch
turned off and the moon roof opened.
When you leave your vehicle, be sure to
close the moon roof.
The message appears with the master
warning light and a warning tone sounds.

145

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(a)

Do this.

If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(indicator and buzzer)

(b)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(c)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.
(indicator and buzzer)

(d)

Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e)

Stop and check.

(f)

(g)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

Fill up tank.

146

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(h)

(i)

Do this.
Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.
If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

Close all doors and trunk lid.
(indicator and buzzer)

(j)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k)

Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(l)

Adjust tire inflation pressure (including spare tire). If the light blinks, contact Toyota
dealer.

(m)

Read a warning message on multi−information display.

(n)

Add washer fluid.

147

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on...

(o)

Do this.
Replace engine oil.

(p)

Key reminder buzzer

(q)

Parking brake reminder buzzer

Release parking brake.

(r)

Open moon roof reminder buzzer

Close moon roof.

Remove key.

148

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(a) Brake System Warning Light and
Buzzer

A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
and Buzzer

This light comes on in the following cases
when the ignition switch is set at ON.

CAUTION

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

When the parking brake is applied...
This light comes on for a few seconds
when the ignition switch is set at ON even
after the parking brake is released.
If the vehicle speed rises above 5 km/h
(3 mph) with the parking brake applied for
1 seconds or more, a buzzer sounds.

When the brake fluid level is low...
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving
normally when the brake fluid level is
low.
Have your vehicle checked at your
Toyota dealer in the following cases:

The light does not come on even if the
parking brake is applied when the ignition switch is set at ON.

If either of the following conditions
occurs, immediately stop your vehicle
at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.

The light does not turn off even
after the parking brake is released
while the engine is running.
In this case, the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping
distance will become longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and
bring the vehicle to an immediate
stop.

The brake system warning light remains on together with the “ABS”
warning light.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

Once the ignition switch is set at ON or
engine start, the reminder light flashes
and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat belt
is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens
the belt, the light continues flashing and
the buzzer sounds for about 6 seconds.
If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
the buzzer will sound for about 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle
speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the
buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the
buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer
still sounds, make sure the front passenger’s seat belt is fastened.
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.

The light does not come on even if the
ignition switch is set at ON with the
parking brake released.

149

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Belt

Re-

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to
have the front passenger buckle up the
seat belt.
Once the ignition switch is set at ON or
engine start, the reminder light flashes if
a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt.
Unless the front passenger fastens the
belt, the light continue flashing.
If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h
(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,
the buzzer will sound for about 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different
tone for 20 seconds. Even if the vehicle
speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the
buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the
buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer
still sounds, make sure the driver’s seat
belt is fastened.
If luggage or other load is placed on the
front passenger seat, depending on its
weight, the reminder light to flash and
buzzer to sound.

(d) Charging System Warning Light
This warning light comes on when the
ignition switch is set at ON, and goes off
when the engine is started.
When there are problems in the charging
system while the engine is running, the
warning light comes on.

NOTICE
When the charging system warning
light comes on while the engine is
running, malfunctions such as the engine drive belt being broken may have
occurred. If the warning light comes
on, immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota
dealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning
Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are
driving, pull off the road to a safe place
and stop the engine immediately. Call a
Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for
assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when
the engine is idling or it may come on
briefly after a hard stop. There is no
cause for concern if it then goes out when
the engine is accelerated slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level
is extremely low. It is not designed to
indicate low oil level, and the oil level
must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the
warning light on—even for one block.
It may ruin the engine.

The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.

150

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
This lamp comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and goes off after
the engine starts. This means that the
warning light system is operating properly.
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp
comes on while driving, first check the
followings.

Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.

Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely
tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after
several trips, contact your Toyota dealer
as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel
tank cap is not loose...

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) programs

There is a problem somewhere in the

Your vehicle may not pass a state
emission inspection if the malfunction
indicator lamp remains on. Contact your
Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s
emission
control
system
and
OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) system before
taking your vehicle for the inspection.

engine, emission control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible to service the vehicle.
If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 370
in Section 6.

This light comes on when the fuel level
in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up
the tank as soon as possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not
recover until the engine is stopped and
the engine is turned off.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than
usual.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent accidental pedal operation.

151

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(h) “ABS” Warning Light
Vehicles without vehicle stability control
system—
The light comes on with the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system works properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
so the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road
surfaces.

If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored by
the warning light system. Contact your
Toyota dealer as soon as possible to
service the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on.

The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.

Vehicles with vehicle stability control
system—
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system and the brake assist system work
properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system and the brake assist system do not operate, but the brake
system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
so the wheels could lock up during a sudden braking or braking on slippery road
surfaces.

In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

152

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on.

The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on
together with the brake system warning light, immediately stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
In this case, not only the anti−lock
brake system will fail but also the
vehicle will become extremely unstable during braking.

(i) Open Door Warning Light and Buzzer
This light remains on until all the doors
and trunk lid are completely closed.
The buzzer also sounds once when any
of the doors or trunk lid is not completely
closed at the vehicle speed 5 km/h (3
mph) or more. Stop the vehicle and close
the door and trunk lid completely.
(j) SRS Warning Light
This indicator comes on when the ignition switch is set at ON. It goes off
after about 6 seconds. This means the
SRS front airbags and seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the
airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt
buckle switch, front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light,
front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch,
seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring and power
sources.

If any of the
this indicates
or seat belt
Toyota dealer

following conditions occurs,
a malfunction of the airbags
pretensioners. Contact your
as soon as possible to.

The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON or remains
on for more than 6 seconds.

The light comes on or starts flashing
while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light will come on if there is a
malfunction in the front passenger occupant classification system.
(k) “VSC” Warning Light
The light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system or traction control system.
The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the
vehicle stability control system and traction control system do not work. However,
as conventional braking operates when applied, there is no problem to continue driving.

153

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(n) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level
Warning Light

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500
miles) after the engine oil replacement,
this light illuminates for about 3 seconds
and then flashes for about 15 seconds
with the ignition switch is set at ON. If
you continue driving without replacing the
engine oil, and if the distance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light will
come on after the ignition switch is set at
ON. The light will remain on thereafter.

The light warns that the windshield washer
fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at
your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,
see “Adding washer fluid” on page 399 in
Section 7−3.)

If the light is flashing, we recommend that
you replace the engine oil at an early
opportunity depending on the driving and
road conditions. If the light comes on,
replace it as soon as possible.

The light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
a few seconds.

The system must be reset after the engine oil replacement. Reset the system by
the following procedure:

(o) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder
Light

1. Turn the engine off with the trip meter
A reading shown. (For details, see
“Odometer and two trip meters” on
page 133 in this Section.)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:

For details, see “Tire pressure warning
system” on page 174 in Section 1−7.

The warning light does not come on

(m) Master Warning Light

after the ignition switch is set at ON.

The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is set at ON.

The warning light comes on while driving.
(l) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the tire pressure of
one or more of your tires (including the
spare tire) is low. The light comes on
when the ignition switch is set at ON. It
goes off after a few seconds. This indicates that the tire pressure warning system is functioning properly.
If the warning light comes on, stop your
vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and check that the inflation pressure
of all tires (including the spare tire) is as
specified on the tire and loading information label. (See “Checking tire inflation
pressure” on page 385 in Section 7−2.)
The light should go off a few minutes after
the tire pressure is adjusted.
If the warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning
system may be malfunctioning. Contact
your Toyota dealer.

If the master warning light comes on, a
message appears on the multi−information
display. Depending on the conditions a
warning tone may sound.

This light acts as a reminder to replace
the engine oil.
This light will come on when the ignition
switch is set at ON and will go off after
about a few seconds.

2. Set the ignition switch at ON while
holding down the trip meter reset knob.
Hold down the knob for at least 5 seconds. The odometer indicates “000000”
and the light goes off.
If the system fails to reset, the light will
continue flashing.

154

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(p) Key Reminder Buzzer (vehicles with
key cylinder−type ignition switch)
This buzzer act as a reminder to remove
the key when you open the driver’s door
with the engine off.
(q) Parking Brake Reminder Buzzer
The buzzer acts once when the parking
brake is not completely released at the
vehicle speed of 5 km/h (3 mph) or more.
Stop the vehicle and release the parking
brake fully.
(r) Open Moon Roof Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to close
the moon roof when you turn the ignition
switch off and open the driver’s door.

CHECKING
SERVICE
REMINDER
INDICATORS (except the low fuel level
warning light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open one of the doors.
The open door warning light should
come on.
3. Close the door.
The open door warning light should go
off.
4. Set the ignition switch at ON, but do
not start the engine.
All the service reminder indicators except the open door warning light should
come on.

With
multi−information
display—The
“ABS” warning light, low tire pressure
warning light and master warning light
will go off after a few seconds. The
SRS warning light goes off after about
6 seconds. (Slip indicator light will also
come on and go off after a few seconds. Front passenger occupant classification indicator lights will also come
on and go off after about four seconds.)
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not function as described
above, have it checked by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.

Without multi−information display—The
“ABS” and “VSC” warning lights, low
windshield washer fluid level warning
light, low tire pressure warning light
and engine oil replacement reminder
light will go off after a few seconds.
The SRS warning light goes off after
about 6 seconds. (Slip indicator light
will also come on and go off after a
few seconds. Front passenger occupant
classification indicator lights will also
come on and go off after about four
seconds.)

155

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

156

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 7

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONROLS
Ignition switch, Transmission and Parking brake
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

158
161
169
170
172
174
180
181

157

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Ignition switch (with key
cylinder−type ignition switch)
“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering
wheel is locked. The key can be removed only at this position.
You must push in the key to turn the key
from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position. On
vehicles with an automatic transmission,
the selector lever must be put in the “P”
position before pushing the key.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. (See
“Engine immobilizer system” on page 18
in Section 1−2.)
“START”—Starter motor on. The key
will return to the “ON” position when
released.
For starting tips, see page 315 in Section
3.
“ON”—Engine on and all accessories
on.
This is the normal driving position.
“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio
operate, but the engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position and open the driver’s
door, a buzzer will remind you to remove
the key.

When starting the engine, the key may
seem stuck at the “LOCK” position. To
free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rotate the steering
wheel slightly while turning the key gently.

CAUTION
For manual transmission:
Never remove the key when the vehicle is moving, as this will lock the
steering wheel and result in loss of
steering control.

NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON”
position if the engine is not running.
The battery will discharge and the
ignition could be damaged.

Approximately five hours after the engine
is turned off, you may hear sound coming
from underneath the luggage compartment
for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
(See “Leak detection pump” on page viii.)
It is not a malfunction if the needle on all
meters and gauges move slightly when the
key is turned to the “ACC”, “ON” or
“START” position.

158

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Ignition switch
(with smart key system)
First time—ACC (accessory) mode (illuminate amber)
Accessories such as the radio operate.
Second time—ON mode (illuminate amber)
All accessories on.
Third time—Power off (indicator light
off)
Pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch again returns the ignition switch to
ACC.

When the key is in the vehicle, pressing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
(engine switch) allows you to start and
stop the engine or choose at the ACC,
ON, or ignition switch off.
When the brake pedal is not depressed,
pressing the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch changes the ignition switch mode
as follows. Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch slowly and firmly.

If a buzzer sounds and the master
warning light comes on for 5 seconds
when pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch, this indicates that the key
is not in the vehicle. The “KEY IS NOT
DETECTED” message will also appear on
the multi−information display.
If the brake pedal is depressed, the indicator light will turn green, regardless
of which mode is selected. When the
indicator light is green, pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch once
starts the engine. (For starting tips, see
“How to start the engine” on page 316
in Section 3.)

159

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

When the engine switch is changed from
ON (with the engine off) to off and then
changed to ACC, “DEPRESS THE BRAKE
PEDAL” is appeared on the multi−information display.
If the amber indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch blinks, this
indicates a malfunction of the push start
system. Turn off the engine immediately
and contact your Toyota dealer.
It is not a malfunction if the needle on all
meters and gauges move slightly when the
ignition switch is set at ACC, ON or when
the engine starts.

NOTICE
Do not leave the ignition switch at
ON if the engine is not running. The
battery will discharge and the ignition
could be damaged.
When the battery is disconnected or
run down, the push button start function
memorizes the current mode. After you
reconnect, replace, or recharge the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. In any of these cases, turn off
the engine if the engine comes on.

160

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Automatic transmission
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

Selector lever

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch is set at ON).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and
key removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving
4: Engine braking
3, 2: Stronger engine braking

Shift with the brake pedal
depressed.
(The ignition switch must be
set at ON.)

L: Maximum engine braking

Shift normally.

161

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 316 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.

To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,
see “Cruise control” on page 181 in this
Section.

Shift into the “4” position. The trans-

CAUTION

2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.

mission will downshift to fourth gear
and engine braking will be enabled.

Shift into the “3” position. The trans-

When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.

mission will downshift to third gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 141 km/h (76 mph), and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. If the engine
coolant temperature is low, the transmission will not shift into overdrive gear even
in the “D” position.

Shift into the “2” position. The trans-

CAUTION

Shift into the “L” position. The trans-

Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.
3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.

mission will downshift to second gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 89 km/h (48 mph), and
stronger engine braking will be enabled.
mission will downshift to first gear
when the vehicle speed drops down to
or lower than 40 km/h (21 mph), and
maximum engine braking will be enabled.

Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.
(d) Using “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for
strong engine braking as described previously.
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”,
you can start the vehicle in motion as
with the lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the
vehicle will start in first gear and automatically shift to third gear or second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in first gear.

Vehicles with cruise control—When the
cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking
will not be enabled because the cruise
control is not cancelled.

162

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

NOTICE
Be careful not to over−rev the engine. Watch the tachometer to keep
engine rpm from going into the red
zone. The approximate maximum allowable speed for each position is
given below for your reference:

“3” . . . . . . . . . . . 152 km/h (94 mph)
“2” . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 km/h (60 mph)
“L” . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 km/h (33 mph)
Do not continue hill climbing or
hard towing for a long time in the
“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may
cause severe automatic transmission damage from overheating. To
prevent such damage, “4” position
should be used in hill climbing or
hard towing.
(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

(f) Parking
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal pressed down,
fully depress the parking brake pedal
to apply the parking brake securely.
3. With the brake pedal pressed down,
shift the selector lever to the “P” position.

CAUTION
Never attempt to move the selector
lever into “P” position under any circumstances while the vehicle is moving. Serious mechanical damage and
loss of vehicle control may result.
(g) Good driving practice

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between fourth gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the selector lever
to the “D” position immediately afterward.

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
“P” position even though the brake pedal
is depressed, use the shift lock override
button. For instructions, see “If you cannot
shift automatic transmission selector lever”
on page 355 in Section 4.

When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.

163

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

Selector lever

Your automatic transmission has a shift
lock system to minimize the possibility of
incorrect operation. This means you can
only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed (with the ignition
switch is set at ON).
(a) Selector lever
The shift position is also displayed on the
instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key
removal
R: Reverse
N: Neutral
D: Normal driving (shifting into overdrive)

Shift with the brake pedal
depressed.
(The ignition switch must be
set at ON.)

S: “S” mode driving
+: Upshift range
−: Downshift range

Shift normally.

To select sequential position or
“D”, lean the selector lever
leftward or rightward.

164

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(b) Normal driving
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How
to start the engine” on page 316 in
Section 3. The transmission must be in
“P” or “N”.
2. With your foot holding down the brake
pedal, shift the selector lever to “D”.
When the lever is in the “D” position, the
automatic transmission system will select
the most suitable gear for running conditions such as normal cruising, hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
Always use the “D” position for better fuel
economy and quieter driving. In this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is
possible. If the engine coolant temperature
is low, the transmission will not shift into
the overdrive gear even in the “D” position.

CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while shifting.

AI (Artificial Intelligence) shifting control—
AI shifting control selects the most
suitable shift range automatically according to the driver’s operation and
driving condition.
AI shifting control operates automatically with the selector lever in the “D”
position. When the lever is moved to
the “S” position, this function will be
cancelled.

Shifting control on the slope:
On inclines, you can drive smoothly
with reduced shifting quantity. On declines, the vehicle will shift down automatically to obtain optimum engine
braking and reduce the driver’s foot
braking load.

Automatic shifting point change control:
The most suitable shift range is selected depending on the driver’s accelerator pedal operation and vehicle condition.

(c) Driving in “S” mode
You can change the shift range position
in the “S” mode. The shift range position can be switched between “6” (sixth
range) and “1” (first range) by moving
the selector lever up to the “+” side or
down to the “–” side. When the selector lever is shifted to the “S” position,
the initial shift range position is “4”
(fourth range) or “5” (fifth range) depending on the vehicle speed.
However, if the selector lever is shifted
to the “S” position when AI shifting
control is being performed, the initial
shift range position may be “3” (third
range). This is because the suitable
shift range is selected depending on
the driving condition.
The “S” mode indicator light and the current shift range position are shown on the
instrument cluster.

3. Release the parking brake and brake
pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal
slowly for smooth starting.

165

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Shift range positions

“6” (Sixth range):
The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and overdrive
(sixth) gears according to the vehicle
speed or driving conditions.

“5” (fifth range):
The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and fifth gears
according to vehicle speed or driving
conditions. This range is suitable for
acceleration such as when you want to
pass a vehicle running ahead of you
during high speed driving.

“4” (Fourth range):
The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and fourth
gears according to the vehicle speed
or driving conditions. Slight engine
braking will be obtained on a downhill
road. Smooth running with less shifting
will be obtained on an uphill road.

“2” (Second range):
First or second gear will be selected
automatically according to the vehicle
speed or driving conditions. This range
is to be used when engine braking
stronger than that of the “3” range
position is necessary.

“1” (First range):
The gear is fixed in first regardless of
vehicle speed or driving conditions.
This range is to be used when maximum engine braking is necessary.
If you attempt to downshift the transmission when it is not possible to downshift
due to high vehicle speed, a warning tone
sounds twice.

“3” (Third range):

1: Upshift range
2: Downshift range

The most suitable gear is selected automatically between first and third
gears according to the vehicle speed
or driving conditions. This range is to
be used when stronger engine braking
is necessary.

166

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Maximum allowable speeds

(d) Using engine braking

To get on a highway or to pass slower
traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each
range:

To use engine braking, you can downshift
the transmission as follows:

range
1
2
3
4

km/h
60
104
139
198

(mph)
(37)
(65)
(86)
(123)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower range.
When the “S” mode indicator light does
not come on even with the selector lever
moved to the sequential position, there
may be a problem somewhere in the
system. Have your vehicle checked/repaired by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. In this case, you can drive in
the same condition as in the “D” position.

When driving in the “D” position—
Shift the selector lever to the “S”
position.
When driving in the “6” range within
the “S” position—
Move the selector lever down to the
“–” side to select the “5” range.
The transmission will downshift to fifth
range and engine braking will be enabled.
Vehicles with cruise control—when the
cruise control is being used, even if
you downshift the transmission, engine
braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled.
For ways to decrease the vehicle
speed, see “Cruise control” on page
181 in this Section.

Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “4” range. The
transmission will downshift to fourth
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than 169 km/h (105
mph), and stronger engine braking will
be enabled.
Vehicles with cruise control—when the
cruise control is being used, even if
you downshift the transmission, engine
braking will not be enabled because
the cruise control is not cancelled.

Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “3” range. The
transmission will downshift to third
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than 121 km/h (75
mph), and more powerful engine braking than that of the “4” range position
will be enabled.

Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “2” range. The
transmission will downshift to second
range when the vehicle speed drops
down to or lower than 87 km/h (54
mph), and more powerful engine braking will be enabled.

167

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Move the selector lever down to the
“−” side to select the “1” range. The
downshift to first range when the vehicle speed drops down to or lower
than 38 km/h (24 mph), and maximum
engine braking will be enabled.

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.
(e) Backing up
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the brake pedal held down with
your foot, shift the selector lever to the
“R” position.

NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.

If the transmission repeatedly shifts up
and down between third gear and overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever into sequential
position.

When towing a trailer, in order to main-

CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake
pedal while stopped with the engine
running. This prevents the vehicle
from creeping.

NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or the
parking brake to hold the vehicle on
an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold
the vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause the transmission
to overheat.
(h) If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position
If you cannot shift the selector lever from
the “P” position even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock
override button. For instructions, see “If
you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 355 in Section 4.

tain engine braking efficiency, do not
use overdrive.

168

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Manual transmission
Recommended shifting speeds

Maximum allowable speeds

The transmission is fully synchronized and
upshifting or downshifting is easy.

To get on a highway or to pass slower
traffic, maximum acceleration may be necessary. Make sure you observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each
gear:

For the best compromise between fuel
economy and vehicle performance, you
should upshift or downshift at the following
speeds:
1
2
3
4

to
to
to
to

gear
2 or 2
3 or 3
4 or 4
5 or 5

to
to
to
to

1
2
3
4

km/h
24
40
64
72

(mph)
(15)
(25)
(40)
(45)

The shift pattern is conventional as
shown above.

Downshift to the appropriate gear if acceleration is needed when you are cruising
below the above downshifting speeds.

Press the clutch pedal down fully while
shifting, and then release it slowly. Do not
rest your foot on the pedal while driving,
because it will cause clutch trouble. Do
not use the clutch to hold the vehicle
when stopped on an uphill grade—use the
parking brake.

Upshifting too soon or downshifting too
late will cause lugging, and possibly pinging. Regularly revving the engine to maximum speed in each gear will cause excessive engine wear and high fuel
consumption.

gear
1
2
3
4

km/h
54
95
146
200

(mph)
(33)
(59)
(90)
(124)

NOTICE
Do not downshift if you are going
faster than the maximum allowable
speed for the next lower gear.

169

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Traction control system
Good driving practice

If it is difficult to shift into reverse, put
the transmission in neutral, release the
clutch pedal momentarily, and then try
again.

When towing a trailer, in order to maintain engine braking efficiency, do not
use fifth gear.

CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a
slippery
surface.
Abrupt
shifting
could cause the vehicle to skid or
spin.

NOTICE
Do not use any gears other than
first gear when starting off and
moving forward. Doing so may damage the clutch.
Make sure the vehicle is completely
stopped before shifting into reverse.

The traction control system automatically helps prevent the spinning of front
wheels when the vehicle is started or
accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
When the ignition switch is set at ON, the
system automatically turns on.

CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of the vehicle and
power against front wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction
control system is in operation. Do not
drive the vehicle under any speed or
maneuvering conditions which may
cause the vehicle to lose traction
control. In situations where the road
surface is covered with ice or snow,
your vehicle should be fitted with
snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious
speed for the present road conditions.

NORMAL DRIVING MODE
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the traction control system is in the self−check
mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.

170

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

When the traction control system is operating, the following conditions occur:

The system controls the spinning of the
front wheels. At this time, the slip indicator light blinks.

You may feel vibration or noise in your

The “VSC” warning light or master warning
light will come on when the ignition switch
is set at ON and will go off after a few
seconds.

vehicle, caused by operation of the
brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is set at
ON. If the indicator light does not come
on when the ignition is turned on, contact
your Toyota dealer.

Without multi−information display

If the system failure warning comes on
while driving, the system does not work.
However, as conventional braking operates
when applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.
With multi−information display—A buzzer
also sounds when the message and master warning light come on.
In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
Without multi−information display—

The warning light does not come on
after the ignition switch is set at ON.

The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is set at ON.

The warning light comes on while drivWith multi−information display

ing.

171

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Vehicle stability control
system
With multi−information display—

The message and master warning light
come on after ignition switch is set at
ON.

The message and master warning light
come on while driving.

The vehicle stability control system
helps provide integrated control of the
systems such as anti−lock brake system, traction control, engine control,
etc. This system automatically controls
the brakes and engine to help prevent
the vehicle from skidding when cornering on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel abruptly.
This system will activate when your vehicle speed reaches or exceeds 15 km/h
(9 mph), and will deactivate when the vehicle speed reduces to below 15 km/h (9
mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the
engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the self−check mode, but does
not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability control system. Even
if the vehicle stability control system is operating, you must always
drive carefully and attentively to
avoid serious injury. Reckless driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the slip indicator light
flashes, an alarm sounds, and special care should be taken while
driving.

Only use tires of specified size. The
size, manufacture, brand and tread
pattern for all 4 tires should be the
same. If you use the tires other
than specified, or different type or
size, the vehicle stability control
system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels,
contact your Toyota dealer. (See
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 388 in Section 7−2.)

In situations where the road surface
is covered with ice or snow, your
vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.

172

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SYSTEM FAILURE WARNING
The “VSC” warning light or the “CHECK
VSC SYSTEM” message and master warning light warns that there is a problem
somewhere in the vehicle stability control
system or the traction control system.
The “VSC” warning light or master warning
light will come on when the ignition switch
is set at ON and will go off after a few
seconds.

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator light blinks and an
alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.

Without multi−information display

The slip indicator light comes on for a few
seconds when the ignition switch is set at
ON. If the indicator light does not come
on when the ignition is turned on, contact
your Toyota dealer.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota
dealer:
Without multi−information display—

The warning light does not come on
after the ignition switch is set at ON.

The warning light remains on after the
ignition switch is set at ON.

The warning light comes on while drivWith multi−information display

ing.

173

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tire pressure warning system
With multi−information display—

The message and master warning light
come on after ignition switch is set at
ON.

The message and master warning light
come on while driving.

The tire pressure warning system warns
you that the tire inflation pressure is
low.
The tire pressure warning system is not
a substitute for checking normal tire inflation pressure. Check the tire inflation
pressure with a tire pressure gauge regularly.

CAUTION
The warning system may not activate
immediately if bursts or sudden air
leakage should occur.

The tire pressure warning light comes on
when the ignition switch is set at ON and
goes off after a few seconds. This means
the tire pressure warning system is operating properly. If the tire inflation pressure
becomes low, the light comes on again. In
this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the light after a few
minutes. If the light comes on after blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure warning
system is not working properly.

174

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Indicator
status
ON

ON after
blinking for
1 minute

Meanings

Do this

CAUTION

Tire inflation
pressure is
low

Adjust the
tire inflation
pressure

Tire pressure warning system
malfunction

Have the
system
checked at
your Toyota
dealer

If the tire pressure warning light
comes on, be sure to observe the
following precautions. Failure to do
so could cause loss of vehicle control
and result in death or serious injury.

Stop your vehicle in a safe place as
soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.

If the tire pressure warning light
comes on even after tire inflation
pressure adjustment, it is probable
that you have a flat tire. Check the
tires. If the tire is flat, change to
the spare tire and have the flat tire
repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
The tire pressure warning light may turn
on due to natural causes such as natural
air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes
caused by temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn
off the light.

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
switch should not turn off the tire pressure
warning light. Adjusting the tire inflation
pressure will turn off the light.
The spare tire (except compact spare tire)
is also equipped with the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. The tire
pressure warning light will turn on if the
tire inflation pressure of the spare tire is
low. If a tire goes flat, even though the
flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, the
warning light does not turn off. Replace
the spare tire with the repaired tire and
adjust the proper tire inflation pressure.
The tire pressure warning light will turn off
after a few minutes.
The compact spare tire is not equipped
with the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the warning
light will not turn off even though the flat
tire is replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire
and adjust the proper tire inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn
off after a few minutes.

175

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label (tire
and load information label). (If your
vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label
(tire and load information label), you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS–
tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
(low tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly
under−inflated.
Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
(low tire pressure warning light) illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under−inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under−
inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

NOTICE
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat
tire as tire pressure warning valve
and transmitter will be damaged.
When the tires must be repaired or
replaced, have them repaired or replaced by the nearest Toyota dealer
or authorized tire dealer. The tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters will be affected by the
installation or removal of tires.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under−inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale (low
tire pressure warning light).

176

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If the ID code on the tire pressure
warning valves and transmitters is not
registered.

If electronic devices or facilities using
similar radio
nearby.

wave

frequencies

are

If a radio set at similar frequencies is

Pushing the tire pressure warning reset
switch should not turn off the tire pressure
warning light.
Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire
pressure warning system may not work
properly with some types of tires.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

in use in the vehicle.

If a window tint that affects the radio
wave signals is installed.

If there is a lot of snow or ice on the
vehicle, in particular around the wheels
or wheel housings.
IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING
FOR 1 MINUTE...
If the tire pressure warning light comes
on after blinking for 1 minute when the
ignition switch is set at ON, the tire
pressure warning system is not working
properly.
The system will be disabled in the following conditions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the
system will work properly.)

If tires not equipped with tire pressure
warning
used.

valves and

transmitters are

If non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

If a special set of tires is used.
If tire chains are used.
If the spare tire (except compact spare
tire) is in a location subject to poor
radio wave signal reception.

If the tire inflation pressure is more

than 500 kPa (5 kgf/cm2 or bar, 70
psi) or more higher than the specified
level.

If the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute frequently when
the ignition switch is set at ON, have the
system checked by your Toyota dealer.

177

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

−Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
−Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS
When replacing the tires and wheels, be
sure to install tire pressure warning valves
and transmitters. ID codes on the tire
pressure warning valves and transmitters
are registered on the tire pressure warning
ECU. When replacing a tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. Have
the ID code registered by your Toyota
dealer.

NOTICE
When the tires or tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be
replaced, have them replaced by your
Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters will be
affected by the installation or removal
of tires.

−Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
−Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

178

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To initialize the system, perform the following:
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place and
turn the ignition switch off.
2. Adjust the pressure of all the installed
tires to the specified cold tire inflation
pressure level. (See “Tires” on page
411 in Section 8.)
3. Set the ignition switch to ON.
4. Open the glove box, and push and hold
the tire pressure warning reset switch
until the tire pressure warning light
blinks slowly three times.
TIRE PRESSURE
SWITCH

WARNING

RESET

When initializing the system, the present
tire inflation pressure is stored as standard. The tire pressure warning system
determines decreased air pressure by
comparing the present and the standard
tire inflation pressures. When you change
the set tire inflation pressure, it is necessary to initialize the tire pressure warning
system.

When changing the tire size.

5. Leave for a few minutes with the ignition switch ON, and then turn the ignition switch off.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch
while vehicle is moving, initialization is not
performed.
If you push the tire pressure reset switch
accidentally and initialization is performed,
adjust the tire inflation pressure to the
specified level and initialize the system
again.

If the tire pressure warning light does not
blink slowly three times when you push
and hold the reset switch, initialization has
failed and the tire pressure warning system may not work properly. In this case,
initialize the system again. If initialization
cannot be performed, have the system
checked at your Toyota dealer.

179

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Parking brake
CAUTION
Do not push the reset switch without
adjusting the tire inflation pressure to
the specified level. Otherwise, the tire
pressure warning light may not come
on even if the tire inflation pressure
is low, or it may come on when the
tire inflation pressure is actually normal.

Lever type (type A)

Pedal type (type A)

Lever type (type B)

Pedal type (type B)

180

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Cruise control
When parking, firmly apply the parking
brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.
Lever type—
To set: Pull up the lever. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal
and hold it while setting the parking
brake.
To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),
press the lock release button (2), and lower (3).
Pedal type—

The cruise control is designed to maintain a set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate the accelerator. Cruising speed can be set to any
speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).
Within the limits of the engine’s capabilities, cruising speed can be maintained up
or down grades. However, changes in vehicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

To set: Fully depress the parking brake
pedal. For better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it while
setting the parking brake.
To release: Depress the parking brake
pedal while depressing the brake pedal.

To help maintain maximum control

To remind you that the parking brake is
set, the parking brake reminder light in
the instrument panel remains on until you
release the parking brake.

Avoid vehicle speed increases when

CAUTION

of your vehicle, do not use the
cruise control when driving in
heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or
winding roads.
driving downhill. If the vehicle
speed is too fast in relation to the
cruise control set speed, cancel the
cruise control then downshift the
transmission to use engine braking
to slow down.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
To turn the cruise control on, press the
“ON−OFF” button. The cruise control indicator light on the instrument panel will
come on to indicate that the cruise control
is operational. Pressing the “ON−OFF”
button again turns the system off.
When the system is turned off, cruising
speed must be reset when the cruise control is turned on again.

Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the parking brake reminder light is off.

181

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If you need acceleration—for example,
when passing—depress the accelerator
pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed
the set speed. When you release it, the
vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.

CAUTION
To avoid accidentally engaging the
cruise control, turn the system off
when it is not in use. Make sure the
cruise control indicator light is off.

CAUTION

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

For manual transmission:
While driving with the cruise control
on, do not shift to neutral without
depressing the clutch pedal, as this
may cause engine racing or overrevving.

Automatic
transmission
models—The
transmission must be in “D” or “4” position
(2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−FE] engine), or “D”
position or between “4” (fourth range) and
“6” (sixth range) in “S” position (3.5 L V6
[2GR−FE] engine) before you set the
cruising speed.
Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,
push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and release it. This sets the vehicle
at that speed. If the speed is not satisfactory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,
or tap it down for a slower speed. Each
tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h
(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off
the accelerator pedal.

182

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL
The cruise control may be temporarily
cancelled by the driver or by the system
itself under certain circumstances. Temporary cancellation allows the set cruising
speed to remain in memory.
The cruise control can be temporarily cancelled by doing the following:

Pulling the lever in the “CANCEL” direction and releasing it

Depressing the brake pedal
Depressing the clutch pedal (manual
transmission)
Under certain circumstances, the cruise
control is temporarily cancelled:

When vehicle speed falls below 40
km/h (25 mph)

When vehicle stability control is activated
When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10
mph) below the set speed, the cruise control is cancelled and the set speed is
erased from memory.

To turn the cruise control off, press the
“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the cruise
control indicator light is off.
If the cruise control automatically cancels
out other than for the above cases, have
your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer at the earliest opportunity.
RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL
If the cruise control is temporarily cancelled, the cruising speed can be resumed
by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”
direction.
Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25
mph).
RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED
Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction
and hold it. Release the lever when the
desired speed is attained. While the lever
is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED
Push the lever down in the “− SET” direction and hold it. Release the lever when
the desired speed is attained. While the
lever is held down, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
However, a faster way to reset is to depress the brake pedal and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.
Automatic transmission models—Even if
you downshift from the “D” to “4” or “D”
to “S” with the cruise control on, engine
braking will not be applied because the
cruise control is not cancelled. To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the cruise control lever or
depress the brake pedal. If you use the
brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

However, a faster way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and then push the
lever down in the “− SET” direction.

The cruise control indicator light remains
on to indicate that the system is still in
operation.

183

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING
If the cruise control indicator light flashes
when using the cruise control, press the
“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off
and then press it again to turn it on.
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some trouble in the cruise
control system.

The indicator light does not come on.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it
comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Toyota
dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

184

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 8

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Audio and hands−free phone systems
Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using your audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUX adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hands−free phone system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

186
186
206
207
208
215

For vehicle equipped with Navigation system, please refer to the
separate “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

185

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Using your audio system—
—Some basics

Reference

This section describes some of the basic
features on Toyota audio systems. Some
information may not pertain to your system.
Your audio system works when the ignition
switch is set at ACC or ON.
TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF
Push “POWER·VOLUME” to turn the audio
system on and off.
Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “AM·SAT”∗ or
“DISC·AUX” to turn on that function without pushing “POWER·VOLUME”.
Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2: AM·FM radio/compact disc player
with changer (with XM satellite radio∗ controller)
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

You can turn on the compact disc player
by inserting a compact disc.
You can turn off the compact disc player
by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio
system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you
eject the compact disc. If the radio was
previously on, it will come on again.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

186

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS
Push “AM”, “FM1”, “FM2”, “AM·SAT”∗ or
“DISC·AUX” if the system is already on
but you want to switch from one function
to other.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

LISTENING TO THE XM SATELLITE
RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2)
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in
your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota
satellite receiver and antenna (or equivalents) must be purchased and installed. A
subscription to the XM satellite radio service is also necessary.
How to subscribe to an XM satellite
radio
An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed
exclusively to receive broadcasts provided
under a separate subscription. Availability
is limited to the 48 contiguous states.

How to subscribe:
You must enter into a separate service
agreement with the XM radio in order to
receive satellite broadcast programming in
the vehicle. Additional activation and service subscription fees apply that are not
included in the purchase price of the vehicle and optional digital satellite tuner.
For complete information on subscription
rates and terms, or to subscribe to the
XM radio, visit XM on the web at
www.xmradio.com or call an XM’s Listener
Care at (800) 852−9696. The XM radio is
solely responsible for the quality, availability and content of the satellite radio services provided, which are subject to the
terms and conditions of the XM radio customer service agreement.
Customers should have their radio ID
ready; the radio ID can be found by tuning to “channel 000” on the radio. For
details, see “Displaying the radio ID” below.

Satellite tuner technology notice:
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded
Type Approval Certificates from XM Satellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility
with the services offered by the XM satellite radio.
Displaying the radio ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a unique
radio ID. You will need the radio ID when
activating XM service or when reporting a
problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the
“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another channel, display of the ID
code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the radio ID
and the specific radio ID code.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM satellite radio and are
subject to change.

187

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

TONE AND BALANCE

Balance

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

For details about your system’s tone and
balance controls, see the description of
your own system.

A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound
levels is also important.

When you insert a disc, gently push it in
with the label side up. The compact disc
player will play from track 1 through to
the end of the disc. Then it will play from
track 1 again.

SRS

(type 1 only)

The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS
and SRS TruBass audio enhancement
technologies, under license from SRS
Labs, Inc., in all mode except AM radio
mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and
symbol are trademarks of
SRS Labs, Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under
license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to
a stereo recording or broadcast, changing
the right/left balance will increase the volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of other.
YOUR RADIO ANTENNA
Your vehicle has an antenna printed on
the inside of the rear window.

NOTICE

Tone
How good an audio program sounds to
you is largely determined by the mix of
the treble, midrange (type 2 only), and
bass levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs usually sound better with different mixes of treble, midrange
and bass.
You can adjust sound characteristics. Different sound characteristics can be recorded for each audio source.

Putting a film (especially a conductive
or metallic film) on the rear window
will noticeably reduce the sensitivity
of the radio.

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.
8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles
Your compact disc player does not need
an adaptor to play compact disc singles.
Compact disc singles are about 8 cm (3
in.) in diameter−smaller than standard
discs.

NOTICE
Do not use an adaptor for compact
disc singles—it could cause tracking
errors or interfere with the ejection of
compact discs.

188

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH
CHANGER (type 2)
When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”
button and gently push the disc in with
the label side up. This compact disc player can store up to six discs. The player
will play from track 1 through to the end
of the disc. Then it will play from track
1 of the next disc.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE
Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to
the compact disc player. Insert only
one compact disc into slot at a
time.
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the compact disc player. Do
not insert anything other than compact discs into the slot.

189

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Controls and features
Type 1
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

190

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(Reverse/Fast forward button)

Switching over the Speed Automatic
Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the player will resume
playing.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can
be turned on by turning the knob. In addition, turning the knob allows you to select
from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and
tone settings. The ASL system automatically adjusts volume and tone in accordance with the driving speed. This helps
ensure an optimal listening experience
even if noise levels rise while driving.

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
(Eject button)
Push the compact disc eject button to
eject a compact disc.

AM
Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio
and select the AM band. “AM” will appear
on the display.
AUDIO CTRL (Tone and sound balance
controls)
Each time you push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob, the mode changes. To adjust the
tone and balance, turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
compact disc.
When the audio system is set to compact
disc operation, the display shows the
track number currently being played.
To switch between CD and AUX (external
device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX”
button. The AUX mode is only available
when AUX adapter is connected to the
system. When the AUX adapter is in use,
“AUX” will appear on the display.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

191

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Error messages

DISC

POWER·VOLUME (Power and Volume)

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

With compact disc changer only—

Push “POWER·VOLUME” to turn the audio
system
on
and
off.
Turn
“POWER·VOLUME” to adjust the volume.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.
“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.
“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of
the separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer
lid of the separate unit is open. Close the
compact disc changer lid.
If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA
data disc.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.
Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.
FM1 FM2
Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on
the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
or “FM2” will appear on the display. This
system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.
FOLDER (Folder up/down)
To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push “” or “” side of the “FOLDER”
several times until the number of the folder you want to listen to appears on the
display.
To jump to the first file in the first folder:
Push and hold the “” side of the button
until you hear a beep.
When playing a disc featuring both audio
data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
data (CD−DA) is played.

RAND (Random)
Compact disc player
There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
With compact disc changer only—
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will
appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

192

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

MP3/WMA player

RPT (Repeat)

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

To randomly play the files in a folder:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display.
To randomly play all of the files on the
compact disc:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
until you hear a beep. “
” will
appear on the display and the player will
play all of the files on the disc in random
order. To turn off the random playback
feature, push this button again.

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
With compact disc changer only—
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

Repeating a file:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the file is playing.
” will appear on the display. When
“
the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all of the files in the folder. When the last
file in the folder ends, the folder will repeat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.

193

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SCAN

Compact disc player

MP3/WMA player

Radio

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

There are two scan features—you can either scan the files in a folder on a specific disc or scan the first file of all the
folder.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” will appear on the display
and the player will scan all the tracks on
the disc you are listening to. To stop
scanning, push this button again. If the
player scanned all the tracks on the disc,
it will stop scanning.

Scanning the files on a folder:
Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”
will appear on the display and the player
will scan all the files in the folder you are
listening to. To select a file, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the
disc have been scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
“
” will appear on the display and
the player will scan the first file of the
next folder. To select a folder, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the folders have
been scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.

You can either scan all the frequencies on
a band or scan only the preset stations
for that band.
To scan the preset stations:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. The radio will tune in
the next preset station up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To stop scanning,
push this button again.
To scan all the frequencies:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. The radio will find the next station up
the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,
and then scan again to the next station.
To stop scanning, push this button again.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs
in the magazine:
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a
beep. “ SCAN” will appear on the display and the player will scan the first
track on the next disc. To stop scanning,
push this button again. If the player has
scanned all the discs, it will stop scanning.

194

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SEEK·TRACK
down)

(Seeking/Tracking

up/

Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “” or “” side of the
“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again to
find the station after that.
Compact disc player
Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.
Push
“”
or
“”
side
of
the
“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number of
the track you want to listen to appears on
the display. If you want to return to the
beginning of the current track, quickly
push the “” side of the button one time.
MP3/WMA player
Use this button to file up or down to a
different file.
Push
“”
or
“”
side
of
the
“SEEK·TRACK” several times until the file
you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current file, push the “” side
of the button one time.

ST (Stereo reception) display

MP3/WMA player

Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces
the amount of channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating noise.
If the signal becomes extremely weak, the
radio switches from stereo to mono reception.

This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.

TEXT
Compact disc player
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.

To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the
MP3/WMA file is playing. The display
changes in the order from the elapsed
time to folder name to file name to album
title to track title to artist name, then back
to the elapsed time.
If this button is pushed while an
MP3/WMA file that does not contain text
data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on
the display.
If the entire text data is not displayed,
push and hold it until you hear a beep.
The rest of the text data will appear.

If this button is pushed while a compact
disc that does not contain text data is
playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the
display.
If the entire disc or track title does not
appear on the display, push and hold the
button until you hear a beep. The rest of
the title will appear.

195

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)
Radio
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
MP3/WMA

player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
file down.

196

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Type 2
Details of specific buttons, controls and
features are described in the alphabetical
list that follows.

197

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio stations.
To preset a station to a button: Tune in
the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the station to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.
To recall a preset station: Push the button
for the station you want. The preset button number and station frequency will appear on the display.
These systems can store one AM and two
FM stations for each button. (The display
will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you
push “AM·SAT”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)
XM satellite radio∗—
These buttons are used to preset and
tune in radio channels.
To preset a channel to a button: Tune in
the desired channel. (See “TUNE·FILE” or
“SEEK·TRACK”.) Push and hold down the
button until you hear a beep—this will set
the channel to the button. The preset button number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset channel: Push the button for the channel you want. The preset
button number and channel number will
appear on the display.
This radio can store three XM channels
for each button. (The display will show
“SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” when you push
“AM·SAT” button.)
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
(Eject button)

(Reverse/Fast forward button)
Push and hold “
” (preset button 6) or
“
” (preset button 5) to fast forward or
reverse within a compact disc. When you
release the button, the player will resume
playing.
AM·SAT (AM band and XM satellite radio∗)
Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on the
radio and select the AM or XM band.
“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will appear on the display.

This button is used to eject one or all
compact discs.

Error messages

To eject the current compact disc, push
and release the compact disc eject button.

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,
your audio system will display following
error messages.

To eject a specific disc, push “” (preset
button 3) or “” (preset button 4) until the
number of the disc you want to eject is
displayed. Push and release the eject button.
To eject all discs at a time, press and
hold the eject button until you hear a
beep. The last compact disc played before
pushing the button will be ejected first. If
the ejected disc is not removed for a long
time, the eject function will be cancelled.

“ANTENNA”:

The XM antenna is not connected.
Check whether the XM antenna cable
is attached securely.

A short−circuit occurs in the antenna or
the surrounding antenna cable. See a
Toyota certified dealer.

198

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

“UPDATING”:

You have not subscribed to the XM
satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is
canceled, you can choose the “CH000”
and all free−to−air channels.

The premium channel you selected is
not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does
not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the
premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.
“NO SIGNAL”: The XM signal is too
weak at the current location. Wait until
your vehicle reaches a location with a
stronger signal.
“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio
or program information. Wait until the unit
has received the information.
“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is
not broadcasting any programming. Select
another channel.

“− − −”: The channel you selected is no
longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds
until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH001”. If it does not change
automatically, select another channel.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between
the right and left speakers. The display
ranges from L7 to R7.

The XM Listener Care Center is also
available on the phone, please call (800)
852−9696 during the following hours:
Monday—Saturday: 7 a.m.—1 a.m.
Sunday: 12 p.m.—12 a.m.

∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

AUDIO CTRL (Tone and sound balance
controls)
Each time you push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob, the mode changes. To adjust the
tone and balance, turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The display ranges from −5 to 5.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between
the front and rear speakers. The display
ranges from F7 to R7.

Switching over the Speed Automatic
Sound Levelizer (ASL) level

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a
compact disc.
When the audio system is set to compact
disc operation, the display shows the
track, or track and disc number currently
being played.
To switch between CD and AUX (external
device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only available when
AUX adapter is connected to the system.
When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”
will appear on the display.

199

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Error messages

DISC

MP3/WMA player

If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display following error messages.

Use these buttons to select a disc you
want to listen to.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit
may be too hot. Allow the player to cool
down.

Push “” (preset button 3) or “” (preset
button 4) until the number of the disc you
want to listen appears on the display.

To skip up or down to a different folder:
Push
“”
or
“”
side
of
the
“TYPE·FOLDER” several times until the
number of the folder you want to listen to
appears on the display.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, damaged or inserted incorrectly (up−side
down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

FM1 FM2

“NO DISC”: Eject the disc or magazine.
Set the disc or magazine again.
“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside
the system.
“ERROR 4”: Over−current.
Toyota dealer to inspect.

Ask

your

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,
it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA
data has been inserted. Remove the disc
from the player and insert an MP3/WMA
data disc.
If the malfunction still exists, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on
the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”
or “FM2” will appear on the display. This
system allows you to set twelve FM stations, two for each of the preset button.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:
Push and hold the “” side of the button
until you hear a beep.
When playing a disc featuring both audio
data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio
data (CD−DA) is played.

TYPE·FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)

LOAD

Radio

This button is used to load the compact
discs in the compact disc player. This
player can store up to six discs.

XM satellite radio∗—
When you push the “” or “” side of
the “TYPE·FOLDER” button while receiving
a XM channel, the current channel category appears on the display.
When the channel category appears, push
either
“”
or
“”
side
of
the
“TYPE·FOLDER” button to switch to the
next or previous category.
∗:

To load one compact disc only, quickly
push and release the button. When the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn
green, insert a compact disc. After the
disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot will
close.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

200

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To load multiple compact discs, push and
hold the button (until you hear a beep
when the audio system is on). When the
indicators on both sides of the slot turn
green, insert the first compact disc. After
the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot
will close. After a few seconds, the shutter will automatically open again and the
indicators will turn green so the next disc
can be inserted. The same process can
be applied for loading the rest of the
discs. If the player is full of discs, “DISC
FULL” will appear on the display.
If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter
will close after 15 seconds.
POWER·VOLUME (Power and Volume)
Push “POWER·VOLUME” to turn the audio
system
on
and
off.
Turn
“POWER·VOLUME” to adjust the volume.

RAND (Random)

MP3/WMA player

Compact disc player

There are two random playback features—
you can either listen to all of the files on
the compact discs in random order. You
can also listen to the files in a single
folder in random order.

There are two random features—you can
either listen to the tracks on one compact
disc in random order, or listen to the
tracks on all the compact discs in the
magazine in random order.
To play the tracks on one disc in random
order:
Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset
button 1). “
” will appear on the
display and the player will perform the
tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order. To turn off the random feature, push this button again.
To play all the tracks in the magazine in
random order:
Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)
” will
until you hear a beep. “
appear on the display and the player will
perform all the tracks on all the discs in
the magazine in random order. To turn off
the random feature, push this button
again.

201

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

RPT (Repeat)

MP3/WMA player

SCAN

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can
repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Radio

There are two repeat features—you can
either replay a disc track or a whole compact disc.
Repeating a track:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the track is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the track ends, it will automatically replay.
To turn off the repeat feature, push this
button again.
Repeating a disc:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. When the disc ends, the player will
automatically go back to the first track on
the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat
feature, push this button again.

Repeating a file:
Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset
button 2) while the file is playing.
“
” will appear on the display. When
the file ends, it will repeat automatically.
This process will be continued until you
push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Repeating a folder:
Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)
until you hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player will repeat
all of the files in the folder. When the last
file in the folder ends, the folder will repeat from the beginning. To turn off the
repeat feature, push this button again.

202

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To scan the preset channels:
Push and hold the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the
display. The radio will tune in the next
preset channel up the band, stay there for
5 seconds, and then move to the next
preset channel. To stop scanning, push
this button again.
To scan the currently selected channel
category:
Quickly push and release the “SCAN” button. “SCAN” appears on the display. The
radio will find the next channel in the
same channel category up the band, stay
there for 5 seconds, and then scan again.
To stop scanning, push this button again.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

Compact disc player

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can either scan the tracks on a specific disc or
scan the first tracks of all the discs in the
magazine.

There are two scan features—you can either scan the files in a folder on a specific disc or scan the first file of all the
folder.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:
Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.
” will appear on the display and
“
the player will scan the first file of the
next folder. To select a folder, push the
“SCAN” again. After all the folders have
been scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.

203

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SEEK·TRACK
down)

(Seeking/Tracking

up/

Radio
In the seek mode, the radio finds and
plays the next station up or down the
station band.
To seek the next station, quickly push and
release “” or “” side of the
“SEEK·TRACK” button. Do this again to
find the station after that.
XM satellite radio∗—
To select the next channel within the current channel category, push the “” or
“” side of the “SEEK·TRACK” button.
Repeat until a desired channel is found.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

Compact disc player

ST (Stereo reception) display

Use this button to skip up or down to a
different track.

Push
“”
or
“”
side
of
the
“SEEK·TRACK” button until the number of
the track you want to listen to appears on
the display. If you want to return to the
beginning of the current track, quickly
push the “” side of the button one time.
MP3/WMA player
Use this button to file up or down to a
different file.
Push
“”
or
“”
side
of
the
“SEEK·TRACK” several times until the file
you want to listen to appears on the display. If you want to return to the beginning of the current file, push the “” side
of the button one time.

TEXT
XM satellite radio∗1 —
When you push the “TEXT” button, the
display changes as follows:
CH NAME → TITLE (SONG/PROGRAM
TITLE) → NAME (ARTIST NAME/FEATURE) → CH NUMBER → CH NAME
Up to 10 alphanumeric characters can be
displayed. (Some information will not be
fully displayed.)
The message display will be canceled if
any button that affects the display is
pushed.
If there is no song/program title or artist
name/feature associated with the channel
at that time, “− − − − −” will appear on the
display.

204

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

This XM tuner supports “Audio Services”
(Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radio
and “Text Information”∗2 linked to the respective audio services.
∗1 :

∗2 :

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.
Text Information includes, Channel
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.

Compact disc player
This button is used to change the display
for the compact disc that contains text
data.
To change the display, quickly push and
release the “TEXT” button while the compact disc is playing. The display changes
in the order from the elapsed time to disc
title to track title, then back to the
elapsed time.

MP3/WMA player

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

This button is used to change the display
for the MP3/WMA file that contains text
data.

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the frequency. Turn the knob
counterclockwise to step down the frequency.
XM satellite radio∗—
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
step up the channel. Turn the knob counterclockwise to step down the channel.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

MP3/WMA

player

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to
file up. Turn the knob counterclockwise to
file down.

205

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Audio remote controls
(steering switches)
Some parts of the audio system can be
adjusted using the switches on the steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Volume control switch
2. “” switch
3. “MODE” switch
1. Volume control switch

Type A

Push the “+” side to increase the volume.
The volume continues to increase while
the switch is being pushed.
Push the “−” side to decrease the volume.
The volume continues to decrease while
the switch is being pushed.
2. “ ” switch
Radio
This switch has the following features—
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch. Do this again to select
the next preset station.

Type B

To seek a station:
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Do this
again to find the next station. If you push
the switch on either side during the seek
mode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, push
and hold the switch even after you hear
a beep. When you release the switch, the
radio will begin seeking up or down for a
station. Do this again to find the next
station.
XM satellite radio∗—
To select a preset channel, push the “”
or “” side of the switch. Repeat until a
desired channel is found.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

Compact disc player
Use this switch to skip up or down to a
different track in either direction.
Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch until the track you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current track, push
the “” side of the switch once, quickly.
With compact disc changer only—
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
switch until the disc you want to listen to
is set.

206

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

AUX adapter
MP3/WMA player

3. “MODE” switch

To select a desired file:
Quickly push and release the “” or “”
side of the switch until the file you want
to listen to is set. If you want to return
to the beginning of the current file, push
the “” side of the switch once, quickly.

Push the “MODE” switch to select an audio mode. Each push changes the mode
sequentially if the desired mode is ready
to use.

To select a desired folder:
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the folder you want to listen to is
set.

To turn the audio system off, push and
hold the “MODE” switch until the system
turns off.

To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.

With compact disc changer only—
To select a desired disc:
Push and hold the “” or “” side of the
switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this
until the disc you want to listen to is set.

An AUX adapter is installed inside the
auxiliary box.
By inserting a mini plug into the AUX
adapter, you can listen to music from a
portable audio device through the vehicle’s
speaker system.
To use the AUX adapter, switch to the
AUX mode (external device mode) by
pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the
AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear
on the display. To adjust the volume, turn
the “POWER·VOLUME” knob.
When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may
occur during playback. If this happens,
use the power source of the portable audio device.

207

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Audio system operating hints
If you install an audio system other than
a genuine audio system, you will not be
able to use the AUX adapter.
Connected cables can be passed through
the hole to the front passenger side of the
auxiliary box. For details, see “Auxiliary
boxes” on page 277 in Section 1−10.

NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages
over the audio system.
Do not put anything other than a
compact disc into the slot.
The use of a cellular phone inside
or near the vehicle may cause a
noise from the speakers of the audio system which you are listening
to. However, this does not indicate
a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with
your radio—it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power
lines or telephone wires can interfere with
AM signals. And of course, radio signals
have a limited range. The farther you are
from a station, the weaker its signal will
be. In addition, reception conditions
change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception problems that probably do not indicate a problem with your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the
effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may
notice fading and drifting, which increase
with the distance from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,
making it possible for two signals to reach
your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a momentary flutter or
loss of reception.
Static and fluttering—These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or
other large objects. Increasing the bass
level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping—If the FM signal you
are listening to is interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may
tune in the second station until the original signal can be picked up again.

208

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

AM
Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by
the upper atmosphere—especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station, causing the radio station to sound
alternately strong and weak.
Station interference—When a reflected signal and a signal received directly from a
radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each
other, making it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static—AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high
tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct
the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

XM∗
Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.
∗:

Use of satellite radio requires XM tuner
and service. Contact your Toyota dealer for details.

209

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CARING FOR YOUR
PLAYER AND DISCS

COMPACT

DISC

Type 2 only—Your compact disc player
is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.)
discs only.

Extremely high temperatures can keep
your compact disc player from working.
On hot days, use the air conditioning
to cool the vehicle interior before you
listen to a disc.

Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your compact disc player skip.

If moisture gets into your compact disc
player, you may not hear any sound
even though your compact disc player
appears to be working. Remove the
disc from the player and wait until it
dries.

CAUTION

Use only compact discs marked as

Special shaped discs

shown above. The following products
may not be playable on your compact
disc player.
Copy−protected CD
CD−R (CD−Recordable)
CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)
CD−ROM

Compact disc players use an invisible
laser beam which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed
outside the unit. Be sure to operate
the player correctly.

Transparent/translucent discs

210

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Low quality discs

Wrong

Handle compact discs carefully, especially when you are inserting them.
Hold them on the edge and do not
bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints
on them, particularly on the shiny side.

Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or
other disc damage could cause the
player to skip or to repeat a section of
a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the
disc up to the light.)

Remove discs from the compact disc

Labeled discs

player when you are not listening to
them. Store them in their plastic cases
away from moisture, heat, and direct
sunlight.

211

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

MP3/WMA FILES

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA
(Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.

The MP3/WMA player can play MP3
and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and
CD−RW discs.
The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level
2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file
system.

When naming an MP3 or WMA file,
To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a
soft, lint−free cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line
from the center to the edge of the disc
(not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint−free cloth. Do not use a conventional
record cleaner or anti−static device.

add the appropriate file extension (.mp3
or .wma).

The MP3/WMA player plays back files
with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as
MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise
and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.

Multi−session compatible CDs can also
be played.

MP3 files are compatible with the ID3
Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and
Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display disc title, track title and artist
name in other formats.

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that
is used in the same way as an ID3
tag. WMA tags carry information such
as track title, artist name.

The emphasis function is available only
when playing MP3/WMA files recorded
at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system
can play MP3 files with sampling frequencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.
However, the emphasis function is not
available for files recorded at these frequencies.)

The sound quality of MP3/WMA files
generally improves with higher bit
rates. In order to achieve a reasonable
level of sound quality, discs recorded
with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are
recommended.
Playable bit rates
MP3 files:
MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps
Ver. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

212

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The MP3/WMA player does not play
back MP3/WMA files from discs recorder using packet write data transfer
(UDF format). Discs should be recorded using “pre−mastering” software
rather than packet−write software.

M3u playlists are not compatible with
the audio player.

MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO
formats are not compatible with the audio player.

The MP3 player is compatible with
VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

When playing back files recorded as
VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play
time will not be correctly displayed if
fast forward or reverse operations are
used.

It is not possible to check folders that
do not include MP3/WMA files.

MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels deep can be played. However, the
start of playback may be delayed when
using discs containing numerous levels
of folders. For this reason, we recommend creating discs with no more than
two levels of folders.

CD−R and CD−RW discs

CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been
001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.wma
005.mp3
Folder 3
006.mp3

The play order of the compact disc
with the structure shown on the left is
as follows:

subject to the “finalizing process” (a
process that allows discs to be played
on a conventional CD player) cannot
be played.

It may not be possible to play CD−
R/CD−RW discs recorded on a music
CD recorder or a personal computer
because
of
disc
characteristics,
scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,
condensation, etc. on the lens of the
unit.

It may not be possible to play discs
recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and
the environment. Record with the correct format. (For details, contact the
appropriate application manufacturers of
the applications.)

CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged
by direct exposure to sunlight, high
temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable to play
some damaged discs.

It is possible to play up to 192 folders
or 255 files on one disc.

213

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If you insert a CD−RW disc into the
MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
more slowly than with a conventional
CD or CD−R disc.

Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot
be played using the DDCD (Double
Density CD) system.

TERMS

ISO 9660 format—

Packet write—

This is the international standard for the
formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.
For the ISO 9660 format, there are two
levels of regulations.

This is a general term that describes the
process of writing data on−demand to
CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is
written to floppy or hard discs.
ID3 Tag—
This is a method of embedding track−related information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track
title, the artist’s name, the album title, the
music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can
be freely edited using software with ID3
tag editing functions. Although the tags
are restricted to the number of characters,
the information can be viewed when the
track is played back.
WMA Tag—
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag.
WMA tags carry information such as track
title, artist name.

Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file names, with a 3 character file
extension. File names must be composed
of one−byte capital letters and numbers.
The “_” symbol may also be included.)
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including the separation mark “.” and
file extension). Each folder must contain
fewer than 8 hierarchies.
m3u—
Playlists created using “WINAMP” software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3—
MP3 is an audio compression standard
determined by a working group (MPEG) of
the ISO (International Standard Organization). MP3 compresses audio data to
about 1/10 the size of that on conventional discs.

214

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Hands−free phone system—
—Reference
WMA—

Phone Setup (see page 221)

Security (see page 226)

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by Microsoft. It compresses files into a size smaller than that of MP3 files. The decoding
formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and
9.

Pair phone

Set PIN

To use the hands−free system, you
need to register your phone in the system.

Change name
The registered phone names can be
changed.

Delete
The registered phones can be deleted.

List phone
The registered phone names can be
checked.

Select phone
The registered phones can be selected.

Set passkey
The passkey can be changed.

The PIN can be set or changed.

Phone book lock
The phone book can be locked.

Phone book unlock
The locked phone book can be unlocked.
System Setup (see page 230)

Adjust Guidance Volume
Guidance volume can be adjusted.

Initialize
Phone Book (see page 230)

Add Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.

Change Name
The registered names can be changed.

Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

215

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Some basics
Delete Speed Dial
The registered speed dial can be deleted.

List names
The registered names can be checked.

Set Speed Dial
Speed dials can be set
Redial (see page 238)

This system supports Bluetooth, a wireless system that allows you to make or
receive calls without taking your hands
from the steering wheel and without using cables to connect the phone and
system.
The phone must be paired to the system
before using the hands−free feature. If
your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth, this system will not function.

Callback (see page 239)
Making a phone call (see page 240)
Receiving a phone call (see page 243)
Talking on the phone (see page 244)

CAUTION
While you are driving, do not use a
cellular
phone
or
connect
the
Bluetooth phone.

NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone in
the car. The temperature indoor may
be high and damage the phone.

216

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The system may not function in the following conditions and places:

When transferring ownership of the vehicle:

The cellular phone is turned off.
The current position is outside the

A lot
when
When
hicle,

communication area.

The cellular phone is not connected.
The cellular phone has a low battery.
The cellular phone is hiding behind the
seat or in the glove box and console
box.

The cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.
If the cellular phone does not support both
of the following profiles, the hands−free
system cannot be used.

HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1

of personal data is registered
you use the hands−free system.
transferring ownership of the veinitialize your data.

If you initialize it, the former state will
never come back again. Pay much attention when initializing the data.
You can initialize the following data in the
system.

FCC ID: HYQBTAU01A
IC ID: 1551A−BTAU01A
MADE IN JAPAN
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Phone book data
Dialed numbers and received calls
Speed dial
Bluetooth phone data
Security code

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

BLUETOOTH is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

217

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Control and features
Steering switches and microphone
NOTE: This equipment has been
tested and found to comply with the
limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this
equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
−Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
−Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
−Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
−Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation
Exposure
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for
uncontrolled equipment and meets the
FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure
Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply
without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable
that it should be installed and operated with at least 20 cm and more
between the radiator and person’s
body (excluding extremities: hands,
wrists, feet and legs).

Steering switches (Type A)

Co−location: This transmitter must
not be co−located or operated in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

Steering switches (Type B)

218

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

2. Talk switch
Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−
free system on and initiates the speech
command system.
Pushing and holding the talk switch ends
the speech command system.
3. Off−hook switch
Pushing the off−hook switch
hands−free system on.

turns

the

When receiving a call, pushing the off−
hook switch allows you to talk on the
phone.
Overhead console

1. Volume control switch
To increase the volume: Push “+”.
To decrease the volume: Push “−”.
The volume continues increasing or decreasing while the switch is being pushed.
When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or
more, the volume automatically increases
without switch adjustment. When your
speed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), the
volume automatically returns to its original
level.

4. On−hook switch
When the hands−free system is on, pushing the on−hook switch turns the hands−
free system off.
5. Microphone
The microphone is used when talking on
the phone or using the speech command
system.

219

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Audio unit
1. Display
Displays such items as the reception level, a party’s name and phone number. See
“DISPLAY” described on the following
page for further details about the display.
2. “AUDIO CTRL” knob
Turning the “AUDIO CTRL” knob displays
the menu items, names, numbers, etc. to
be selected. To select an item, push the
“AUDIO CTRL” knob. Due to safety concerns, the “AUDIO CTRL” knob does not
function while the vehicle is in motion.
3. Preset buttons
Pushing the preset button displays the
registered speed dial numbers.
4. “TEXT” button
When the party’s name or phone number
is too long to be displayed, pushing the
“TEXT” button displays the remaining
characters.

220

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Phone Setup
2. Reception level display
Displays the reception level of the radio
wave signals. This may not match the
display on the cellular phone. The reception level of some cellular phones may not
be displayed.
The number of bars is greater when the
signal received is stronger.
3. Message display
Displays phone numbers, names, comments, menu items, etc.
DISPLAY

The phone setup menu includes the following:

Pair Phone
To use the hands−free system, you need
to register your phone in the system.
Once you have registered it, you can
make a hands−free call. Up to 6 phones
can be registered.

Select Phone
When the system connects to Bluetooth,
the phone previously used is automatically
selected. Select a different phone if necessary. Only the selected phone can be
used with the hands−free system.

1. Bluetooth display

Change Name

Displays when a Bluetooth connection is
made. If there is no display, the Bluetooth
connection has not been made and communication between the phone and system
is not possible. When using the hands−
free system, make sure that “BT” is displayed. The display is updated in real
time.

The registered
changed.

phone

names

can

phone

names

can

List Phones
The registered
checked.

The following can be performed during the
name playback:

Select phone
Change name
Delete

221

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Set PassKey

To pair phones

The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8
digit code can be input as a passkey.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Pair
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “Pair Phone” is displayed
and push the knob.

Delete
The registered phones can be deleted.
To enter the phone setup menu
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Setup. Please push the talk switch and
say security, or phone setup.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Phone Setup” is displayed and push
the knob.
“Phone setup. Push the talk switch and
say pair phone, select phone, change
name, list phones, set passkey or delete.”
is heard.
“XXX (phone name) already selected.” is
heard and “XXX (phone name)” is displayed.
If no phone has been registered, the system may not function properly.

“Pair. Push the talk switch and say a
name for the phone.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Rec
Name” is displayed, push the knob and
say “XXX (desired phone name)”.
“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“XXX Ready for phone pairing. Please use
the phone to connect it to the hands−free
system. The passkey for the phone is....”
is heard.
After “HANDS FREE” is displayed, a passkey∗ is displayed and “Searching.” is
heard.

The system may not function in the following cases:

If 6 phones have already been registered.

If the vehicle is moving.
If the system cannot communicate with
the phone.
∗:

Passkey is a password required to register a phone to the system.

INFORMATION
To use the hands−free system, you
need to register your phone in the
system. Once you have registered
it, you can make a hands−free call.
Up to 6 phones can be registered.
For the operation of the phone, see
the manual that comes with your
cellular phone.
The passkey can be changed. See
page 225 for changing the passkey.

4. Input the passkey displayed on the
screen into the phone.
“The phone is paired and ready for use.
Returning to the main menu.” is heard and
“Paired” is displayed.

222

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To select a phone
1. Push the talk switch and say “Select
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “Select Phone” is displayed
and push the knob.
“Select phone. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name or say list phones.”
is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
desired phone name is displayed and
push the knob.

When the phone is selected by using
the knob:
“XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If the phone is not found.
If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

To change a name
1. Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Change Name” is displayed and
push the knob.
“Change name. Push the talk switch and
say the phone name to change.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
phone name that you want to change
is displayed and push the knob.

When the phone is selected by a voice
command:
“XXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” is
displayed and push the knob.
“XXX selected. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

223

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

When the phone is selected by a voice
command:

When the phone is selected by using
the knob:

The system may not function in the following cases:

“XXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.

If no phone has been registered.
If the system does not recognize the

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

“Push the talk switch and say a new
name.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Rec
Name” is displayed, push the knob and
say “XXX (desired phone name)”.

“XXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.

“Push the talk switch and say select
phone, change name, or delete.” is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

Select one of the following:

“Name changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard and “Changed” is displayed.

voice command.
To list phones
1. Push the talk switch and say “List
phones”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “List Phones” is displayed
and push the knob.
“List phones. To select a name, push the
talk switch during the name playback.” is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

224

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Select phone

To set a passkey

When using the knob:

Push the talk switch and say “Select
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Select Phone” is displayed and push
the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Set
passkey”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “Set PassKey” is displayed
and push the knob.

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number. Push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob to set.

For further details on selecting a phone,
see page 223.

“Set Passkey. The passkey is required for
the phone pairing process. Push the talk
switch and say a new passkey.” is heard
and passkey is displayed.

Change name
Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Change Name” is displayed and
push the knob.
For further details on changing a name,
see page 223.
Delete
Push the talk switch and say “Delete”, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Delete”
is displayed and push the knob.
For further details on deleting a phone,
see page 226.
If no phone has been registered, the system may not function properly.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number.
When using a voice command:

2. When the passkey is set, push the
“AUDIO CTRL” knob.
“Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If the passkey has less than 4 digits.
If the passkey has more than 8 digits.

“XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or say go back or delete.”
is heard and “XXXX (new passkey)” is
displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” is
displayed and push the knob.
“Passkey changed. Returning to the phone
setup.” is heard.

225

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Security
To delete a phone
1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Delete” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say the
phone name to delete.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
phone name you want to delete is displayed and push the knob.
When using a voice command:
“XXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” is
displayed and push the knob.
“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”
is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

The system may not function in the following cases:

If no phone has been registered.
If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

The security menu includes the following:

Set PIN (Personal Identification Number)
The PIN can be set or changed.

Phone book lock
The phone book can be locked.
When the phone book is locked, the following functions cannot be used:

Dial by name and number
Redial
Callback
Speed Dial
Phone Setup
PhoneBook
Set PIN
Phone book unlock

The locked phone book can be unlocked.

When using the knob:
“Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.”
is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.

226

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To enter the security menu

To set a PIN

When using a voice command:

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

Push the talk switch and say “Set PIN”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Set
PIN” is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “XXX
(new PIN number)”.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Setup. Please push the talk switch and
say security, or phone setup.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Security” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Security. Push the talk switch and say
set PIN, phone book lock, or phone book
unlock.” is heard.

“There is no PIN number set. Please register a PIN number. Please push the talk
switch and say a four−digit PIN number.”
is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number. Push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob to set.
2. Repeat the above procedure until the
entire four−digit number is set.
3. When the PIN is set, push the “AUDIO
CTRL” knob.
4. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.

227

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If the PIN is to be changed:

To lock the phone book

When using a voice command:

“There is a PIN number in place. Push
the talk switch and say the correct PIN
number.” is heard and “Current PIN?” is
displayed.

1. Push
book
knob
push

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
use the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to input
the current PIN number.

“There is a PIN number in place. Push
the talk switch and say the correct PIN
number.” is heard and “PIN?” is displayed.

“Please push the talk switch and say a
four−digit PIN number.” is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number.

2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX
(new PIN number)”.
“The PIN number has been set. Returning
to the security.” is heard and “Completed”
is displayed.
If the current number is not correct, the
system may not function properly.

the talk switch and say “Phone
lock”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
until “Phbk Lock” is displayed and
the knob.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” is
displayed and push the knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard and “Locked” is displayed.
When using the knob:
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number. Push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob to set.
2. When the PIN number is set, push the
“AUDIO CTRL” knob.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now locked. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard and “Locked” is displayed.

228

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The system may not function in the following cases:

If the current number is not correct.
If the phone book has already been
locked.

If the PIN number does not exist.
To unlock the phone book
1. Push the talk switch and say “Phone
book unlock”, or turn the “AUDIO
CTRL” knob until “Phbk Unlock” is displayed and push the knob.
“Phonebook unlock. There is a PIN number in place. Push the talk switch and say
the correct PIN number.” is heard and
“Current PIN?” is displayed.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number.

When using a voice command:
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” is
displayed and push the knob.

The system may not function in the following cases:

If the current number is not correct.
If the phone book has already been
unlocked.

INFORMATION

“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is displayed.

A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available. Push the off−
hook switch and say either of the following:

When using the knob:

Phone book lock
Phone book unlock

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number. Push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob to set.
2. When the PIN number is set, push the
“AUDIO CTRL” knob.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“PIN number accepted. The phone book is
now unlocked. Returning to the main
menu.” is heard and “Unlocked” is displayed.

229

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—System Setup
The system setup menu includes the following:

Adjust Guidance Volume
Initialize
To enter the system setup menu
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Setup” is displayed and push the
knob.
3. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“System Setup” is displayed and push
the knob.
“System setup. Please select guidance
volume or initialize.” is heard.
To adjust the guidance volume
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Guidance Vol” is displayed and push
the knob.
“Guidance will be at this volume” is heard
and the present volume level is displayed.

—Phone Book
To initialize
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Initialize” is displayed and push the
knob.
“System initialization. This will erase all
user information in the hands free system;
including paired phones, phone book entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is
heard.
2. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“System initialization. This will erase all
user information in the hands free system;
including paired phones, phone book entries, and call history. Select confirm to
initialize. Otherwise, select go back.” is
heard.

The phone book menu includes the following:

Add Entry
Phone numbers and voice tags can be
registered.

Change Name
The registered names can be changed.

Delete Entry
The registered names can be deleted.

Delete Speed Dial
The registered speed dial can be deleted.

List Names
The registered names can be checked.

Set Speed Dial
Speed dials can be set.

3. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Initialized. Returning to the main menu.”
is heard.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to adjust
the volume and push the knob.

230

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To enter the phone book menu

To add entry

(a) By voice

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

The add entry includes the following:

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Phonebook” is displayed and push the
knob.

(b) By Phone

1. Push the talk switch and say “By
voice”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “By Voice” is displayed and push
the knob.

“Phone book. Please push the talk switch
and say add entry, change name, delete
entry, list names, set speed dial or delete
speed dial.” is heard.

Push the talk switch and say “Add entry”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Add
Entry” is displayed and push the knob.

If the phone book is locked, the system
may not function properly.

(a) By Voice
(c) Call History
(d) Manual Input

“Add Entry. How will the number be entered. Push the talk switch and say by
voice, by phone, or call history.” is heard.

“Voice entry. Push the talk switch and say
the number.” is heard.
2. Push the talk switch and say the dial
number that you want to register.
“To store, push the talk switch and say
confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or say go back, or delete.” is heard
and number is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions.

231

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If “Confirm” is said, then input a voice
tag.
“Push the talk switch and say a name.”
is heard.
1. Push the talk switch and say the name
of the dial number that you want to
register.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.

Confirm

(b) By Phone

Push the talk switch and say “Confirm”, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “By
phone”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “By Phone” is displayed and
push the knob.

“Returning to the phone book.” is heard.
Speed Dial
1. Push the talk switch and say “Set
speed dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “Speed Dial” is displayed
and push the knob.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

“Set speed dial. Push the preset button to
assign to XXXX” is heard.

“Stored. To register this as a speed dial
entry, push the talk switch and say set
speed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.” is
heard and “Stored” is displayed.

“preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.” is heard.

3. Select one of the following:

Confirm
Speed Dial

2. Push the desired preset button.

The system may not function in the following cases:

If the phone book is full.
If the dial number has more than 24
digits.

If the preset button has already been
assigned.

“Phone entry. Prepare to send the information from the phone. When ready, push
the talk switch and say confirm.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Send the information at this time.” is
heard.
After the system has received the name
and phone number, “Push the talk switch
and say confirm. To select an alternate
number, say next or previous. Otherwise,
say go back.” is heard and “XXX (name)”
and “XXX (number)” is displayed.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions,
push the talk switch and say “Confirm”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
the dial number that you want to register is displayed and push the knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 231.

232

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Outgoing

(d) Manual Input

1. Push
tory”,
until
push

the talk switch and say “Call hisor turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
“Call history” is displayed and
the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Outgoing”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Outgoing” is displayed and push
the knob.

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Manual Input” is displayed and push
the knob.

“Call history. Push the talk switch and say
incoming or outgoing.” is heard and “Call
History” is displayed.

“Most recent outgoing call was XXXX” is
heard and the outgoing number is displayed.

2. Select one of the following:

“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is
heard.

Incoming
Outgoing
Incoming
1. Push the talk switch and say “Incoming”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Incoming” is displayed and push
the knob.
“Most recent incoming call was XXXX” is
heard and the incoming number is displayed.
“Push the talk switch and say confirm.
Otherwise, say previous, or go back.” is
heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to register
is displayed and push the knob.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to register
is displayed and push the knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 231.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob to select
a number. Push the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob to set.
3. When the number is set, push the
“AUDIO CTRL” knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 231.

Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 231.

233

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Input operation—

Display: “995”

You say: “Nine, nine, five”

Repeating the above operation deletes
the last digits in reverse order of input.

Voice output: “995 to store push the
talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or
say go back, or delete.”
Display: “995”

Delete operation—
You say: “Delete”

To list names
The voice tags can be edited during the
name playback.
1. Push the talk switch and say “List
names”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “List Names” is displayed
and push the knob.

You say: “Seven, three, four”

Voice output: “Deleted. Push the talk
switch and say the number.”

Voice output: “734 to store push the
talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, continue adding numbers, or
say go back, or delete.”

Display: “Delete”

“List names. To select a name, push the
talk switch during the name playback.” is
heard.

The display will return to the initial
screen that allows a number to be
input.

“XXXX selected.” is heard and “Selected”
is displayed.

Display: “995734”
Repeat the above procedure until the
entire number that you want to register is input.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

If you push the off−hook switch during the
name playback, you can dial the number
of the selected name.

Go back operation—
You say: “Go back”
Voice output: “Go back. The last numbers said have been removed. Push
the talk switch and say the number.”

234

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Editing the voice tags

Delete Entry

To delete entry

The following can be performed:
Change Name

Push the talk switch and say “Delete
entry”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Delete Entry” is displayed and push
the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete
entry”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Delete Entry” is displayed and
push the knob.

Delete Entry

For further details, see page 235.

Speed Dial

Speed dial

“Delete entry. Push the talk switch and
say the name to delete.” is heard.

Push the talk switch and say “Set speed
dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Speed Dial” is displayed and push the
knob.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
name that you want to delete is displayed and push the knob.

For further details, see page 237.

When using a voice command:

Dial

“Push the talk switch and say dial, change
name, delete entry, or set speed dial.” is
heard and “Selected” is displayed.
Dial
Push the talk switch and say “Dial”, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Dial”
is displayed and push the knob.
Change Name
Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Change Name” is displayed and
push the knob.
For further details, see page 236.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.
Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn
the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Confirm” is
displayed and push the knob.
“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is
heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
When using the knob:
“Deleted. Returning to the phone book.” is
heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If no name has been registered.
If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

235

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To delete speed dial

To change name

When using a voice command:

1. Push the talk switch and say “Delete
speed dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “Del Spd Dial” is displayed
and push the knob.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Change
name”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob
until “Change Name” is displayed and
push the knob.

“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard
and “XXXX” is displayed.

“Delete speed dial. Push the preset button
to delete from speed dial.” is heard.

“Change name. Push the talk switch and
say the name to change.” is heard.

2. Select the preset button that you want
to delete.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to change is
displayed and push the knob.

“To delete preset... push the talk switch
and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.”
is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Deleted.” is heard and “Deleted” is displayed.
“Returning to the phone book.” is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If no speed dial has been registered.
If the preset button has not been as-

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Push the talk switch and say a new
name.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Rec
Name” is displayed, push the knob and
say “XXX (new name)”.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Name changed. Returning to the phone
book.” is heard and “Changed” is displayed.

signed.

236

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

When using the knob:

To set speed dial

When using a voice command:

“Push the talk switch and say a new
name.” is heard.

1. Push the talk switch and say “Set
Speed dial”, or turn the “AUDIO CTRL”
knob until “Speed Dial” is displayed
and push the knob.

“XXXX To register this as a speed dial
entry, push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, push the talk switch and
say go back.” is heard and “XXXX” is
displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until “Rec
Name” is displayed, push the knob and
say “XXX (new name)”.
“XXXX Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

“Set speed dial. Push the talk switch and
say a name.” is heard.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to register
is displayed and push the knob.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Push the preset
XXXX” is heard.

button

assign

2. Push the desired preset button.

“Name changed. Returning to the phone
book.” is heard and “Changed” is displayed.

“preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.” is heard.

The system may not function in the following cases:

“Push the preset
XXXX” is heard.

If no name has been registered.
If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

When using the knob:
button

assign

Push the desired preset button.
“preset... is now assigned. Returning to
the phone book.” is heard.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If no name has been registered.
If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

If the preset button has already been
assigned.

237

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Redial
The following can be performed:

Dial

A shortcut to each of the following
functions is available. Push the off−
hook switch and say one of the following:

Dial
Delete
Store

Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
number that you want to dial is displayed
and push the knob. After that, do the one
of the following:

To enter the redial

Phone book add entry
Phone book change name

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.

Phone book delete entry
Phone book delete speed dial

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Redial” is displayed and push the
knob.

Push the off−hook switch.
Push the talk switch and say “dial”.
Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until

INFORMATION

Phone book list names
Phone book set speed dial

“Redial. Most recent outgoing call was
XXXX” is heard and outgoing history is
displayed.
“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”
is heard.

“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
Delete
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to delete is
displayed and push the knob.
2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Delete” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Deleted.” is heard.

238

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Callback
Store
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to register
is displayed and push the knob.
2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Store” is displayed and push the knob.
“Store. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 231.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If there is no outgoing history.
If the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION
Up to five outgoing calls can be
stored in the system.
When five outgoing calls are stored
in memory, the oldest outgoing call
is deleted to make room in memory
for new calls.
Only the latest outgoing call is
stored when the same telephone
number is dialed.
A shortcut to “Redial” is available.
Push the off−hook switch and then
push the on−hook switch.

The following can be performed:

Dial
Delete
Store
To enter the callback
1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the
hands−free system on.
2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Callback” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Callback. Most recent incoming call was
XXXX” is heard and incoming history is
displayed.
“Please push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.”
is heard.

239

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Making a phone call
Dial

Store

Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
number that you want to dial is displayed
and push the knob. After that, do the one
of the following:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to register
is displayed and push the knob.

Push the off−hook switch.
Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
Delete
1. Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until the
dial number that you want to delete is
displayed and push the knob.
2. Push the talk switch and say “Delete”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Delete” is displayed and push the
knob.
“Delete. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say “Store”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Store” is displayed and push the knob.
“Store. Push the talk switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.” is heard.
3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or
turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Confirm” is displayed and push the
knob.
Next, input a voice tag.
For further details, see page 231.
The system may not function in the following cases:

If there is no incoming history.
If the phone book is locked.

If the cellular phone is not registered, this
system cannot be used. See page 221 for
registering a cellular phone. Make sure
that “BT” is displayed and get the cellular
phone ready to use.
There are 3 ways to make a phone call
with this system.

Speed dial
A phone call can be made with a preset
button in which a phone number is registered. See page 237 for setting the preset
buttons.

Dial by Name
The system dials the numbers corresponding to the spoken names registered in the
system.

Dial by Number
The system dials to the spoken numbers.
To make a phone call
Push the off−hook switch
hands−free system on.

turn the

“Deleted.” is heard.

240

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To speed dial

When using a voice command:

1. Push the preset button where the desired number is set. The name or telephone number is displayed.

“XXXX Push the off−hook switch to dial.
Otherwise, push the talk switch and say
dial, or go back.” is heard. After that, do
the one of the following:

2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.
To dial by Name
1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by
name”.
“Dial by name. Please push the talk
switch and say the stored name, or say
list names.” is heard and “Dial by Name”
is displayed.
2. Push the talk switch and say “XXXX”,
or turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
the phone name that you want to dial
is displayed and push the knob.

Push the off−hook switch.
Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
When using the knob:
It calls the number.
The system may not function in the following cases:

INFORMATION
The phone numbers registered in
the phone book can be retrieved.
The system does not recognize that
the voice tag is not registered in
the registered cellular phone. For
details about voice tags, see “Add
Entry” on page 231.
A shortcut to “Dial by name” is
available. Push the off−hook switch
and say “Dial XXX (name you want
to dial)”.

If there is no number registered in the
preset button.

If the system does not recognize the
voice command.

241

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

To dial by Number
1. Push the talk switch and say “Dial by
Number”.
“Dial by number. Please push the talk
switch and say the number.” is heard and
“Dial by Num” is displayed.
2. Push talk switch and say “XXXX”.
“Push the off−hook switch to dial. Otherwise, push the talk switch and say dial,
go back, or delete.” is heard.
To dial the number, do the one of the
following:

Push the off−hook switch.
Push the talk switch and say “Dial”.
Turn the “AUDIO CTRL” knob until
“Dial” is displayed and push the knob.
If the number exceeds 24 digits, the system may not function properly.

INFORMATION
The system can recognize single
digits from zero to nine. Numbers
that are ten or greater are not recognized.
To speed up input, it is a good idea
to group all digits into a continuous
string. However, you can enter each
digit individually or group digits together in preferred string lengths.
The display corresponding to each operation appears on the screen as follows:
Input operation—
You say: “Nine, nine, five”
Voice output: “995 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.”
Display: “995”
You say: “Seven, three, four”
Voice output: “734 push the off−hook
switch to dial. Otherwise, push the
talk switch and say dial, go back, or
delete.”

Display: “995734”
Repeat the above procedure until the
entire number that you want to dial is
input.
Go back operation—
You say: “Go back”
Voice output: “Go back, the
bers entered have been
Push the talk switch and
adding numbers otherwise
go back, or delete.”

last numremoved.
continue
say dial,

Display: “995”
Repeating the above operation deletes
the last digits in reverse order of input.
Delete operation—
You say: “Delete”
Voice output: “Deleted. The entire
number to dial has been deleted.
Please push the talk switch and say
the number.”
Display: “Dial by Num”
The display will return to the initial
screen that allows a number to be
input.

242

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Receiving a phone call
Cancel operation—
Do either one of the following:

Push the on−hook switch at anytime
during the operation.
Push the talk switch and say “Cancel” after the beep at anytime during the operation except while a call
is connected.

When receiving a phone call, a ring tone
is audible and the system changes into
the telephone mode.
When receiving a phone call, the display
is as follows. The display differs depending on whether or not the vehicle is in
motion.

To transfer a call to the phone:
The received call can be transferred from
the hands−free system to the cellular
phone that is connected to Bluetooth. For
details, refer to the user’s guide for the
cellular phone.

When the vehicle is stopped:
Number is displayed.
When the vehicle is in motion:
“Incoming” is displayed.
Do either one of the following:

Pushing the off−hook switch allows you
to talk on the phone.

Pushing the on−hook switch refuses
the call.
To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”
on the steering volume controls. Volume
adjustment cannot be done using the audio system.
Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steering
volume controls mutes the ring.
When receiving an international phone
call, the name of the party may not be
displayed correctly depending on the cellular phone.

243

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Talking on the phone
While talking on the phone, the display is
as follows. The display differs depending
on whether or not the vehicle is in motion.
When the vehicle is stopped:
Number is displayed.
When the vehicle is in motion:
“Talking” is displayed.
When the call is finished, push the on−
hook switch.

To transfer a call from the phone:
Pushing the off−hook switch while talking
on the cellular phone that is connected to
Bluetooth allows you to talk hands−free.
To transfer a call to the phone:
The call can be transferred from the
hands−free system to the phone that is
connected to Bluetooth. For details, refer
to the user’s guide for the cellular phone.

In the following situations, your voice may
not reach the party.

Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If you talk at the same
time, the voice may not reach each
other. (It is not a malfunction.)

Keep the volume of receiving voice
down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.
When you talk on the phone, speak
clearly towards the microphone.

When driving on a rough road.
When driving at high speeds.
When the window is open.
When the air conditioning vents face
the microphone.

When the sound of the air conditioning
fan is loud.

244

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 9

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Air conditioning system
Manual air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic air conditioning system
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air flow selector settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Climate remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Side and rear vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Air conditioning filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

246
249
249
252
257
257
260
261
262

245

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Manual air conditioning system—
—Controls
1. Fan speed selector
2. Temperature selector
3. Air flow selector
4. “A/C” button
5. Air intake selector

246

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.

Fan speed selector
Turn the knob to adjust the fan speed—to
the right to increase, to the left to decrease.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.

Temperature selector
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—
to the right to warm, to the left to cool.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the
windshield vents.

“MAX A/C” position—Turning the temperature selector knob to the “MAX A/C” position turns on the air conditioning and sets
the air intake selector to RECIRCULATE
for quick cooling.

Turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position turns on the defogging function with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Air flow selector
Turn the knob to select the vents used for
air flow.
1. Panel—Air flows mainly
instrument panel vents.

from

the

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents and the instrument panel vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.
4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.

In this position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically
to clean up the front view quickly. It is
not possible to return to RECIRCULATE
in this position.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” described below.

This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.

247

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

“A/C” button
To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.
If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

Air intake selector
Press the button to select the air source.
1. RECIRCULATE (indicator light is on)—
Recirculates the air inside the vehicle.
2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Draws
outside air into the system.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield,
the air intake mode may change automatically to FRESH depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.

248

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Air flow selector settings

—Operating tips
To cool off your Toyota after it has
been parked in the hot sun, drive with
the windows open for a few minutes.
This vents the hot air, allowing the air
conditioning to cool the interior more
quickly.

Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

When driving on dusty roads, close all
windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended
that the air intake selector be set to
FRESH and the fan speed selector to
any setting except “OFF”.

249

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If following another vehicle on a dusty
road, or driving in windy and dusty
conditions, it is recommended that the
air intake selector be temporarily set to
RECIRCULATE, which will close off the
outside passage and prevent outside
air and dust from entering the vehicle
interior.

Heating
For best results, set controls as follows:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

For quick heating, change the air intake selector mode to RECIRCULATE.
To keep the windows from fogging, return to FRESH mode after the vehicle
interior has been warmed.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

Turn the air flow selector to the floor/
windshield position to heat the vehicle
interior while defrosting or defogging
the windshield.

For quick cooling, turn the temperature
selector knob to the ”MAX A/C” position. The air conditioning will automatically turn on and the air intake selector
will be set to RECIRCULATE.

Air conditioning
For best results, set controls as follows:
Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

250

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Ventilation

Defogging

Defrosting

For best results, set controls as follows:

The inside of the windshield

The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls as follows:

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone) to heat;
COLD (blue zone) to
cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards WARM
(red zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Fan speed—Any setting except “OFF”
Temperature—Towards COLD
(blue zone)
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

Turning the air flow selector to the windshield position turns on the defogging
function with the purpose of clearing the
front view.
When turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air

Turning the air flow selector to the windshield position turns on the defrosting
function with the purpose of clearing the
front view.
When turning the air flow selector to the
windshield position, the air intake selector
mode changes to FRESH automatically to
clean up the front view quickly. It is not
possible to return to RECIRCULATE in
this position.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating. This setting clears the front view
more quickly.

To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.

choose

on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.

251

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Automatic air conditioning system—
—Controls
1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
on—individual setting on driver side
only)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
off—simultaneous setting on driver and
front passenger)
2. Fan speed selector
3. Air flow selector button
4. Temperature selector (“PASS TEMP”)
(individual setting on front passenger
side only)
5. “A/C” button
6. Air intake selector
7. Windshield air flow button
8. “OFF” button
9. “AUTO” button

252

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

“AUTO” button

“DUAL” button

—“PASS TEMP” knob

For automatic
tioning, press
“AUTO” button
the automatic
selected.

Push the button to change the mode of
the temperature setting.

This knob changes the temperature on the
front passenger side only.

With the indicator on—Individual temperature setting for driver and front passenger
With the indicator off—Simultaneous
temperature setting for driver and front
passenger

“OFF” button

operation of the air condithe “AUTO” button. The
will turn on, indicating that
operation mode has been

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.
When you press the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Fan speed selector
Push the “” (increase) or “” (decrease)
side of the button to adjust the fan speed.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to adjust the fan speed unless you desire
another fan speed mode.

Push the button to turn off the air conditioning system.

Temperature selectors
Turn the knob to adjust the temperature—to the right to warm, to the left to
cool.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
—“TEMP” knob
With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
knob changes the temperature on the driver side only.
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
knob changes the temperature on the driver side and front passenger side simultaneously. This function will be cancelled
when the “PASS TEMP” knob is turned.

253

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

4. Floor/Windshield—Air
flows
mainly
from the floor vents and windshield
vents.
This position allows the air intake to
select FRESH automatically. This is to
clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to
RECIRCULATE mode, press the air intake selector button once again.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears
the front view more quickly.
Air flow selector button
Push the button to select the vents used
for air flow.
In automatic operation, you do not have
to select the air flow unless you desire
another air flow mode.

Windshield air flow button
When this button is pressed, air flows
mainly from the windshield vents and
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
Pressing this button once again returns
the air flow mode to the last one used.
This button allows the air intake to select
FRESH automatically. This is to clean up
the front view more quickly. It is not possible to return to RECIRCULATE in this
mode.
Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.
For details about air flow selector settings,
see “—Air flow selector settings” described below.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the
instrument panel vents and the rear
vents.
2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor
vents, the instrument panel vents and
the rear vents.
3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor
vents.

254

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

“A/C” button

Plasmacluster TM∗

To turn on the air conditioning, press the
“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator
will come on. To turn the air conditioning
off, press the button again.

The Plasmacluster TM∗ helps to keep
good air quality in the cabin by emitting positive and negative ions into the
cabin.

If the “A/C” button indicator flashes, there
is a problem in the air conditioning system
and the air conditioning automatically
shuts off. If this happens, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer for service.

Operating the air conditioning system allows positive and negative ions to come
out from the driver’s side vent.
A low noise may be heard during operation. This is not a malfunction.
Static electricity may be discharged near
the driver’s side vent because high voltage is used to operate the system.

To clean the driver’s side vent, wipe the
vent using a soft cloth after turning the
system off.

CAUTION
Do not disassemble or repair the system because it contains high voltage
parts. Call your Toyota dealer if the
system needs repair.

255

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

NOTICE
Do not insert anything into the driver’s side vent, attach anything to it,
or use sprays around the driver’s side
vent. These things may cause the system not to work properly.
∗ : This system adopts the plasmacluster technology,
manufactured under license from SHARP Corporation.
“PlasmaclusterTM ” is a trademark of SHARP Corporation.

256

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Air flow selector settings

Make sure the air intake grilles in front
of the windshield are not blocked (by
leaves or snow, for example).

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield. The windshield could
fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside
of the windshield.

Keep the area under the front seats
clear to allow air to circulate throughout the vehicle.

On cold days, set the fan speed to
high for a minute to help clear the
intake ducts of snow or moisture. This
can reduce the amount of fogging on
the windows.

257

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Heating

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls as follows:

For automatic operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—To the desired
temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—ON
For manual operation—

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards WARM
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—FLOOR
Air conditioning—OFF

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards COLD
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—ON

For quick heating, select recirculated

For quick cooling, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the
windows from fogging, select fresh after the vehicle interior has been warmed.

air for a few minutes.

Press the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.

Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat
the vehicle interior while defrosting or
defogging the windshield.

258

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Ventilation

Defogging and defrosting

For best results, set controls as follows:

—The inside of the windshield

For automatic operation—

For best results, set controls as follows:

Press in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature—Towards low temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air conditioning—OFF
For manual operation—
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards COLD
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—PANEL
Air conditioning—OFF

—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
to heat; low temperature
to cool
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defogging function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
When pressing the windshield air flow button, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly. It is not possible to
return to RECIRCULATE in this mode.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

On humid days, do not blow cold air
on the windshield—the difference between the outside and inside temperatures could make the fogging worse.
—The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls as follows:
—For automatic operation
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
—For manual operation
Fan speed—To the desired fan speed
Temperature—Towards high temperature
Air intake—FRESH (outside air)
Air flow—WINDSHIELD
Pressing the windshield air flow button
turns on the defrosting function with the
purpose of clearing the front view.
When pressing the windshield air flow button, the air intake selects FRESH automatically. This is to clean up the front
view more quickly. It is not possible to
return to RECIRCULATE in this mode.

259

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Climate remote controls
(steering switches)
“AUTO” button

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified
heating or cooling. This setting clears the
front view more quickly.

For automatic
tioning, press
“AUTO” button
the automatic
selected.

To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting
the
windshield,
floor/windshield air flow.

choose

operation of the air condithe “AUTO” button. The
will turn on, indicating that
operation mode has been

In the automatic operation mode, the air
conditioning selects the most suitable fan
speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of
the air conditioning according to the temperature.

Some parts of the air conditioning system
can be adjusted using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls,
and features are described below.
1. Temperature selector (“TEMP”)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
on—individual setting on driver side
only)
(with “DUAL” button indicator
off—simultaneous setting on driver and
front passenger)
2. “AUTO” button
3. “OFF” button

When you press the “AUTO” button with
the air intake mode at FRESH, internal
circulation may be applied for maximum
cooling.
You may use manual controls if you want
to select your own settings.
Temperature selector
To increase the temperature, press the
“” side. To decrease it, press the “”
side.
“LO” appears when you adjust to maximum cooling, and “HI” appears when you
adjust to maximum warming.
With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side only.

260

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Side and rear vents
With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This
button changes the temperature on the
driver side and front passenger side simultaneously.

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check
the side and rear vents. The side and rear
vents may be opened or closed as shown.

This function will be cancelled when the
“PASS TEMP” knob on the instrument panel is turned.
“OFF” button
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air
conditioning system.

Side vents

Rear vents

261

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Checking and replacing the
air conditioning filter

Air conditioning filter—

The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter may need to be
replaced if the air flow of the air conditioning and heater experiences extreme
reductions in operating efficiency, or if
the windows begin to fog up easily in
FRESH mode.

The air conditioning filter information
label is placed inside of the glove box
as shown and indicates that a filter has
been installed.

The air conditioning filter is behind the
glove box.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,
inspect and replace the air conditioning
filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy
traffic flow, such as inner city or desert
areas, early replacement may be required.
(For scheduled maintenance information,
please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

The air conditioning filter prevents dust
from entering the vehicle through the air
conditioning vent.

262

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

1. Open the glove box, and slide off
the damper as shown.

2. Apply pressure to the glove box as
shown to disengage the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover while pushing in both ends of the cover.

263

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.
Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When inserting the filter in the filter
outlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION
The air filter should be installed properly in position. The use of air conditioning with the air filter removed
may cause deteriorated dustproof performance and then affect air conditioning performance.

264

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

1− 10

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND
CONTROLS
Other equipment
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Auxiliary boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Storage box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Grocery bag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

266
266
270
271
275
275
277
278
279
280
281
281
282
282
282

265

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Clock

Compass
Displays

Directions

N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW

North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest

The compass may not show the correct
direction in the following conditions:

The vehicle is stopped immediately afTo reset the hour: Push the “H” button.
To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

The direction is indicated on the inside
rear view mirror.

The ignition switch must be set at ACC
or ON position.

If the ignition switch was turned off with
the system on, the system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.

If the electrical power source has been
disconnected from the clock, the time display will automatically be set to 1:00 (one
o’clock).
When the instrument panel lights are
turned on, the brightness of the time indicator will be reduced.

Push the “AUTO” switch for longer than 3
seconds to turn the compass system on
and off.
The compass indicates the direction
that the vehicle is heading. In the
above case, it shows that the vehicle is
heading north.

ter turning.

The compass does not adjust while the
vehicle is stopped.

The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.

The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).

266

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a
magnet or a metal object on or near
the inside rear view mirror.)

The battery has been disconnected.
If your vehicle is out of the set zone,
refer to “CALIBRATING THE COMPASS”
below to set the zone number.
If the deviation is small, the compass
works to calibrate the direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.
For additional precision or for complete
calibrating,
see
“CALIBRATING
THE
COMPASS” below.

The compass sensor is in the inside
rear view mirror.

NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object
on or near the inside rear view mirror
of the vehicle. Doing this may cause
malfunction of the compass sensor.

CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (deviation
calibration)
The direction display on the compass
deviates from the true direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The
angle of deviation varies according to the
geographic position of the vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle,
then push and hold the switch until the
zone number appears on the display.
Then push the switch, referring to the following map to select the number of the
zone where the vehicle is.

267

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Samoa:

Guam:

Saipan:

After calibration, leaving the system for
several seconds returns it to the compass
mode.

CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.

Zone number

268

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Perform circling calibration just after
you have purchased your Toyota. And
then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or disconnected.

Do not perform circling calibration of
the compass in a place where the
earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking,
near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
CALIBRATING THE COMPASS (circling
calibration)
Sometimes the direction display on the
compass may not change after a turn. To
rectify this, stop the vehicle and push and
hold the switch until “C” appears on the
display.
If “C” appears on the display because of
a drastic change in the magnetic field,
perform circling calibration.

Drive the vehicle in a circle at 8 km/h (5
mph) or less. If there is not enough space
to drive in a circle, drive around the
block.

During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with
the calibration.

After driving 1 to 3 circles in the above
method, calibration is completed when the
direction is shown on the display.
If calibration cannot be performed because
of the magnetized vehicle etc., take your
vehicle to Toyota dealer.

269

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Power outlets
CAUTION

When doing the circling calibration,
be sure to secure a wide space,
and watch out for people and vehicles in the neighborhood. Do not
violate any local traffic rules while
performing circling calibration.

Do not adjust the display while the
vehicle is moving. Be sure to adjust
the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Front console

Center console (type B)

The power outlets are designed
power supply for car accessories.

for

The ignition switch must be set at ACC
or ON for the power outlet to be used.
Front console power outlet—Connected
cables can be passed through the hole to
the front passenger side of the auxiliary
box. For details, see “Auxiliary boxes” on
page 277 in this Section.

Center console (type A)

270

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Garage door opener
NOTICE

Buttons

To prevent the fuse from being
blown, do not use the electricity
over the total vehicle capacity of
12V/120W.

The HomeLink in your vehicle has 3
buttons and you can store one program
for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the
HomeLink, install a new battery in the
hand−held transmitter prior to programming.

To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not use the power
outlets longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
Close the power outlet lids when
the power outlets are not in use.
Inserting anything other than an appropriate plug that fits the outlet,
or allowing any liquid to get into
the outlet may cause electrical failure or short circuits.

(a) Programming the HomeLink

Indicator light

The garage door opener (
Universal Transceiver) is manufactured
under license from HomeLink and can
be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks,
home lighting systems, and security
systems, etc.

The battery side of the hand−held transmitter must be pointed away from the
HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure
in “Programming an entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons
you want to program.

271

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

HomeLink

25 to
75 mm
(1 to 3 in.)

Hand−held
garage
transmitter

2. Place your hand−held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.) away from
the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink
in view while programming.

3. Simultaneously press and hold the
hand−held garage transmitter button
along with the selected HomeLink button.
Do not release the buttons until step 4
has been completed.
4. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens
and closes.
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage transmitter is of the
“Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the rolling code feature if
the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after
2 seconds. If your garage transmitter is
the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.

272

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code”
equipped, it is necessary to follow
steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before
proceeding with the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
The exact location and color of the
button may vary by brand of garage
door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door
opener manufacturer for the location of
this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds
in which to initiate step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink button twice. The
garage door may open. If the door
does open, the programming process is
complete. If the door does not open,
press and release the button a third
time. This third press and release will
complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.

The ceiling mounted garage door opener
motor
should
now
recognize
the
HomeLink unit and be able activate the
garage door up/down.

6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by
pressing the newly programmed button.
Check to see if the gate/device operates correctly.

4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another rolling code system.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink button to program
another device.

Programming an entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian market

Programming other devices

HomeLink

1. Decide which of the 3
tons you want to program.

but-

2. Place
your
hand−held gate/device
transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to 3 in.)
away
from
the
surface
of
the
HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the
in view while programming.
3. Press
and
hold
HomeLink button.

the

HomeLink
selected

4. Continuously press and release (cycle)
the hand−held gate/device transmitter
button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the
HomeLink changes from a slow to a
rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can
release both buttons.

To program other devices such as home
security systems, home door locks or
lighting, contact your authorized Toyota
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be
erased, however, to reprogram a single
button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the
appropriate HomeLink button to activate
the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The
HomeLink continues to send the signal
for up to 20 seconds as long as the
button is pressed.

273

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Refer to HomeLink on the internet at:
WWW.HOMELINK.COM

CAUTION

When programming the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver, you may be
operating a garage door or other
device. Make sure people and objects are out of the way of the garage door or other device to prevent potential harm or damage.

Do not use this HomeLink UniverHomeLink

To erase all previously programmed codes
at one time, press and hold down the 2
outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase
the programs stored in the HomeLink
memory.
For additional programming assistance
with
your
HomeLink
Universal
Transceiver call the:

Toyota Customer Experience Center at

sal Transceiver with any garage
door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety standards.
(This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
April 1, 1982.) A garage door opener which cannot detect an object
(signaling the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current federal safety standards. Using a garage
door opener without these features
increases risk of serious injury or
death.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS−210 of the IC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been
tested and complies with FCC and IC
rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the
device.

1−800−331−4331 (U.S.A.)

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction
Centre at 1−888−869−6828 (Canada)

274

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Portable ashtray

Glove box
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, always completely close
the ashtray after use.

The ashtray can be removed and used
outside the vehicle. To use the ashtray,
raise the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching
fire. After using the ashtray, close the lid
completely.
The cup holder lid cannot be closed while
the ashtray is installed.
To detach the ashtray, pull it out.

To use the glove box:
Open by pulling the lever.
Lock by inserting the master key (vehicles
with key cylinder−type ignition switch) or
mechanical key (vehicles with smart key
system) and turning it clockwise.
Unlock by inserting the master key (vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch) or mechanical key (vehicles with
smart key system) and turning it counterclockwise.
With the instrument panel lights on, the
glove box light will come on when the
glove box is open.

275

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.

276

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Auxiliary boxes
To use the boxes, open it as shown the
illustration.
1. Driver’s side instrument panel
2. Overhead console
3. Front console
4. Center console (on some models)

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.

NOTICE
Overhead console box—During hot
weather, the interior of the vehicle
becomes very hot. Do not leave anything flammable or deformable such
as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.

277

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Rear console box
CABLE PASS−THROUGH
The auxiliary box of the front console is
provided with a hole that allows cables to
be passed into the cabin from the inside
power outlet and AUX adapter.
To open the hole, perform the following
procedure:
1. Remove the lid on the inside of the
auxiliary box.
2. From the inside of the auxiliary box,
push out and remove the outer lid.
Be careful not to lose the removed lids.

278

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Front cup holder
To open the console box, push the lock
release button and raise the console
box lid.
The upper tray slides forward/backward
and can be removed.

CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in
case of an accident or a sudden stop,
always keep the console box closed
while driving.
On some models—It is possible to use
the rear console box lid as an armrest
by moving it. To move it, grasp the
front of the lid and pull forward as
shown in the illustration.

Manual transmission models

When using the console box, return the lid
to its original position.

Automatic transmission models (type A)

279

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Rear cup holder
CAUTION

Do not place anything else other
than cups or drink−cans in the cup
holder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment
and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or in
an accident.

To reduce the chance of injury in

Automatic transmission models (type B)

case of an accident or sudden stop
while driving, keep the cup holder
closed when it is not in use.

Type A

The cup holder is designed for holding
cups or drink−cans securely. To use
them, open it as shown the illustration.
Automatic
transmission
models—The
adapter for front cup holder is detachable.
Replace it in its original position when
using the front cup holder. Otherwise the
drinks will not be held securely.

Type B

280

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Storage box

Grocery bag hooks

This box is designed to hold things like
a large−sized bottle.

This hook is designed to hang things
like grocery bags.

The cup holder is designed for holding
cups or drink−cans securely. To use it,
pull down the armrest.
Type B only—To use the cup holder, pull
the lid up.

CAUTION

Do not lift the armrest upright when
the cup holder is in use.

NOTICE
To prevent damage to the hook, avoid
hanging heavy loads on it.

281

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Cargo net

Rear sun shade

To secure belongings, hang the cargo
net on the hooks.

To raise the rear sun
tab of the shade and
anchors. To lower the
tab slightly to unhook
lower it slowly.

NOTICE
Do not use the net to secure sharp
or heavy objects. The net will tear
off.
Be sure not to twist the net when
hooking.

Floor mat

shade, pull
hook it on
shade, pull
the shade,

the
the
the
and

NOTICE

Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have
2 holes, then they are designed for use
with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to
the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock
the clips into the holes in the vehicle
carpet.

Observe the following, otherwise damage and/or failure may result:
Do not place anything where they
may hinder the opening/closing of
the shade.
Do not place things on the shade.

282

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION
Make sure the floor mat is properly
placed on the vehicle carpet. If the
floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an accident.

283

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

284

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR
TOYOTA
Information before driving your TOYOTA
Break−in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Three−way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Long reach iridium−tipped spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Your Toyota’s identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

286
286
288
288
289
290
291
292
292
293
297
297
299
299
300
310
310
313

285

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Break−in period

Fuel

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

FUEL TYPE

OCTANE RATING

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break−in. But following a few simple tips
for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add
to the future economy and long life of
your vehicle:

Your new vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.

Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your
Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.
The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will
not.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating or research octane number lower
than stated above will cause persistent
heavy knocking. If it is severe, this will
lead to engine damage.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use
should meet the specifications of ASTM
D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93
in Canada.

If you detect heavy knocking even when
using the recommended fuel, or if you
hear steady knocking while holding a
steady speed on level roads, consult your
Toyota dealer.

Avoid full throttle acceleration when
starting and driving.

Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first
300 km (200 miles).

Do not drive slowly with the manual
transmission in a high gear.

Do not drive for a long time at any
single speed, either fast or slow.

Do not tow a trailer during the first 800
km (500 miles).

NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of
leaded gasoline will cause the three−
way catalytic converter to lose its effectiveness and the emission control
system to function improperly. Also,
this can increase maintenance costs.

If your engine knocks...

However, occasionally, you may notice
light knocking for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.

286

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

GASOLINE
ADDITIVES

CONTAINING

DETERGENT

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline
that contains detergent additives to
avoid build−up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.
contains detergent additives to keep clean
and/or clean intake systems.
QUALITY GASOLINE
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,
Europe and Japan have developed a
specification for quality fuel named
World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that
is expected to be applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four categories
that depend on required emisvels. In
the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
The WWFC improves air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets,
and
customer
satisfaction
through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or MTBE is
available in many areas.

Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner
burning gasoline and appropriately blended
reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE
Toyota allows the use of oxygenate
blended gasoline where the oxygenate
content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your
Toyota, be sure that it has an octane
rating no lower than 87.
Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing methanol.

Toyota does not recommend the use of
gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
GASOLINE QUALITY
In a very few cases, you may experience
driveability problems caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability,
try changing gasoline brands. If this does
not rectify your problem, then consult your
Toyota dealer.

287

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than
stated above. It will cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If driveability problems are encountered (poor hot starting, vaporizing,
engine knock, etc.), discontinue the
use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling. Gasohol may cause
paint damage.
FUEL TANK CAPACITY
70 L (18.5 gal., 15.4 Imp. gal.)

Fuel pump shut off system

Operation in foreign countries

The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the engine to minimize the
risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls
or an airbag inflates upon collision. To
restart the engine after the fuel pump shut
off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to ACC or off once and start it.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in
another country...
First, comply with the vehicle registration
laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded and minimum octane
number).

CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle
before restarting the engine. If you
find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it indicates the fuel system
has been damaged and it is in need
of repair. In this case, do not restart
the engine.

288

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Three−way catalytic converters
The three−way catalytic converter is an
emission control device installed in the
exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the
exhaust gas.

CAUTION

Keep people and combustible materials away from the exhaust pipe
while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

Do not drive, idle or park your vehicle over anything that may burn
easily such as grass, leaves, paper
or rags.

NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases
flowing into the three−way catalytic
converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent
this and other damage, observe the
following precautions:
Use only unleaded gasoline.
Do not drive with an extremely low
fuel level; running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, creating an excessive load on the three−
way catalytic converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at
idle speed for more than 20 minutes.
Avoid racing the engine.
Do not push−start or pull−start your
vehicle.
Do not turn off the ignition while
the vehicle is moving.

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

289

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Engine exhaust cautions
Keep your engine in good running
order. Malfunctions in the engine
electrical system, electronic ignition
system/distributor ignition system
or fuel system could cause an extremely high three−way catalytic
converter temperature.

CAUTION

Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust.
It contains carbon monoxide, which
is a colorless and odorless gas. It
can cause unconsciousness or even
death.

If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, take your
vehicle in for a check−up as soon
as possible. Remember, your Toyota
dealer knows your vehicle and its
three−way catalytic converter system best.

Make sure the exhaust system has

To ensure that the three−way catalytic converter and the entire emission control system operate properly, your vehicle must receive the
periodic inspections required by the
Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information,
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Do not run the engine in a garage

no holes or loose connections. The
system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something,
or notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust, have the system
checked immediately.
or enclosed area except for the
time needed to drive the vehicle in
or out. The exhaust gases cannot
escape, making this a particularly
dangerous situation.

Keep the trunk lid closed while
driving. An open or unsealed trunk
lid may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.

To allow proper operation of your
vehicle’s ventilation system, keep
the inlet grilles in front of the windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you smell exhaust fumes in the
vehicle, open the windows and
close the trunk lid to ensure plenty
of fresh air enters the vehicle. If
you can smell exhaust fumes even
though there are no other vehicles
in the surrounding area, have your
vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer. Continued inhalation of exhaust fumes can lead to death by
gas poisoning.

Do not remain for a long time in a
parked vehicle with the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however,
do so only in an unconfined area
and adjust the heating or cooling
system to force outside air into the
vehicle.

290

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Facts about engine oil
consumption
FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL
Engine oil has the primary functions of
lubricating and cooling the inside of the
engine, and plays a major role in maintaining the engine in proper working order.
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil during normal
engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as
follows.

Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil
is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder.
High negative pressure generated when
the vehicle is decelerating sucks some
of this oil into the combustion chamber.
This oil as well as some part of the oil
film left on the cylinder wall is burned
by the high temperature combustion
gases during the combustion process.

Oil is also used to lubricate the stems
of the intake valves. Some of this oil
is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is
burned along with the fuel. High temperature exhaust gases also burn the
oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve
stems.
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the viscosity of the oil, the
quality of the oil and the conditions the
vehicle is driven under.
More oil is consumed by high−speed driving and frequent acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since
its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls
have not become conditioned.

When judging the amount of oil consumption, note that the oil may become
diluted and make it difficult to judge
the true level accurately.
As an example, if a vehicle is used for
repeated short trips, and consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not
show any drop in the oil level at all, even
after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This
is because the oil is gradually becoming
diluted with fuel or moisture, making it
appear that the oil level has not changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out
when the vehicle is then driven at high
speeds, as on an express way, making it
appear that oil is excessively consumed
after driving at high speeds.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000
km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600
miles)

291

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Iridium−tipped spark plugs
(2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−FE]
engine)

Long reach iridium−tipped
spark plugs
(3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine)

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHECK
One of the most important points in proper vehicle maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so that oil
function will not be impaired. Therefore, it
is essential that the oil level be checked
regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil
level be checked every time you refuel
the vehicle.

Long reach
type

NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly
could lead to serious engine trouble
due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check,
see “Checking the engine oil level” on
page 380 in Section 7−2.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped
spark plugs.

Your engine is fitted with long reach
iridium−tipped spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.
Do not adjust gaps for engine performance or smooth driveability.

Use only Toyota genuine long reach
iridium−tipped spark plugs and do not
adjust gaps for your engine performance and smooth driveability.
For details about the spark plug type, see
“Service specifications” on page 407 in
Section 8.

292

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Brake system
The tandem master cylinder brake system
is a hydraulic system with two separate
sub−systems. If either sub−system should
fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your
stopping distance will increase. Also, the
brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a
single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
BRAKE BOOSTER
The brake booster uses engine vacuum to
power−assist the brakes. If the engine
should quit while you are driving, you can
bring the vehicle to a stop with normal
pedal pressure. There is enough reserved
vacuum for one or two stops—but no
more!

CAUTION

Do not pump the brake pedal if the
engine stalls. Each push on the
pedal uses up your reserved vacuum.

Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes will still
work. But you will have to push the
pedal hard, much harder than normal. And your braking distance will
increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
The anti−lock brake system is designed
to help prevent lock−up of the wheels
during a sudden braking or braking on
slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance of the vehicle under
these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake
pedal: When the anti−lock brake system
function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.
In this situation, to let the anti−lock
brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not
pump the brake in a panic stop. This
will result in reduced braking performance.
The anti−lock brake system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated
to a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

293

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery
road surfaces such as on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site,
joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day
tends to activate the anti−lock brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in
the engine compartment for a few seconds
when the engine is started or just after
the vehicle begins to move. This means
that the anti−lock brake system is in the
self−check mode, and does not indicate a
malfunction.
When the anti−lock brake system is activated, the following conditions may
occur. They do not indicate a malfunction of the system:

You may hear the anti−lock brake system operating and feel the brake pedal
pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle body and steering wheel. You
may also hear the motor sound in the
engine compartment even after the vehicle is stopped.

At the end of the anti−lock brake system activation, the brake pedal may
move a little forward.

CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti−lock
brake system: Although the anti−lock
brake system assists in providing vehicle control, it is still important to
drive with all due care and maintain
a moderate speed and safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you, because there are limits to the vehicle
stability and effectiveness of steering
wheel operation even with the anti−
lock brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its
capability, or if hydroplaning occurs
during high speed driving in the rain,
the anti−lock brake system does not
provide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not designed to shorten the stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate
speed and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you.
Compared with vehicles without an
anti−lock brake system, your vehicle
may require a longer stopping distance in the following cases:

Driving on rough, gravel or snow−
covered roads.

Driving with tire chains installed.
Driving over the steps such as the
joints on the road.

Driving on roads where the road
surface is pitted or has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at
appropriate pressure: The anti−lock
brake system detects vehicle speeds
using the speed sensors for respective wheels’ turning speeds. The use
of tires other than specified may fail
to detect the accurate turning speed
resulting in a longer stopping distance.

294

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

“ABS” warning light
Without vehicle stability control system—
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system works properly, the light turns off
after a few seconds. Thereafter, if the
system malfunctions, the light comes on
again.

For the U.S.A.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate,
but the brake system still operates conventionally.

If either of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
somewhere in the parts monitored by
the warning light. Contact your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible to service
the vehicle.

The light does not come on when the
ignition switch is set at ON, or remains
on.

The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

For Canada

295

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

With vehicle stability control system—
The light comes on when the ignition
switch is set at ON. If the anti−lock brake
system and the brake assist system work
properly, the light turns off after a few
seconds. Thereafter, if the system malfunctions, the light comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system, the brake assist
system, the traction control system and
the vehicle stability control system do not
operate, but the brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and
the brake system warning light is off), the
anti−lock brake system does not operate
so that the wheels could lock up during
a sudden braking or braking on slippery
road surfaces.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE
SYSTEM

The light does not come on when the

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type
parking brake system. This type of brake
system needs bedding−down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking
brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

ignition switch is set at ON, or remains
on.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding−down.

The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during
operation does not indicate a problem.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM
When you slam the brakes on, the
brake assist system judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold
down the brake pedal firmly.
Without vehicle stability control system—
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound behind the brake
pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.
With vehicle stability control system—
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be applied. At this time,
you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the
brake pedal. This does not indicate a malfunction.

296

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Brake pad wear limit
indicators

Your Toyota’s identification—
—Vehicle identification
number

The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle has accelerated to
a speed in excess of approximately 10
km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the
vehicle decelerates to a speed below
approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “Service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers” on page 146 in Section 1−6.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on
your disc brakes give a warning noise
when the brake pads are worn to where
replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise
while driving, have the brake pads
checked and replaced by your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the pads are not
replaced when necessary.

The vehicle identification number (VIN)
is the legal identifier for your vehicle.
This number is on the left top of the
instrument panel, and can be seen
through the windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number
for your Toyota. It is used in registering
the ownership of your vehicle.

297

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the
engine block as shown.

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is
also on the Certification Label.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

298

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Theft prevention labels
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are approximately 47
mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce
the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from
stolen vehicles. The label is designed so
that once it is applied to a surface, any
attempt to remove it will result in destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring
these labels intact from one part to another, will be impossible.

Suspension and chassis
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension/chassis
with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It
can cause dangerous vehicle handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of
control.

NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the
theft prevention labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.

299

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tire information—
—Tire symbols (standard tire)
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 304.
2. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 303.
3. Uniform
tire
quality
grading—For details, see “Uniform
tire quality grading” that follows.
4. The location of the tread wear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 388.
5. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
6. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

300

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

7. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
8. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 388.
9. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 411.
10.Summer tire or all season
tire—An all season tire has “M+S”
on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer
tire. For details, see “Types of
tires” on page 313.

301

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Tire symbols (compact spare tire)
This illustration indicates typical tire
symbols.
1. “TEMPORARY USE ONLY”—A
compact spare tire is identified by
the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall.
This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only. For details,
see “Compact spare tire” on page
344.
2. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire
size” on page 304.
3. DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)—For details, see
“—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)” on page 303.
4. The location of the tread wear
indicators—For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on
page 388.
5. Load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure—For details,
see “Checking and replacing tires”
on page 388.

302

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—DOT and Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
6. Maximum cold tire inflation
pressure—This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated. For details about recommended
cold
tire
inflation
pressure, see “Tires” on page 411.
7. Tire ply composition and materials—Plies mean a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies
in the tire.
8. “TUBELESS”
or
“TUBE
TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not
have a tube inside the tire and air
is directly filled in the tire. A tube
type tire has a tube inside the tire
and the tube maintains the air
pressure.
9. Radial tires or bias−ply tires—A
radial tire has “RADIAL” on the
sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the
tire conforms to applicable Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

This illustration indicates typical DOT
and Tire Identification Number (TIN).
1. “DOT” symbol
2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3. Tire manufacturer’s identification
mark
4. Tire size code
5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type
code (3 or 4 letters)
6. Manufacturing week
7. Manufacturing year

303

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Tire size

This illustration indicates typical tire
size.
1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,
T=Temporary use)
2. Section width (in millimeters)
3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section
width)
4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,
D=Diagonal)
5. Wheel diameter (in inches)
6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one
letter)

—Name of each section of tire

1. Section width
2. Tire height
3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead
2. Sidewall
3. Shoulder
4. Tread
5. Belt
6. Inner liner
7. Reinforcing rubber
8. Carcass
9. Rim lines
10.Bead wires
11. Chafer

304

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared
in accordance with regulations issued
by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides
the purchasers and/or prospective
purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer
any questions you may have as you
read this information.
DOT quality grades—All passenger
vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality
grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear
200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear
one and a half (1−1/2) times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance
of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences
in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction
grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C, and they represent
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned
to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning)
traction.

305

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Temperature A, B, C—The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test
wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No.109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grades for
this tire are established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.

306

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term

Meaning

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be
replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items
are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile
under that condition

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
tire or
(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular
side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Maximum inflation pressure

the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it
is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the
(a)
(b)
((c))
(d)

sum of—
curb weight;
weight
accessory weight;
weight
vehicle capacity
y weight;
g
and
production
d ti
options
ti
weight
i ht

307

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tire related term

Meaning

Normal occupant weight

68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second
column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution

distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table
1 that follows

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing
over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,
not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special
trim

Recommended inflation pressure

cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Rim

a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter)

nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation

rim diameter and width

Rim type designation

the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width

nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight
(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

308

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tire related term

Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle
its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side

the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities
Designated seating capacity,
number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of
occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally
loaded vehicle

2 through 4

2 in front

5 through 10

2 in front, 1 in second seat

309

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Vehicle load limits
Vehicle load limits include total load
capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow the
load limits shown below. Total load capacity and seating capacity are also
described on the tire and loading information label. For location of the tire
and loading information label, see
“Checking tire inflation pressure” on
page 385.
Total load capacity:
410 kg (900 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage. Tongue load is included when trailer towing.
Seating capacity:
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 68 kg
(150 lb.) per person. Depending on
the weight of each person, the seating capacity given may exceed the
total load capacity.

NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants
are within the seating capacity,
do not exceed the total load capacity.
Towing capacity:
453 kg (1000 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo weight) that
your vehicle is able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the size (weight)
and the number of occupants. For details, see “Capacity and distribution”
that follows.

Cargo and luggage—
—Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in
the vehicle, observe the following:
Put cargo and luggage in the trunk
when at all possible. Be sure all
items are secured in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle balanced. Locating the weight as far
forward as possible helps maintain
balance.
For better fuel economy, do not
carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than
each load limit. That may cause
not only damage to the tires, but
also deterioration to the steering
ability and braking ability, which
may cause an accident.

310

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Capacity and distribution
CAUTION
To prevent cargo and luggage
from sliding forward during
braking, do not stack anything
in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close
to the floor as possible.
Vehicles with fold−down type
rear seat—Never allow anyone
to ride in the enlarged trunk.
It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their
seats with their seat belts properly fastened. Otherwise, they
are much more likely to suffer
death or serious bodily injury,
in the event of sudden braking
or a collision.
Do not place anything on the
package tray behind the rear
seatback. Such items may be
thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.

Do not drive with objects left
on top of the instrument panel.
They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they
may move during sharp vehicle
acceleration or turning, and impair the driver’s control of the
vehicle. In an accident they
may injure the vehicle occupants.

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s
placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.

311

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is
650
lbs.
(1400–750
(5x150)=650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
of your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see
page 327.

Cargo
capacity
Total load
capacity
EXAMPLE ON YOUR VEHICLE
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are
riding in your vehicle with the total
load capacity of 410 kg (900 lb.), the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be as follows:
410 kg – 166 kg = 244 kg.
(900 lb. – 366 lb. = 534 lb.)

From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of 176
kg (388 lb.) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced
as follows:
244 kg – 176 kg = 68 kg.
(534 lb. – 388 lb. = 146 lb.)
As shown in the above example, if the
number of occupants increases, the
cargo and luggage load equaling the
combined weight of occupants who
got on later must be reduced. In other
words, if the increase in the number
of occupants causes the excess of
the total load capacity (combined
weight of occupants plus cargo and
luggage load), you have to reduce the
cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity,
see “Vehicle load limits” on page 310.

312

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Types of tires
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and the cargo load
is less than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That may cause not only damage to the tire but also deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing
an accident.

Determine what kind of tires your
vehicle is originally equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high−speed capability tires best suited to highway driving
under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the
same traction performance as snow
tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow−covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow−covered or icy
roads, we recommend using snow
tires. If installing snow tires, be sure
to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be
adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year
round.

All season tires, however, do not have
adequate
traction
performance
compared with snow tires in heavy or
loose snow. Also, all season tires fall
short in acceleration and handling
performance compared with summer
tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish
summer tires from all season tires are
described on page 300.
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on your vehicle as
this can cause dangerous handling characteristics, resulting
in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s
designated
tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different
from the originally equipped
tires and wheels.

313

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

314

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving and parking using smart key system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . .

316
316
320
323
324
325
327
332

315

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

How to start the engine—
—Cranking hold function
Before starting the engine

(vehicle with smart key system)

(a) Before cranking

1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.

Once you press “ENGINE START STOP”
switch (engine switch) and release it, the
cranking hold function continues to crank
the engine until it starts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,
seat cushion height, head restraint
height, steering wheel angle and length.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view
mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.

The function stops cranking the engine
after about 25 seconds maximum if the
engine has not started yet. When you
crank the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
If you press and hold the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch, the function will
keep cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Manual transmission: Press the clutch
pedal to the floor and shift the transmission into neutral. Hold the clutch
pedal to the floor until the engine is
started. A starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if the
clutch pedal is not fully depressed.
Automatic transmission: Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, put the selector lever in “N”.
A starter safety device will prevent the
starter from operating if the selector
lever is in any drive position.
4. Automatic transmission only: Depress the brake pedal and hold it to
the floor until driving off.

316

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(b) Starting the engine
(with key cylinder−type
ignition switch)
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start
a cold or hot engine as follows:

(b) Starting the engine
(with smart key system)
NOTICE
Do not crank for more than 30 seconds at a time. This may overheat
the starter and wiring systems.
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,
crank the engine by turning the key to
“START”. Release it when the engine
starts.
Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page
336 in Section 4.

PUSH BUTTON START FUNCTION
The engine can be started by pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in “(a) Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system in your
engine automatically controls the proper
air−fuel mixture for starting.
You can start a cold or hot engine as
follows:
When the key is in the vehicle (on your
person), it is possible to start the engine.

317

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

There are instances in which the en-

With the brake pedal firmly depressed, the
indicator light on the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch will turn green. Check that
the automatic transmission selector lever
is in the “P” position. Pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch once
starts the engine.

gine will not start, even if the key is
in the vehicle (e.g. on the floor, in the
cup holder or glove box).
When the push button start function
does not operate properly, the following
may be causes:

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
slowly and firmly.

The key battery may be discharged if

Engine should be warmed up by driving,
not in idle. For warming up, drive with
smoothly turning engine until engine coolant temperature is within normal range.

You can start the engine by touching
the Toyota logo side of the electronic
key to the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch. For details, see “Smart key
system” on page 30 in Section 1−2.

the electronic key does not work.

If the engine stalls...

If the engine will not start...

Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal starting.

In the following cases, the engine will not
start.

If a buzzer sounds from the vehicle,
and the “KEY IS NOT DETECTED”
message appears on the multi−information display and the master warning
light comes on when pressing the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch, this
indicates that the key is not in the
vehicle.

Replace the key battery as soon as
possible. (See “—Replacing battery” on
page 28 in Section 1−2.)

The engine was repeatedly turned on
and off over a short period.
Wait 10 seconds and then start the
engine.

If the key is placed in the trunk, the
engine cannot be started.

318

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If the amber indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashes,
and the “CHECK S/T LOCK” message
appears on the multi−information display and the master warning light
comes on, there is a problem in the
steering lock function.
Contact your Toyota dealer, and have
your vehicle and all keys inspected.

If the amber indicator light on the

If the green indicator light on the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashes,
and the “S/T IS NOT UNLOCKED”
message appears on the multi−information display and the master warning
light comes on, the steering wheel is
locked.
To free it, rotate the steering wheel
slightly while pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch.

“ENGINE START STOP” switch flashes,
and no message appears on the multi−
information display, there is a problem
in the push button start function.
Contact your Toyota dealer, and have
your vehicle and all keys inspected.

In addition to the above, there are

When the battery is disconnected or
run down, the push button start function
memorizes the current mode. After you
reconnect, replace, or recharge the battery, the memorized mode is selected automatically. In any of these cases, turn off
the engine if the engine comes on.
Wait 10 seconds to start the engine after
the battery has been reconnected. The
engine may not start on the first try. This
does not indicate a malfunction.

NOTICE
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to
start or stalls frequently, have the
engine checked immediately.

instances in which the smart key system does not operate properly because
of the circumstances of use. For details, see “Smart key system” on page
30 in Section 1−2.
In cases other than those described
above, it is possible that a problem has
occurred in an area other than the start
system. See “If your vehicle will not start”
on page 336 in Section 4.

319

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Driving and parking using
smart key system
If the warning light is still lit when the key
is in the vehicle, the key battery is discharged. Check that the indicator light on
the key comes on by pushing the lock
button on the key. When the indicator light
does not come on, change the key battery
so that smart key system works properly.

TIPS FOR USING SMART KEY SYSTEM
When using the smart key system, it is
possible to start or stop the engine as
long as the key is on your person.
For this reason, it is possible that a passenger may remove the key from the vehicle without the driver being aware of the
fact. In such a case, it is not possible to
restart the engine after having turned it
off. In addition, it is possible that one may
get out of the vehicle without being aware
that the ignition switch has not been
turned off completely.
When driving or getting in or out of the
vehicle, drivers should make sure that
they are carrying the key.

(B) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster, accompanied
by three warning sounds from the
vehicle when the driver gets out of
the vehicle and closes the door
Master warning light and multi−information display

SYSTEM FUNCTION REMINDERS

CAUTION
Do not touch the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch (engine switch) while
driving.
If you have to make an emergency stop,
press and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.

Follow the instructions described below if
any of the following warnings occur:
(A) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster when the ignition switch is turned on
This indicates that the driver has gotten
into the vehicle without the key. The “KEY
IS NOT DETECTED” message will also
appear on the multi−information display
and the master warning light will come on.

This indicates that the driver is attempting
to leave the vehicle carrying the key with
ignition switch not set at OFF although the
transmission selector lever has been set
in the “P” position. The “KEY IS NOT
DETECTED” message will also appears on
the multi−information display and the master warning light will come on.
Get out of the vehicle only after turning
off the engine by pressing the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch and checking that
the ignition switch indicator light has gone
off. If the driver returns to the vehicle
without carrying the key and begins driving, a warning buzzer will sound once
more.

Operate the ignition switch only after taking care that the key is in the vehicle.

320

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(D) A warning buzzer sounds continuously from the instrument cluster
when opening the driver’s door

This indicates that the driver is attempting
to lock the doors while carrying the key,
neglecting to follow the instructions for
case (B) above.

This indicates that the transmission selector lever is in a position other than “P”
and that the ignition switch is not set at
OFF. The “SHIFT TO P RANGE” message
will also appears on the multi−information
display.

Lock the doors only after turning off the
engine by pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch and checking that the ignition switch indicator light has gone off.
A warning buzzer that sounds even though
the engine has been turned off indicates
that driver is attempting to lock the vehicle with the keys still in the vehicle.
Leave the vehicle only after making sure
that you are carrying the key.

Get out of the vehicle only after setting
the transmission selector lever in the “P”
position, turning off the engine by pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and
checking that the ignition switch indicator
light has gone off.

(E) A warning buzzer sounds continuously from the instrument cluster
and from the vehicle when closing
the door after getting out of the vehicle
This indicates that the driver is attempting
to leave the vehicle carrying the key, neglecting to follow the instructions for case
(D) above. The messages, “SHIFT TO P
RANGE” and “KEY IS NOT DETECTED”,
will also appear alternately on the multi−
information display and the master warning light will come on.
Get out of the vehicle only after setting
the transmission selector lever in the “P”
position, turning off the engine by pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch and
checking that the ignition switch indicator
light has gone off.

321

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(F) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster and three
times from the vehicle when a passenger is getting out of the vehicle
This indicates that the passenger is attempting to leave the vehicle carrying the
key, without the ignition switch set at OFF.
The “KEY IS NOT DETECTED” message
will also appear on the multi−information
display and the master warning light will
come on.
When passengers get out of the vehicle,
care should be taken to leave the key
with the driver. If the driver begins driving
after a passenger gets out of the vehicle
carrying the key, a warning buzzer will
sound once more.
(G) A warning buzzer sounds from the
vehicle for two seconds when locking the vehicle from the outside with
the door handle switch
This indicates that the driver is attempting
to lock the door with the key still in the
vehicle.

(H) A warning buzzer sounds once from
the instrument cluster when turning
off the ignition switch
This indicates that the key battery is low.
(This warning buzzer sounds only when
the engine has been on or the ignition
switch has been set at ON for 20 minutes
or more.) The “LOW KEY BATTERY” message will also appear on the multi−information display.
Change the key battery ahead of time in
order to ensure that the smart key system
properly.
(I) A warning buzzer sounds repeatedly
from the instrument cluster when
opening the driver’s door with the
ignition switch turned off
This indicates that the steering wheel is
not locked. Turn the engine off and then
open the door in order to lock the steering
wheel.

(J) The “ENGINE START STOP” switch
flashes green once every second
This indicates that the steering lock is
stuck. The “S/T IS NOT UNLOCKED”
message will also appear on the multi−information display.
To free it, rotate the steering wheel slightly while pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
(K) The “ENGINE START STOP” switch
flashes amber once every 2 seconds
When “CHECK S/T LOCK” is displayed on
the multi−information display—
This indicates a problem with the steering
lock function. Have your vehicle checked
at your Toyota dealer.
When no message is displayed on the
multi−information display—
This indicates a problem with the push
button start function. Have your vehicle
checked at your Toyota dealer.

Leave the vehicle only after making sure
that you are carrying the key.

322

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

THEFT PREVENTION FUNCTION

When the engine is turned off, the engine immobilizer system is automatically set. (See “Engine immobilizer system” on page 18 in Section 1−2.)

When the driver’s door is opened after
turning off the engine,
wheel will lock.

the steering

When the vehicle’s battery is discharged, the steering lock function may
not operate properly.

Tips for driving in various
conditions
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds.
This will allow you much better control.

Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle. Avoid driving
onto high, sharp−edged objects and
other road hazards. Failure to do so
can lead to severe tire damage such
as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps
or travelling on a bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.

When parking on a hill, turn the front
wheels until they touch the curb so
that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the
parking brake, and place the transmission in “P” (automatic) or in first or
reverse (manual). If necessary, block
the wheels.

Washing your vehicle or driving through
deep water may get the brakes wet. To
see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you, and then
press the pedal lightly. If you do not
feel a normal braking force, the brakes
are probably wet. To dry them, drive
the vehicle cautiously while lightly
pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake applied. If they still do not
work safely, pull to the side of the road
and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

Before driving off, make sure that
the parking brake is fully released
and the parking brake reminder
light is off.

Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving. It can cause
dangerous overheating, needless
wear, and poor fuel economy.

To drive down a long or steep hill,
reduce your speed and downshift.
Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and
not work properly.

323

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Winter driving tips
Be careful when accelerating, upshifting, downshifting or braking on
a slippery surface. Sudden acceleration or engine braking could cause
the vehicle to skid or spin.

Do not drive in excess of the speed
limit. Even if the legal speed limit
permits it, do not drive over 140
km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle
has high−speed capability tires.
Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control
and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle
are high−speed capability tires or
not before driving at such speeds.

Do not continue normal driving
when the brakes are wet. If they are
wet, your vehicle will require a
longer stopping distance, and it
may pull to one side when the
brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will not hold the vehicle
securely.

Make sure your coolant is properly protected against freezing.

Check the condition of the battery and
cables.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of
any battery, so it must be in top shape
to provide enough power for winter starting. Section 7−3 tells you how to visually
inspect the battery. Your Toyota dealer
and most service stations will be pleased
to check the level of charge.

See “Checking the engine coolant level”
on page 382 in Section 7−2 for details of
coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35C
(−31F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42C
(−44F).

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is
suitable for the cold weather.
See page 381 in Section 7−2 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy summer oil in your vehicle during winter
months may cause harder starting. If you
are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Toyota dealer—they will be pleased
to help.
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the
locks to keep them from freezing.

NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.

324

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Dinghy towing
(with automatic transmission)
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Toyota
dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow
the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.

Depending on where you are driving,
we recommend you carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the
vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,
bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
Do not use your parking brake when
there is a possibility it could freeze.
When parking, put the transmission into
“P” (automatic) or into first or reverse
(manual) and block the rear wheels. Do
not use the parking brake, or snow or
water accumulated in and around the
parking brake mechanism may freeze,
making it hard to release.

Your vehicle is not designed to be
dinghy towed (with four wheels on the
ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four
wheels on the ground. This may
cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating
under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders
can make steering difficult. During bad
winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.

325

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Dinghy towing
(with manual transmission)
DINGHY TOWING TIPS
Before dinghy towing, be sure to observe the following in order to reduce
the damage to your vehicle.
1. Put the shift lever in neutral.
2. Set the ignition switch at ACC. Make
sure the audio is turned off and any
item is not plugged into the power outlet.

NOTICE

Your vehicle can be dinghy towed (with
four wheels on the ground) from the
front behind a motorhome.

CAUTION

To avoid the locking of the steering
wheel, set the ignition switch at ACC.

NOTICE
3. Release the parking brake.
After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for
more than 3 minutes before driving the
vehicle.

Do not tow your vehicle from the
rear. This may cause serious damage
to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing requires special equipment and accessories. Please refer to
your service outlet of the motorhome
manufacture for the recommended
equipment.

NOTICE
Dinghy towing does not eliminate the
possibility of damage to your vehicle.

326

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Trailer towing
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a
passenger−carrying vehicle. Towing a
trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability
and driving economy (fuel consumption,
etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend
on the proper use of correct equipment
and cautious driving habits. For your
safety and the safety of others, you must
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyota
warranties do not apply to damage or
malfunction caused by towing a trailer for
commercial purposes. Ask your local
Toyota dealer for further details before
towing.

NOTICE
When towing a trailer, be sure to consult your Toyota dealer for further information on additional requirements
such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS
Before towing, make sure the total trailer
weight, gross vehicle weight, gross axle
weight and trailer tongue load are all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load
can be measured with platform scales
found at a highway weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

The

total trailer weight (trailer
weight plus its cargo load) must
not exceed 453 kg (1000 lb.). Exceeding this weight is dangerous.

Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by
the hitch manufacturer. Even though
the vehicle may be physically capable of towing a higher weight, the
operator must determine the maximum weight rating of the particular
hitch assembly and never exceed
the maximum weight rating specified for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding
the maximum weight rating set by
the trailer hitch manufacturer can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal injuries.

327

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The load on either the front or rear

Total trailer weight

Tongue load

axle resulting from distribution of
the gross vehicle weight on both
axles must not exceed the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed
on the Certification Label.

Tongue load
Total trailer weight

100 = 9 to 11%

The gross vehicle weight must not

The trailer cargo load should be

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the sum of weights
of the unloaded vehicle, driver, passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer
tongue load. It also includes the
weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.

distributed so that the tongue load
is 9 to 11% of the total trailer
weight, not exceeding the maximum
of 45 kg (100 lb.). Never load the
trailer with more weight in the back
than in the front. About 60% of the
trailer load should be in the front
half of the trailer and the remaining
40% in the rear.

328

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

HITCHES

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

TIRES

Use only a hitch which is recom-

Toyota

Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are

mended by the hitch manufacturer and
conforms to the total trailer weight requirement.

recommends trailers with
brakes that conform to any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.

Follow the directions supplied by the

A safety chain must always be used

The trailer tires should be inflated to

hitch manufacturer. Lubricate the hitch
ball with a light coat of grease.

between the towing vehicle and the
trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should
cross under the trailer tongue to
prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated. For correct safety
chain procedures, follow the hitch or
trailer manufacturer’s recommendations.

the pressure recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the total
trailer weight.

Toyota recommends removing the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing
a trailer to reduce the possibility of
additional damage caused by the hitch
if your vehicle is struck from behind.

NOTICE
Do not use axle−mounted hitches as
they can cause damage to the axle
housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
tires. Also, never install a hitch which
may interfere with the normal function
of an Energy Absorbing Bumper, if so
equipped.

CAUTION

Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it would lower its
braking effectiveness.

Never tow a trailer without using a
safety chain securely attached to
both the trailer and the vehicle. If
damage occurs to the coupling unit
or hitch ball, there is danger of the
trailer wandering over into another
lane.

properly inflated. See page 385 in Section 7−2 and page 411 in Section 8 for
instructions.

TRAILER LIGHTS

Trailer lights must comply with federal,
state/provincial and local regulations.
See your local recreational vehicle
dealer or rental agency for the correct
type of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation of the
turn signals and stop lights each time
you hitch up. Direct splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system
and cause a malfunction of your lights.
BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

Toyota recommends that you do not
tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a
vehicle with any new power train component (engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first
800 km (500 miles) of driving.

329

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

MAINTENANCE

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will
handle differently than when not towing. The three main causes of vehicle−
trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed and improper trailer loading.
Keep these in mind when towing:

require more frequent maintenance due
to the additional load. For this information, please refer to the scheduled
maintenance information in the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.

Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing
ball and bracket after approximately
1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

Check that your vehicle remains level
when a loaded or unloaded trailer is
hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has
an abnormal nose−up or nose−down
condition, and check for improper
tongue load, overload, worn suspension
or other possible causes.

Make sure the trailer cargo is securely
loaded so that it can not shift.

Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any applicable federal, state/
provincial or local regulations. If not,
install the rear view mirrors required
for towing purpose.

Before starting out, check operation of
the lights and all vehicle−trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Before actually towing a trailer, practice turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away from
traffic until you learn the feel.

Backing with a trailer is difficult and
requires practice. Grip the bottom of
the steering wheel and move your hand
to the left to move the trailer to the
left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally opposite to that
when backing without a trailer.) Also,
just turn the steering wheel a little at
a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged
turning. Have someone guide you when
backing to reduce the risk of an accident.

Because stopping distance may be increased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance
should be increased when towing a
trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of
speed, allow at least one vehicle and
trailer length between you and the vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as
you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.

Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration. If your vehicle has a manual
transmission, prevent excessive clutch
slippage by keeping engine rpm low
and not racing the engine. Always start
out in first gear.

Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns.
The trailer could hit your vehicle in a
tight turn. Slow down before making a
turn to avoid the necessity of sudden
braking.

Remember that when making a turn,
the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the
turn. Therefore, compensate for this by
making a larger than normal turning
radius with your vehicle.

330

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Crosswinds and rough roads will ad-

Because of the added load of the trail-

versely affect handling of your vehicle
and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention
to the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being passed by large
trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying
happens, firmly grip the steering wheel
and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. Steer
straight ahead. If you make no extreme
correction with the steering or brakes,
the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat
on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or
steep grade with a trailer. If the engine
coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air
conditioning (if in use), pull off the road
and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If
your vehicle overheats” on page 342 in
Section 4.

Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires considerable
distance. After passing a vehicle, do
not forget the length of your trailer and
be sure you have plenty of room before changing lanes.

In order to maintain engine braking efficiency do not use overdrive (automatic
transmission) or fifth gear (manual
transmission).

Always place wheel blocks under both
the vehicle and trailer wheels when
parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.
Put the transmission in “P” (automatic)
or in first or reverse (manual). Avoid
parking on a slope with a trailer, but
if it cannot be avoided, do so only
after performing the following:

When restarting out after parking on a
slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position
(automatic) or the clutch pedal depressed (manual), start the engine.
(With an automatic transmission, be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.)
2. Shift into gear.
3. Release the parking brake (also foot
brake on automatic transmission vehicles) and slowly pull or back away
from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply
your brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

1. Apply the brakes and hold.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” (automatic) or first or
reverse (manual) and turn off the engine.

331

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

How to save fuel and make
your vehicle last longer
CAUTION

Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or
the posted towing speed limit,
whichever is lower. Because instability (swaying) of a towing vehicle−
trailer
combination
usually
increases as the speed increases, exceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may
cause loss of control.

Slow down and downshift before
descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts.

Avoid holding the brake pedal down
too long or too frequently. This
could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take
it easy. It will help make your vehicle last
longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and
repairs:

Avoid long engine idling. If you have

Keep your tires inflated at the cor-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for
the road on which you are travelling.

rect pressure. Underinflation causes
tire wear and wastes fuel. See page
385 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

Do not carry unneeded weight in
your vehicle. Excess weight puts a
heavier load on the engine, causing
greater fuel consumption.

Avoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once
the engine is running smoothly, begin
driving—but gently. Remember, however, that on cold winter days this may
take a little longer.

Keep the automatic transmission selector lever in the “D” position when
engine braking is not required. Driving with the selector lever in a position
other than “D” will reduce the fuel
economy. (For details, see “Automatic
transmission” on page 161 in Section
1−7.)

Accelerate

slowly and smoothly.
Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high
gear as quickly as possible.

a long wait and you are not in traffic,
it is better to turn off the engine and
start again later.

Avoid engine lugging or over−rev Avoid continuous speeding up and
slowing down.
wastes fuel.

Stop−and−go

driving

Avoid

unnecessary stopping and
braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try
to time the traffic signals so you only
need to stop as little as possible or
take advantage of through streets to
avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also reduce wear
on your brakes.

Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams
whenever possible.

Do not rest your foot on the clutch
or brake pedal. This causes premature
wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.

Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you drive, the greater
the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.

332

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Keep the front wheels in proper
alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and
slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire
wear but also puts an extra load on
the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

Keep the bottom of your vehicle free
from mud, etc. This not only lessens
weight but also helps prevent corrosion.

CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast
down hills. Your power steering and
brake booster will not function without the engine running. Also, the
emission control system operates
properly only when the engine is running.

Keep your vehicle tuned−up and in
top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil
and grease, brakes not adjusted, etc.
all lower engine performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For longer
life of all parts and lower operating
costs, keep all maintenance work on
schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle
receives more frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)

333

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

334

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

336
341
341
342
343
353
353
355
356

335

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If your vehicle will not start—
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure
you have followed the correct starting procedure given in “How to start the engine”
on page 316 in Section 3 and that you
have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is
equipped with the engine immobilizer system, also check whether the other keys
will start the engine. If they work, your
key may be broken. Have the key
checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of
your keys work, there may be a malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your
Toyota dealer. (See “Keys” on page 14 or
16 in Section 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or is
turning over too slowly—
1. Check that the battery terminals are
tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch
on the interior light.
3. With smart key system—If the light is
on, you may try emergency start. See
“(b) Emergency start” on page 337 for
further instructions.
4. If the light is out, dim or goes out
when the starter is cranked, the battery
is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(d) Jump starting” on page
338 for further instructions.
5. With smart key system—If the engine
does not start even after the battery
has been recharged or replaced, see
“(e) Starting the engine after a battery
discharge” on page 341 for further instruction.

NOTICE
Do not pull− or push−start the vehicle. It may damage the vehicle or
cause a collision when the engine
starts. Also the three−way catalytic
converter may overheat and become a
fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal
speed but will not start—
1. Set the ignition switch to ACC or off
and try starting the engine again.
2. If the engine will not start, the engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking. See “(c) Starting a flooded
engine” on page 337 for further instructions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota
dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will
not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair
shop.

336

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(b) Emergency start (vehicles
with smart key system)
When the engine does not start, the following procedure can be used to start the
engine if the vehicle’s starting system and
“ENGINE START STOP” switch function
normally.
1. Put the transmission in “P”.
2. Set the ignition switch to ACC by pushing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
once.
3. Push and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch for about 15 seconds
while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using
the above procedure, the system may be
malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked
by your Toyota dealer.
If the engine cannot be started using the
above procedure, immediately contact your
Toyota dealer.

(c) Starting a flooded engine
CAUTION
Do not place any objects close to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch. If the
object pushes on the switch, an unexpected engine start may result.

If the engine will not start, your engine
may be flooded because of repeated
cranking.
With key cylinder−type ignition switch—If
this happens, turn the key to “START”
with the accelerator pedal fully depressed.
Keep the key and accelerator pedal in
these positions for 15 seconds and release them. Then try starting the engine
with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
With smart key system—If this happens,
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
(engine switch) with the brake pedal and
the accelerator pedal fully depressed, and
hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking
hold function stops cranking automatically,
and you can try starting the engine with
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few
minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer
or qualified repair shop for assistance.

337

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(d) Jump starting
NOTICE
With
key
cylinder−type
ignition
switch—Do not crank for more than
30 seconds at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.

To avoid serious personal injury and
damage to your vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid burns,
electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be
followed precisely.
If you are unsure about how to follow this
procedure, we strongly recommend that
you seek the help of a competent mechanic or towing service.

CAUTION

Batteries

contain
sulfuric
acid
which is poisonous and corrosive.
Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling
acid on your skin, clothing, or vehicle.

The gas normally produced by a
battery will explode if a flame or
spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do
not smoke or light a match while
jump starting.

NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must
be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you
are sure that the booster battery is
correct.

If you should accidentally get acid
on yourself or in your eyes, remove
any contaminated clothing and flush
the affected area with water immediately. Then get immediate medical
attention. If possible, continue to
apply water with a sponge or cloth
while enroute to the medical office.

338

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

When boosting, use the battery of
matching or higher quality. Any other
battery may be difficult to jump start
with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the
battery for several minutes.

Jumper cable

Discharged battery

1. If the booster battery is installed in
another vehicle, make sure the vehicles
are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories.

Booster
battery

Positive
terminal
(“+”mark)
Jumper cable

Discharged battery
Positive terminal
(“+”mark)

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs
from the booster and discharged batteries. Lay a cloth over the open vents
on the batteries. (This helps reduce the
explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)

4. Make the cable connections in the order a, b, c, d.

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the
booster battery is not running, start it
and let it run for a few minutes. During
jump starting run the engine at about
2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the positive (red) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal on the booster
battery.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive
(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)
terminal on the discharged battery.

Negative terminal
(“−”mark)

Booster
battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative
(black) jumper cable to the negative (−)
terminal on the booster battery.
d. Connect the clamp at the other end
of the negative (black) jumper cable to
a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic
point of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.

339

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

5. Charge the discharged battery with the
jumper cables connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the
engine in the vehicle with the booster
battery at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
6. Start your engine in the normal way.
After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm
for several minutes with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.

If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper
cables are tight. Recharge the discharged
battery with the jumper cables connected
for several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If the another attempt is not successful,
the battery may be depleted. Have it checked at your Toyota dealer.

7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the
exact reverse order: the negative cable
and then the positive cable.
The recommended connecting point
is
in the above illustration.
Do not connect it to or near any part
that moves when the engine is
cranked.

CAUTION
When making the connections, to
avoid serious injury, do not lean over
the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the correct battery terminals or the ground.

8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover
cloths—they may now contain sulfuric
acid.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent
plugs.
With smart key system—The engine may
not restart even after battery charging or
replacement. If this happens, see “(d)
Starting the engine after a battery discharge” described below.
If the cause of your battery discharging is
not apparent (for example, lights left on),
you should have it checked at your Toyota
dealer.

340

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

(e) Starting the engine after a
battery discharge

If your engine stalls while
driving

If you cannot increase engine
speed

In the event that the battery is discharged, the engine may not restart
even after the battery is recharged or
replaced. For safety reasons, the engine
may be disabled when battery voltage
is extremely low. If the engine is disabled, the start system must be normalized.

If your engine stalls while driving...

If engine speed does not increase when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, there
may be a problem somewhere in the electronic throttle control system.

To normalize the start system:

If the engine will not start, see “If your
vehicle will not start” on page 336 in this
Section.

(vehicles with smart key system)

1. Shift the transmission to the “P” position and set the ignition switch off.
2. Open and close any of the doors.
3. Start the engine.

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping
a straight line. Move cautiously off the
road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Set the ignition switch to ACC or off,
and try starting the engine again.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the
power assist for the brakes and
steering will not work so steering
and braking will be much harder
than usual.

Vehicles with smart key system—

At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the accelerator pedal
more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle
checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic
throttle control system is corrected during
low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and
the ignition switch is set to ACC or off.

CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal operation.

If the engine stalls while driving, do
not open the driver’s door until the
vehicle comes to a complete stop.
Opening the driver’s door locks the
steering wheel, resulting in loss of
steering control.

341

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If your vehicle overheats
If your engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you hear
a loud knocking or pinging noise, the
engine has probably overheated. You
should follow this procedure...

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the
radiator, hoses,and under the vehicle.
However, note that water draining from
the air conditioning is normal if it has
been used.

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your emergency
flashers. Put the transmission in “P”
(automatic) or neutral (manual) and apply the parking brake. Turn off the air
conditioning if it is being used.

CAUTION

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the
radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.
Wait until the steam subsides before
opening the hood. If there is no coolant
boiling over or steam, leave the engine
running and make sure the electric
cooling fan is operating. If it is not,
turn the ignition off.

6. After the engine coolant temperature
has cooled to normal, again check the
coolant level in the reservoir. If necessary, bring it up to half full again. Serious coolant loss indicates a leak in the
system. You should have it checked as
soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

When the engine is running, keep
hands and clothing away from the
moving fan and engine drive belts.
4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the engine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer
for assistance.
5. If there are no obvious leaks, check
the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add
coolant to the reservoir while the engine is running. Fill it about half full.
For the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” on page 382 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep
the hood closed until there is no
steam. Escaping steam or coolant is
a sign of very high pressure.

Do not attempt to remove the radiator
cap when the engine and radiator are
hot. Serious injury could result from
scalding hot fluid and steam blown
out under pressure.

342

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If you have a flat tire—
1. Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
well away from the traffic. Avoid
stopping on the center divider of
a highway. Park on a level spot
with firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your
emergency flashers.
3. Firmly set the parking brake and
put the transmission in “P” (automatic) or reverse (manual).
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side away from traffic.
5. Read the following instructions
thoroughly.

CAUTION
When jacking, be sure to observe
the following to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:
Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your
body under the vehicle supported by the jack. Otherwise,
personal injury may occur.
Do not start or run the engine
while your vehicle is supported
by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm
ground, firmly set the parking
brake and put the transmission
in “P” (automatic) or reverse
(manual). Block the wheel diagonally opposite to the one being changed if necessary.

Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack point. Raising
the vehicle with jack improperly positioned will damage the
vehicle or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack and
cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle
when the vehicle is supported
by the jack alone.
Use the jack only for lifting
your vehicle during wheel
changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with
someone in the vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do
not place any objects on top
of or underneath the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high
enough to remove and change
the tire.

343

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The compact spare tire can be used
many times, if necessary. It has tread
life of up to 4800 km (3000 miles) depending on road conditions and your
driving habits. When tread wear indicators appear on the tire, replace the
tire.
See also the tire information on page
388 in Section 7−2 for details on the
tread wear indicators and other service information.

NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a
deflated tire. Driving even a
short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.

Compact spare tire (on some models)
The compact spare tire is designed
for temporary emergency use only.
The compact spare tire is identified
by
the
distinctive
wording
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” molded
into the side wall of the tire.
The compact spare tire saves space
in your luggage compartment, and its
lighter weight helps to improve fuel
economy and permits easier installation in case of a flat tire.

CAUTION
The compact spare tire was designed especially for your Toyota. Do not use it on any other
vehicle.
Do not use more than one compact spare tire at the same
time.
The pressure for the compact
spare tire must be 420 kPa (4.2
kgf/cm2 or bar, 60 psi).
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50
mph) when driving with the
compact spare tire.

344

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Required tools and spare
tire
1. Get the required tools and
spare tire.
1. Jack handle
2. Wheel nut wrench
3. Transport eyelet
(on some models)
4. Jack
5. Spare tire
To prepare yourself for an emergency,
you should familiarize yourself with
the use of the jack, each of the tools
and their storage locations.

Replace the compact spare tire
with the standard tire as soon
as possible.
Avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration and sharp
turns with the compact spare
tire.

NOTICE
Your ground clearance is reduced when the compact spare
tire is installed so avoid driving
over obstacles and drive slowly
on rough, unpaved roads and
speed bumps. Also, do not attempt to go through an automatic car wash as the vehicle
may get caught, resulting in
damage.

With a compact spare tire

Without a compact spare tire
345

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

When storing the spare tire, put it in
place with the outer side of the wheel
facing up. Then secure the tire by repeating the above removal steps in
reverse order to prevent it from flying
forward during a collision or sudden
braking.

Before removing the jack, unhook the
tightening strap.
After storing the jack, make sure it is
securely held by the tightening strap.
This prevents the jack from flying forward during a collision or sudden
stop.

To
1.
2.
3.
4.

remove the spare tire:
Loosen the nut and remove it.
Remove the spare tire cover.
Loosen the bolt and remove it.
Remove the spacer (with aluminum wheels).
Then take the spare tire out of the
vehicle.

346

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Blocking the wheel

2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to keep the
vehicle from rolling when it is
jacked up.
When blocking the wheel, place a
wheel block in front of one of the front
wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.

—Removing wheel ornament
(steel wheels only)

3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the
beveled end of the wheel nut wrench
as shown.
CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand. Take due care in
handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.

—Loosening wheel nuts

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before
raising the vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise
to loosen. To get maximum leverage,
fit the wrench to the nut so that the
handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end
of the handle and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench does
not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet—just unscrew them about one−half turn.

347

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Positioning the jack
CAUTION

Jack point guide

Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. The nuts may become loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident.

5. Position the jack at the correct
jack point as shown.
Make sure the jack is positioned on
a level and solid place.

The jack point guides are located under the rocker panel. They indicate
the jack point positions.

348

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Raising your vehicle

—Changing wheels
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when
the vehicle is supported by the
jack alone.

6. After making sure that no one
is in the vehicle, raise it high
enough so that the spare tire
can be installed.
Remember you will need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare
tire than when removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack
handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)
and turn it clockwise. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift,
double−check that it is properly positioned.

7. Remove the wheel nuts and
change tires.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it
aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and
align the holes in the wheel with the
bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get
at least the top bolt started through
its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it
back over the other bolts.

349

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Reinstalling wheel nuts
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the
bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead
to overtightening the nuts and
damaging the bolts. The nuts
may loose and the wheels may
fall off, which could cause a serious accident. If there is oil or
grease on any bolt or nut, clean
it.
Before putting on wheels, remove any
corrosion on the mounting surfaces
with a wire brush or such. Installation
of wheels without good metal−to−metal contact at the mounting surface can
cause wheel nuts to loosen and
eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end
inward) and tighten them as much as
you can by hand. Press back on the
tire and see if you can tighten them
more.

350

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Reinstalling wheel ornament
(steel wheels only)

—Lowering your vehicle
CAUTION

9. Lower the vehicle completely
and tighten the wheel nuts.
Turn the jack handle counterclockwise to lower the vehicle.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to
tighten the nuts. Do not use other
tools or any additional leverage other
than your hands, such as a hammer,
pipe or your foot. Make sure the
wrench is securely engaged over the
nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in
the order shown. Repeat the process
until all the nuts are tight.

When lowering the vehicle,
make sure all portions of your
body and all other persons
around will not be injured as
the vehicle is lowered to the
ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened
with torque wrench to 103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon
as possible after changing
wheels. Otherwise, the nuts
may loosen and the wheels
may fall off, which could cause
a serious accident.
Do not attach a heavily damaged plastic wheel ornament.
It may fly off the wheel and
cause accidents while the vehicle is moving.

10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.
1. Put the wheel ornament into position.
Align the cutout of the wheel ornament with the valve stem as shown.
2. Press hard firmly on one side of
wheel ornament and then firmly
tap the other side around the edge
of wheel ornament with the heel
of your hand to snap into place.

351

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—After changing wheels
CAUTION
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

11. Check the air pressure of the replaced tire.
Adjust the air pressure to the specification designed on page 411 in Section 8. If the pressure is lower, drive
slowly to the nearest service station
and fill to the correct pressure.
Do not forget to reinstall the tire inflation valve cap as dirt and moisture
could get into the valve core and
possibly cause air leakage. If the cap
is missing, have a new one put on as
soon as possible.
12.Restow all the tools, jack and
flat tire securely.
As soon after changing wheels as
possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the
torque specified on page 411 in Section 8 with a torque wrench. Have a
technician repair the flat tire and replace the spare tire with it.

Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have replaced your tires
or wheels. See “Tire pressure
warning system” on page 174 in
Section 1−7.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure all the
tools, jack and flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility
of personal injury during a collision or sudden braking.

352

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If your vehicle needs to be
towed

If your vehicle becomes stuck
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,
mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt
to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward.
Vehicles with traction control system—
The traction control system can be
turned off to become unstuck to allow
the tires to spin enough to remove the
vehicle from the obstruction. Contact
your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle
free by moving it forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere near the vehicle. During the
rocking operation the vehicle may
suddenly move forward or backward
as it becomes unstuck, causing injury
or damage to nearby people or objects.

NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the
following precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and other
parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting the selector lever
or before the transmission is completely shifted to forward or reverse
gear.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—
—From front

—From rear

Do not race the engine and avoid
spinning the wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after
rocking the vehicle several times,
consider other ways such as towing.
(b) Using flat bed truck

353

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If towing is necessary, we recommend
you to have it done by your Toyota
dealer or a commercial tow truck service. In consultation with them, have
your vehicle towed using either (a) or
(b).

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Proper equipment will help ensure that
your vehicle is not damaged while being
towed. Commercial operators are generally
aware of the state/provincial and local
laws pertaining to towing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is
towed incorrectly. Although most operators
know the correct procedure, it is possible
to make a mistake. To avoid damage to
your vehicle, make sure the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.

Use a safety chain system for all towing,
and abide by the state/provincial and local
laws. The wheels and axle on the ground
must be in good condition. If they are
damaged, use a towing dolly.

NOTICE
When lifting wheels, take care to ensure adequate ground clearance for
towing at the opposite end of the
raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper
and/or underbody of the towed vehicle
will be damaged during towing.
From front—Release the parking brake.
From rear—

Manual transmission:
We recommend using a towing dolly
under the front wheels. If you do not
use a towing dolly, set the ignition
switch at ACC and put the transmission in neutral.

NOTICE
Do not tow with the key removed or
in the “LOCK” position when towing
from the rear without a towing dolly.
The steering lock mechanism is not
strong enough to hold the front
wheels straight.

Automatic transmission:
Use a towing dolly under the front
wheels.

NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic
transmission from the rear with the
front wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
(b) Using flat bed truck

354

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If you cannot shift automatic
transmission selector lever
(c) Towing with sling
type truck

NOTICE
Do not tow with sling type truck, either from the front or rear. This may
cause body damage.

If you cannot shift the selector lever
out of “P” position to other positions
even though the brake pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button as follows:

3. Insert your finger into the
push down the shift lock
button. You can shift out
position only while pushing
ton.

hole to
override
of “P”
the but-

1. Make sure the engine is off and the
parking brake is on.

4. Shift into “N” position.

2. Insert the flathead screwdriver or
equivalent to the slot of the cover
and pry it up.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,
keep the brake pedal depressed.

5. Insert the cover.

Be sure to have the system checked by
your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

355

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

If you lose your keys
You can purchase a new key at your
Toyota dealer if you can give them the
key number and master key.
Vehicles with key cylinder−type ignition
switch—Even if you lose only one key,
contact your Toyota dealer to make a new
key. If you lose all your master keys, you
cannot make new keys; the whole engine
immobilizer system must be replaced.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and
you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota
dealers can still open the door for you,
using their special tools. If you must
break a window to get in, we suggest
breaking the smallest side window because it is the least expensive to replace.
Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from
the glass.

Vehicles with smart key system—If you
lose any of your keys, contact your
Toyota dealer to have new keys made.
Lost keys increase the danger of vehicle
theft. Bring all of the remaining vehicle
keys when you visit your Toyota dealer.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on
page 14 or 16 in Section 1−2.
You can use the wireless remote control
system and smart entry and start system
by new key, if the systems are equipped
with your vehicle. Contact your Toyota
dealer for detailed information.

356

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

CORROSION PREVENTION AND
APPEARANCE CARE
Corrosion prevention and appearance care
Protecting your Toyota from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Washing and waxing your Toyota . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

357

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Protecting your Toyota from
corrosion
Toyota, through the diligent research, design and use of the most advanced
technology available, helps prevent corrosion and provides you with the finest quality vehicle construction. Now, it is up to
you. Proper care of your Toyota can help
ensure long−term corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion
to your vehicle are:

The accumulation of road salt, dirt and
moisture in hard−to−reach areas under
the vehicle.

Chipping

of paint, or undercoating
caused by minor accidents or by
stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live
in particular areas or operate your vehicle under certain environmental conditions:

Road salt or dust control chemicals will
accelerate corrosion, as will the presence of salt in the air near the sea−
coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

High humidity accelerates corrosion especially when temperatures range just
above the freezing point.

Wetness or dampness to certain parts

High pressure water or steam is effec-

of your vehicle for an extended period
of time, may cause corrosion even
though other parts of the vehicle may
be dry.

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside
and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to simply wet the
mud and debris without removing. The
lower edge of doors, rocker panels and
frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt
as trapped water in these areas can
cause corrosion.

High ambient temperatures can cause
corrosion to those components of the
vehicle which do not dry quickly due to
lack of proper ventilation.
The above signifies the necessity to keep
your vehicle, particularly the underside, as
clean as possible and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings as
soon as possible.

Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter is over.

your

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on
page 359 for more tips.

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of
course, necessary to keep your vehicle
clean by regular washing, but to prevent
corrosion, the following points should be
observed:

Check the condition of your vehicle’s
paint and trim. If you find any chips or
scratches in the paint, touch them up immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or scratches have gone
through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.

To help prevent corrosion on
Toyota, follow these guidelines:

If you drive on salted roads in the
winter or if you live near the ocean,
you should hose off the undercarriage
at least once a month to minimize corrosion.

358

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Washing and waxing your
Toyota
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can accumulate under the
floor mats and could cause corrosion. Occasionally check under the mats to make
sure the area is dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals, cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc.; these should be
transported in proper containers. If a spill
or leak should occur, immediately clean
and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you
drive on salted or gravel roads, mud
shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size
shields, which come as near to the ground
as possible, are the best. We recommend
that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist
corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be
happy to assist in supplying and installing
the shields if they are recommended for
your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated
garage or a roofed place. Do not park
your vehicle in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in
the garage, or if you drive it covered with
water or snow, your garage may be so
damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your
garage is heated, a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.

Hand−washing your Toyota

Washing your Toyota
Keep your
washing.

vehicle

clean

regular

Work in the shade and wait until the
vehicle body is not warm to the touch.

The following cases may cause weakness
to the paint or corrosion to the body and
parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as possible.

When cleaning under floor or chas-

When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with

Exhaust gases cause the exhaust

antifreeze

When exposed to coal tar, tree sap,
bird droppings and carcass of an insect

When driving in areas where there is
a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or
chemical substances

When the vehicle becomes remarkably
dirty with dust and mud

CAUTION

sis, be careful not to injure your
hands.
pipe to become quite hot. When
washing the vehicle, be careful not
to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road salt from the
underside of the vehicle or the wheel
wells.
2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,
mixed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and
keep it wet by dipping it frequently into
the wash water. Do not rub hard—let
the soap and water remove the dirt.

359

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−
pressure car wash, for example) at or
near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler
door opened. If the water enters the air
vent, you may experience trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle
using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not
rub or press hard—you might scratch
the paint.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic
wheel ornaments are damaged easily by
organic substances. If any organic substances splash an ornament, be sure to
wash them off with water and check if the
ornament is damaged.

Do not use organic substances
(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or
strong solvents), which may be toxic or cause damage.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap
or neutral detergent.
Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not
scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper
faces are soft.
Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use
organic substances or scrub them with a
hard brush. This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or
cleaners that are marked safe for painted
surfaces.
3. Rinse
thoroughly—dried
soap
can
cause streaking. In hot weather you
may need to rinse each section right
after you wash it.

NOTICE

Do not scrub any part of the vehicle with a hard brush, which may
cause damage.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but remember that the
paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the
washing process itself. Scratching reduces
paint durability and gloss, especially on
darker colors. The manager of the car
wash should be able to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on
your vehicle.

Waxing your Toyota
Polishing and waxing is recommended
to maintain the original beauty of your
Toyota’s finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle
surface does not repel water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing, even if you are
using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If
the finish has become extremely weathered, use a car−cleaning polish, followed by a separate wax. Carefully follow the manufacturer’s instructions and
precautions. Be sure to polish and wax
the chrome trim as well as the paint.
Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure
that the nozzles do not become blocked
when waxing. If a nozzle becomes
blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to
have the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE
If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not
try to clear it with a pin or other
object. The nozzle will be damaged.

360

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Cleaning the interior
Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the
surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause
damage to the lenses. If you accidentally
put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or
wash it off.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water
does not bead but remains on the surface in large patches.

NOTICE
Always remove the plastic bumpers if
your vehicle is re−painted and placed
in a high heat paint waxing booth.
High temperatures could damage the
bumpers.

CAUTION

Vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield airbags:
Be careful not to splash water or
spill liquid on the floor. This may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, resulting in serious
injury.

Do not wash the vehicle floor with
water, or allow water to get onto
the floor when cleaning the vehicle
interior or exterior. Water may get
into audio components or other
electrical components above or under the floor carpet (or mat) and
cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior
The vinyl upholstery may be easily
cleaned with a mild soap or detergent
and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or
soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few
minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt
and wipe off the soap with a clean damp
cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, repeat the procedure. Commercial foaming−
type vinyl cleaners are also available
which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.

NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline
or window cleaner on the interior.

361

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Carpets

Windows

Use a good foam−type
clean the carpets.

shampoo

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove
as much dirt as possible. Several types of
foam cleaners are available; some are in
aerosol cans and others are powders or
liquids which you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,
use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.
Rub in overlapping circles.
Do not apply water—the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as
possible. Read the shampoo instructions
and follow them closely.

NOTICE

The windows may be cleaned with any
household window cleaner.

NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the heater wires or connectors.
Air conditioning control panel, audio
panel, instrument panel, console panel
and switches.
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

Seat belts
The seat belts may be cleaned with
mild soap and water or with lukewarm
water.

Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,
etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or peeling of the
surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing
agents, make sure their ingredients
do not include the substances mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do
not spill the liquid onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean any spill
using the method mentioned above.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for excessive wear,
fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE
Do not use dye or bleach on the
belts—it may weaken them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.

362

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Leather interior
The leather upholstery may be cleaned
with neutral detergent for wool.
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened
with 5% solution of neutral detergent for
wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
After cleaning or whenever any part of the
leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean
cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated shaded area.

NOTICE
If a stain should fail to come out
with a neutral detergent, apply a
cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such
as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or
alkaline or acid solutions for cleaning the leather as these could
cause discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic
fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the
fine grained surface of the leather.

Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be especially careful
to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Long exposure to direct sunlight
may cause the leather surface to
harden and shrink. Keep your vehicle in a shaded area, especially in
the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt
to heat up on hot summer days, so
avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or
containing wax as these tend to
stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could result in discoloration or staining.
If you have any questions about the
cleaning of your Toyota, your local
Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer
them.

363

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

364

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE
Vehicle maintenance and care
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . .

366
367
369
370

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

365

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Maintenance requirements
Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for
fewer maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to save both your time
and money. However, each regular maintenance, as well as day−to−day care, is
more important than ever before to ensure
smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical
drivings.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make
sure the specified maintenance, including
general maintenance service, is performed.
Note that both the new vehicle and emission control system warranties specify that
proper maintenance and care must be performed. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day−
to−day care practices that are important to
your vehicle for proper operation. It is the
owner’s responsibility to insure that the
general maintenance items are performed
regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done
either by yourself or a qualified technician,
or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be
pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

Where to go for service?

The scheduled maintenance items listed in
the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.

Toyota technicians are well−trained specialists and are kept up to date with the
latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership
training programs. They learn to work on
Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,
rather than while they are working on it.

For details of your maintenance schedule,
read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”
or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
It is recommended that any replacement
parts used for maintenance or for the
repair of the emission control system
be Toyota supplied.

You can be confident that your Toyota
dealer’s service department performs the
best job to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle—reliably and economically.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyota
supplied parts for replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use
of replacement parts which are not of
equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness of the emission control systems.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that
all required maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If any problems should arise with your vehicle while
under warranty, your Toyota dealer will
promptly take care of it. Again, be sure
to keep a copy of the repair order for any
service performed on your Toyota.

You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or repair of the
emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual without invalidating this warranty. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement” for complete warranty information.

366

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

General maintenance
What about do−it−yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy
to do yourself if you have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are presented on page 371 in
Section 7.
If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechanic, the Toyota service manuals are recommended. Please be aware that do−it−yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance
items that should be performed as frequently as specified. In addition to checking the items listed, if you notice any
unusual noise, smell or vibration, you
should investigate the cause or take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a qualified service shop immediately. It is recommended that any problem you notice be
brought to the attention of your dealer or
the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you run the engine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Items listed below should be checked
from time to time, e.g. each time when
refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the
tank. See page 399 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the see−through
reservoir when the engine is cold. See
page 382 in Section 7−2 for additional
information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and
condenser are clean and not blocked with
leaves, dirt or insects. See page 383 in
Section 7−2 for additional information.
Battery condition
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page 396 in Section 7−3 for
additional information.

367

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Brake fluid level
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.
See page 383 in Section 7−2 for additional information.

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the
engine turned off and the vehicle parked
on a level spot. See page 380 in Section
7−2 for additional information.

Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights
are all working. Check headlight aim.

Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The
level should be in the “HOT” or “COLD”
range depending on the fluid temperature.
See page 384 in Section 7−2 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of
the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have
the cause located and corrected immediately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on
page 290 in Section 2.)

Items listed below should be checked
regularly, e.g. while performing periodic
services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Service reminder indicators and warning
buzzers
Check that all service reminder indicators
and warning buzzers function properly.
Steering wheel
Be alert for changes in steering condition,
such as hard steering or strange noise.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as
seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly and that all latches lock
securely in any position. Check that the
head restraints move up and down
smoothly and that the locks hold securely
in any latched position. For folding−down
rear seatbacks, check that the latches
lock securely.

Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as
buckles, retractors and anchors operate
properly and smoothly. Make sure that the
belt webbings not cut, frayed, worn or
damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
uneven pedal effort or catching.
Clutch pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
that the pedal has the proper clearance.
Check the brake booster function.
Brakes
In a safe place, check that the brakes do
not pull to one side when applied.
Parking brake
Check that the lever or pedal has the
proper travel and that, on a safe incline,
your vehicle is held securely with only the
parking brake applied.

368

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Does your vehicle need
repairing?
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector
lever in “P” position and all brakes released.
OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Items listed below should be performed
from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. If you smell fuel
fumes or notice any leak, have the cause
found and corrected immediately.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all doors including trunk lid
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood secondary latch secures the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.

Tire inflation pressure
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks, or at least once a
month. See page 385 in Section 7−2
for additional information.
Tire surface and wheel nuts
Check the tires carefully for cuts,
damage or excessive wear. See page
388 in Section 7−2 for additional information. When checking the tires,
make sure no nuts are missing, and
check the nuts for looseness. Tighten
them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the
maintenance schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance
Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.) See page 390 in Section 7−2
for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in performance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that
indicate service is needed. Some important clues are as follows:

Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Strange engine noises
A leak under the vehicle (however, water dripping from the air conditioning
after use is normal.)

Change in exhaust sound (This may
indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide
leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)

Flat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal
when cornering; uneven tire wear

Vehicle pulls to one side when driving
straight on a level road

Strange noises related to suspension
movement

Loss of brake effectiveness; spongy
feeling brake or clutch pedal; pedal almost touches floor; vehicle pulls to one
side when braking

Engine coolant temperature continually
higher than normal

369

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) programs
If you notice any of these clues, take your
vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.

CAUTION
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD
(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation
of the emission control system. When the
OBD system determines that a problem
exists somewhere in the emission control
system, the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on. In this case, your vehicle may
not pass the I/M test and need to be
repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to
service the vehicle.
Even
does
pass
have

if the malfunction indicator lamp
not come on, your vehicle may not
the I/M test as readiness codes
not been set in the OBD system.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had
come on recently due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off
after taking several driving trips, but the
error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are
taken.
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
even the malfunction indicator lamp does
not come on, contact your Toyota dealer
to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Readiness codes are automatically set
during ordinary driving. However, when the
battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on
your driving habits, the codes may not be
completely set.

370

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

7− 1

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Introduction
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do−it−yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

372
374
374
376
378

371

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Engine compartment overview
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil level dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Radiator
8. Electric cooling fans
9. Condenser
10. Windshield washer fluid tank
11. Engine coolant reservoir

372

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine oil level dipstick
4. Brake fluid reservoir
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Radiator
8. Electric cooling fans
9. Condenser
10. Windshield washer fluid tank
11. Engine coolant reservoir

373

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Do−it−yourself service
precautions

Fuse locations
Spare fuses

If you perform maintenance by yourself,
be sure to follow the correct procedure
given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing may result in operating
problems.
Performing
do−it−yourself
maintenance
during the warranty period may affect your
warranty coverage. Read the separate
Toyota Warranty statement for details and
suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for
those items that are relatively easy for an
owner to perform. As explained in Section
6, there are still a number of items that
must be done by a qualified technician
with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do−
it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and
tools” on page 378 in this Section.
Utmost care
ing on your
injury. Here
you should
serve:

should be taken when workvehicle to prevent accidental
are a few precautions that
be especially careful to ob-

374

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from the moving fan and engine
drive
belts.
(Removing
rings,
watches, and ties is advisable.)

Right

after driving, the engine
compartment—the engine, radiator,
exhaust manifold and spark plug
boots, etc.—will be hot. So be careful not to touch them. Oil, fluids
and spark plugs may also be hot.

If the engine is hot, do not remove
the radiator cap or loosen the drain
plugs to prevent burning yourself.

Do not leave anything that may
burn easily, such as paper or rags,
in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames around fuel or the
battery. Their fumes are flammable.

Do not get under your vehicle with
just the body jack supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.

Be sure that the ignition is off if

Dispose of used oil and filter only

you work near the electric cooling
fans or radiator grille. With the
ignition on, the electric cooling fans
will automatically start to run if the
engine coolant temperature is high
and/or the air conditioning is on.

in a safe and acceptable manner.
Do not dispose of used oil and filter in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your dealer or
a service station for information
concerning recycling or disposal.

Use eye protection whenever you
work on or under your vehicle
where you may be exposed to flying
or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

Used engine oil contains potentially
harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care
should be taken to avoid prolonged
and repeated contact with it. To remove used engine oil from your
skin, wash thoroughly with soap
and water.

Do not leave used oil within the
reach of children.

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

375

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Positioning the jack
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition
cables carry high currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Add only “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non−silicate,
non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−life hybrid
organic acid technology to fill the
radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for
the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%
deionized water (for Canada).

Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid, or the transmission
could be damaged.
Do not drive with the air cleaner
filter removed, or excessive engine
wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine
compartment.
Be careful not to scratch the glass
surface with the wiper frame.
When closing the engine hood,
check to see that you have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.

Front

If you spill some of the coolant, be
sure to wash it off with water to
prevent it from damaging the parts
or paint.
Do not allow dirt or anything else
to fall through the spark plugholes.
Use only spark plugs of the specified type. Using other types will
cause engine damage, loss of performance or radio noise.
Do not reuse iridium−tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or regapping.

Rear (2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−FE] engine)

376

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

CAUTION

Do not raise the vehicle with some-

Follow jacking instructions.
Do not put any part of your body

When raising the vehicle, do not

Do not start or run the engine while

When jacking up your vehicle with the
jack, position the jack correctly as
shown in the illustrations.

the vehicle is supported by the jack
alone; use vehicle support stands.

When jacking, be sure to observe the
following to reduce the possibility of
death or serious injury:

under the vehicle supported by the
jack. Personal injury may occur.

Rear (3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine)

Never get under the vehicle when

your vehicle is supported by the
jack.

Stop the vehicle on a level firm

one in the vehicle.
place any objects on top of or underneath the jack.

NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack correctly,
or your vehicle may be damaged.

ground, firmly set the parking brake
and put the transmission in “P”
(automatic) or reverse (manual).
Block the wheels on the opposite
side of the jack up point if necessary.

377

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Parts and tools
Here is a list of parts and tools you will
need to perform do−it−yourself maintenance. Remember all Toyota parts are designed in metric sizes, so your tools must
be metric.
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Tools:

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Funnel (only for adding coolant)

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent with

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
See page 381 in Section 7−2 for details about engine oil selection.
Tools:

THE

ENGINE

Water
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for

Tools:

Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)

winter use)

CHECKING POWER STEERING FLUID
Parts (if level is low):

Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)

Automatic

transmission
DEXRONII or III

COOLANT

Parts (if level is low):

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or
similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with long−
life hybrid organic acid technology.
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a
mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%
coolant and 45% deionized water (for
Canada).

ADDING WASHER FLUID
Parts:

brake fluid

Parts (if level is low):

CHECKING
LEVEL

same amperage rating as original

Parts (if level is low):

fluid

Tools:

Funnel
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
Parts:

Bulb with same number and wattage

Tools:

Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding fluid)

rating as original (See charts in “Replacing light bulbs” on page 400 in
Section 7−3.)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Tools:

Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional
clamp bolts)

wrench

(for

terminal

378

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

7− 2

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Engine and Chassis
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

380
382
383
383
384
385
388
390
391
393
393

379

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking the engine oil level
Low level

Full level

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far
as it will go, or the reading will not be
correct.
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil
level while holding a rag under the
end.

CAUTION
Add oil

O.K.

Too full

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level
on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle
should be on level ground. After turning
off the engine, wait a few minutes for
the oil to drain back into the bottom of
the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under
the end and wipe it clean.

If the oil level is below or only slightly
above the low level line, add engine oil
of the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine
oil in small quantities at a time, checking
the dipstick. We recommend that you use
a funnel when adding oil.

Be careful not to touch the hot exhaust manifold.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low and full on the
dipstick is indicated as follows:
1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp. qt.)

NOTICE

For the engine oil capacity, see “Service
specifications” on page 407 in Section 8.

Be careful not to drop engine oil on
the vehicle components.

When the level reaches within the correct
range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE
Be careful not to spill engine oil on
the vehicle components.
Avoid overfilling, or
could be damaged.

the

engine

Check the oil level on the dipstick
once again after adding the oil.

380

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
SAE 5W−30

Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20
Outside temperature

Oil identification mark
SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good
fuel economy and good starting in cold
weather.

Outside temperature

If SAE 5W−30 is not available, SAE
10W−30 may be used. However, it
should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at
the next oil change.

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you
should use.

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20 engine oil may be
used. However, SAE 0W−20 is the best
choice for good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.

381

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking the engine coolant
level
Look at the see−through coolant reservoir when the engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between
the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir.
If the level is low, add the coolant. (For
the coolant type, see “Coolant type
selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary
with engine temperature. However, if the
level is on or below the “L” line, add
coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.

To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine
Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all
Toyota engines.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details about “Toyota Genuine Motor
Oil”.

If the coolant level drops within a short
time after replenishing, there may be a
leak in the system. Visually check the
radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap,
radiator cap and drain cock and water
pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Toyota
dealer test the cap pressure and check
for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage
your engine cooling system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene glycol
based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,
and non−borate coolant with long−life
hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and
50% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −35C
(−31F).
For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and
45% deionized water. This coolant provides protection down to about −42C
(−44F).

NOTICE
To prevent burning yourself, do not
remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot.

Do not use plain water alone.

382

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking the radiator and
condenser

Checking brake fluid

If any of the above parts are extremely
dirty or you are not sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long
Life Coolant”, which has been tested to
ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine
coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated
with
long−life
hybrid
organic
acid
technology and has been specifically
designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Toyota vehicles.
Please contact
further details.

your

Toyota dealer

for

To prevent damage to the radiator
and condenser, do not perform the
work by yourself.

To check the fluid level, simply look at
the see−through reservoir. The level
should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the reservoir.
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go
down slightly as the brake pads wear. So
be sure to keep the reservoir filled.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it
may indicate a serious mechanical problem.

383

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking power steering fluid
If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or
FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the
brake reservoir.
Remove and replace the reservoir cap by
hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted
line. This brings the fluid to the correct
level when you put the cap back on.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once
opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from
the air, and excess moisture can cause a
dangerous loss of braking.

If cold
O.K.
If hot O.K.
Close

Open

If cold
add
If hot
add

CAUTION
Take care when filling the reservoir
because brake fluid can harm your
hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your
hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable
with your hands or eyes, go to the
doctor.

NOTICE

Check the fluid level through the reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80
km/h (50 mph) for 20 minutes (a little
more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is
hot (60C—80C or 140F—175F). You
may also check the level when the fluid
is
cold
(about
room
temperature,
10C—30C or 50F—85F) if the engine
has not been run for about five hours.

Clean all dirt from the outside of the reservoir tank and look at the fluid level. If
the fluid is cold, the level should be in the
“COLD” range. Similarly, if it is hot, the
fluid level should be in the “HOT” range.
If the level is at the low side of either
range, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift up. To reinstall it,
turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir cap, visually check the steering box
case, vane pump and hose connections
for leaks or damage.

CAUTION
The reservoir tank may be hot so be
careful not to burn yourself.

NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be damaged.

If you spill some of the fluid, be sure
to wipe it off to prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.

384

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking tire inflation
pressure
Keep your tire inflation pressures
at the proper level.
The recommended cold tire inflation
pressures, tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants and cargo
(vehicle capacity weight) are described on page 406 and 411. They
are also on the tire and loading information label.
You should check the tire inflation
pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month. And do not forget the
spare!

Type A

Type B

385

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

The following instructions for
checking tire inflation pressure
should be observed:
The
pressure
should
be
checked only when the tires are
cold. If your vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours and has
not been driven for more than 1.5
km or 1 mile since, you will get
an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
Always use a tire pressure
gauge. The appearance of a tire
can be misleading. Besides, tire
inflation pressures that are even
just a few pounds off can degrade
ride and handling.
Take special care when adding
air to the compact spare tire.
The smaller tire size can gain
pressure very quickly. Add compressed air in small quantities and
check the pressure often until it
reaches the specified pressure.

Do not bleed or reduce tire
inflation pressure after driving.
It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passenger and luggage weight should be located so
that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure
gauge to the tire valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure
is not within the prescribed range,
insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too
much air, press the center of the
valve and release the air to adjust.

386

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

5. After completing the tire inflation
pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the
valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your vehicle checked by
your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve
caps. Without the valve caps, dirt
or moisture could get into the
valve core and cause air leakage.
If the caps have been lost, have
new ones put on as soon as possible.
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may
waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION
Keep your tires properly inflated.
Otherwise, the following conditions may occur and cause an accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation)—
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from a
overheated tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire
separation
A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinflation)—
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire
damage from road hazards

387

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking and replacing tires
Tread wear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES
Check the tire’s tread for tread
wear indicators. If the indicators
show, replace the tires. The location of tread wear indicators is
shown by the “TWI” or “∆ ” marks,
etc., molded on the sidewall of
each tire.

The tires on your Toyota have built−in
tread wear indicators to help you
know when the tires need replacement. When the tread depth wears to
1.6 mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you can see the
indicators in two or more adjacent
grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The lower the tread, the higher the
risk of skidding.
The effectiveness of snow tires is
lost if the tread wears down below
4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as
cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage, the tire
should be replaced.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be
properly repaired due to the size or
location of a cut or other damage, it
should be replaced. If you are not
sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not
continue driving. Driving even a short
distance can damage a tire beyond
repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years
old must be checked by a qualified
technician even if damage is not
obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they
have never or seldom been used.
This applies also to the spare tire and
tires stored for future use.

388

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

REPLACING YOUR TIRES
When replacing a tire, use a tire of
the same size and construction,
and the same or greater maximum
load as the originally installed
tires.
Using any other size or type of tire
may seriously affect handling, ride,
speedometer/odometer calibration,
ground clearance, and clearance between the body and tires or snow
chains.
Check that the maximum load of the
replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the
Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)
of either the front axle or the rear
axle, whichever is greater. As for the
maximum load of the tire, see the load
limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure mentioned on the sidewall
of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle
Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Certification Label.
For details about the side wall of the
tire and the Certification Label, see
pages 297 and 300.

CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an accident
may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted,
or bias−ply tires on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended
size, as this may cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,
or at least both of the front or rear
tires be replaced at a time as a set.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
343 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When a tire is replaced, the wheel
should always be balanced.
An unbalanced wheel may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Wheels
can get out of balance with regular
use and should therefore be balanced
occasionally.
When replacing a tubeless tire, the
air valve should also be replaced
with a new one.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have replaced your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” on page 174 in Section 1−7.

389

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Rotating tires

With a spare tire of the same
wheel type as the installed tires

With a spare tire of different
wheel type from the installed
tires

To equalize the wear and help extend tire life, Toyota recommends
that you rotate your tires according to the maintenance schedule.
(For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual
Supplement”.)
However, the most appropriate timing for tire rotation may vary according to your driving habits and
road surface conditions.
See “If you have a flat tire” on page
343 in Section 4 for tire change procedure.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment, out−
of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

390

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Installing snow tires and
chains
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure warning system is necessary
after you have rotated your tires.
See “Tire pressure warning system” on page 174 in Section 1−7.
CAUTION
Do not include a compact spare
tire when rotating the tires. It is
designed for temporary use only.

WHEN TO
CHAINS

USE

SNOW

TIRES

Snow tires or chains are recommended
when driving on snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional tires
provide better traction than snow tires.
SNOW TIRE SELECTION
If you need snow tires, select tires of
the same size, construction and load
capacity as the originally installed tires.
Do not use tires other than those mentioned above. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for
possible restrictions.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION
Snow tires should be installed on all
wheels.
Installing snow tires on the front wheels
only can lead to an excessive difference
in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of
vehicle control.
When storing removed tires you should
store them in a cool dry place. Mark the
direction of rotation and be sure to install
them in the same direction when replacing.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the snow tires

Do not use snow tires other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size, as
this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control. Otherwise, an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.

Never drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

incorrectly inflated.
with any type of snow tires.
TIRE CHAIN SELECTION
Use the tire chains of correct size.

391

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Side chain

Regulations regarding the use of tire
chains vary according to location or
type of road, so always check local regulations before installing chains.

NOTICE
Cross chain

If the wrong combination of tire and
chain is used, the chains could damage the vehicle body.
CHAIN INSTALLATION

Use the following type chains.
A
B
C
D
E
F

Diameter of side chain
Width of side chain
Length of side chain
Diameter of cross chain
Width of cross chain
Length of cross chain

mm (in.)
3 (0.12)
10 (0.39)
30 (1.18)
4 (0.16)
14 (0.55)
25 (0.98)

Install the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible. Do not use tire
chains on the rear tires. Retighten
chains
after
driving
0.5—1.0
km
(1/4—1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the instructions of the chain
manufacturer.
If wheel covers are used, they will be
scratched by the chain band, so remove
the covers before putting on the chains.

CAUTION

Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or
the chain manufacturer’s recommended speed limit, whichever is
lower.

Drive

carefully avoiding bumps,
holes, and sharp turns, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.

Avoid sharp turns or locked−wheel
braking, as use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.

When driving with chains installed,
be sure to drive carefully. Slow
down before entering curves to
avoid losing control of the vehicle.
Otherwise an accident may occur.

NOTICE
Do not attempt to use a tire chain on
the compact spare tire, as it may result in damage to the vehicle as well
as the tire.

392

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Replacing wheels
WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS
If you have wheel damage such as
bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the
wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,
the tire may slip off the wheel or cause
loss of handling control.
WHEEL SELECTION
When replacing wheels, care should be
taken to ensure that the wheels are replaced by ones with the same load capacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available
at your Toyota dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may
adversely affect handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow chain clearance to
the body and chassis.

Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent
wheels which have been straightened may
have structural damage and therefore
should not be used. Never use an inner
tube in a leaking wheel which is designed
for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION
Do not use wheels other than the
manufacturer’s recommended size, as
this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of
control. Otherwise, an accident may
occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Initial adjustment of the tire pressure
warning system is necessary after you
have replaced your wheels. See “Tire
pressure warning system” on page 174
in Section 1−7.

Aluminum wheel precautions
When installing aluminum wheels,
check that the wheel nuts are tight
after driving your vehicle the first 1600
km (1000 miles).

you have
changed your
wheel nuts are
1600 km (1000

rotated, repaired, or
tires, check that the
still tight after driving
miles).

When using tire chains, be careful not
to damage the aluminum wheels.

Use

only Toyota wheel nuts and
wrench designed for your aluminum
wheels.

When balancing your wheels, use only
Toyota balance weights or equivalent
and a plastic or rubber hammer.

As with any wheel, periodically check
your aluminum wheels for damage. If
damaged, replace immediately.

393

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

394

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

7− 3

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
Electrical components
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

396
397
398
399
400

395

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking battery condition—
—Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and
explosive hydrogen gas.

Do not cause a spark from the battery with tools.

Do not smoke or light a match near
the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin or
clothes.

Never ingest electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when
working near the battery.

Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES

If electrolyte gets in your eyes,
flush your eyes with clean water
immediately and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge
or cloth while en route to the medical office.

—Checking battery exterior
If electrolyte gets on your skin,

Terminals

thoroughly wash the contact area. If
you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes,
there is a
through to
ly take off
follow the
essary.

possibility of its soaking
your skin, so immediatethe exposed clothing and
procedure above, if nec-

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte, drink a large quantity of water
or milk. Follow with milk of magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable
oil. Then go immediately for emergency help.

Hold−down
clamp

Ground cable

Check the battery for corroded or loose
terminal connections, cracks, or loose
hold−down clamp.
a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off
with a solution of warm water and baking soda. Coat the outside of the terminals with grease to prevent further corrosion.
b. If the terminal connections are loose,
tighten their clamp nuts—but do not
overtighten.
c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only
enough to keep the battery firmly in
place. Overtightening may damage the
battery case.

396

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Checking battery condition
NOTICE
Be sure the engine and all accessories are off before performing maintenance.
When checking the battery, remove
the ground cable from the negative
terminal (“−” mark) first and reinstall it last.

Battery recharging precautions
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen gas.

Type A
Green

Dark

Clear or
light yellow

Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed
on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect
the ground cable.

Type B
Blue

White

Red

Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
Take care no solution gets into the
battery when washing it.

2. Be sure the power switch on the recharger is off when connecting the
charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.

CAUTION

Always charge the battery in an un-

CHECKING BY INDICATOR
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
Indicator color

Condition

Type A

Type B

Green

Blue

Good

Dark

White

Charging necessary.
Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

Clear or
light
yellow

Red

Have battery
checked by your
Toyota dealer.

confined area. Do not charge the
battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.

Only do a slow charge (5 A or
less). Charging at a quicker rate is
dangerous. The battery may explode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the
engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.

397

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Checking and replacing fuses

Good

Blown

Type A

Good

Type C

Blown

If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work, check the
fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,
they must be replaced.
See “Fuse locations” on page 374 in Section 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Good

Blown

Turn the ignition switch and inoperative
component off. Pull the suspected fuse
straight out and check it.
Determine which fuse may be causing the
problem. The lid of the fuse box shows
the name of the circuit for each fuse. See
page 412 in Section 8 for the functions
controlled by each circuit.

Type B

Type B fuses—When any of the fuses are
blown, contact your Toyota dealer.

398

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Adding washer fluid
Type A fuses can be pulled out by the
pull−out tool. The location of the pull−out
tool is shown in the illustration.
If you are not sure whether the fuse has
blown, try replacing the suspected fuse
with one that you know is good.
If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse
into the clip.
Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an
emergency you can pull out the “MIR
HTR” or “PWR OUTLET” fuse, which may
be dispensable for normal driving, and use
it if its amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is lower, but as close
to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse
might blow out again but this does not
indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get
the correct fuse as soon as possible and
return the substitute to its original clip.

If the new fuse immediately blows out,
there is a problem with the electrical system. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as
soon as possible.

CAUTION
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any other object, in
place of a fuse. This may cause extensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does
windshield washer
light comes on, the
empty. Add washer

not work or the low
fluid level warning
washer tank may be
fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.
However, in cold areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This
product is available at your Toyota dealer
and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to
mix with water.

NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any
other substitute because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of
spare fuses and keep them in your vehicle for emergencies.

399

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Replacing light bulbs—
The following illustrations show how to
gain access to the bulbs. When replacing
a bulb, make sure the ignition switch and
light switch are off. Use bulbs with the
wattage ratings given in the table.
The high mounted stoplight consists of a
number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn
out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not
replace the light bulbs while they
are hot.

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas
inside and require special handling.
They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb
only by its plastic or metal case.
Do not touch the glass part of a
bulb with bare hands.

NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights
such as headlights may temporarily fog up
when the lens becomes wet in the rain or
in a car wash. This is not a problem
because the fogging is caused by the
temperature difference between the outside
and inside of the lens, just like the
windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if
there is a large drop of water on the
inside of the lens, or if there is water
pooled inside the light, contact your
Toyota dealer.

Light bulbs
Headlights
(high)

Bulb
No.

Type

9005

Headlights (low)

—

Front side
marker lights

—

Front turn
signal/parking
lights

3457NAK

30/8

—

7443

21/5

Tail lights
(type A)

—

Tail lights
(type B)

194

3.8

—

Back−up lights

921

Front fog lights

—

Front personal
lights

—

Rear turn signal
lights
Stop/tail and
rear side
marker lights

License plate
lights

400

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Front fog, front turn
signal/parking, front side marker,
tail and back−up lights, and LED∗
type high mounted stoplight
Bulb
No.

Type

Rear personal
lights

—

Interior light

—

168

Vanity lights

—

Glove box light

—

1.2

Trunk light

—

3.8

Light bulbs

Door courtesy
lights

A:
B:
C:
D:
E:

HB3 halogen bulbs
H11 halogen bulbs
Wedge base bulbs (clear)
Wedge base bulbs (amber)
Double end bulbs

—Headlights

If either the left or right front fog, front
turn signal/parking, front side marker,
tail or back−up lights, or LED∗ type
high mounted stoplight burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE
Do not try to replace the front fog,
front turn signal/parking, front side
marker, tail or back−up light bulbs by
yourself. You may damage the vehicle.
∗:

Light−emitting Diode

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine only—
Before replacing the headlight bulbs,
remove the cover clips and take off the
cover.
Remove and install the cover clip as
shown in the following illustrations.

401

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Low beam (outside)
High beam
(inside)

Removing clip

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb base
counterclockwise to the front of the
vehicle as shown.

2. Unplug the connector while depressing the lock release.
If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

The above illustration shows the left−hand
headlight.

Installing clip

402

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

—Rear turn signal, stop/tail
and rear side marker lights

3. Plug in a new bulb into the connector and install it into the mounting
hole.

a: Rear turn signal light
b: Stop/tail and rear side marker light

Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

403

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

404

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

406
406
407
407
411
412

405

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Dimensions and weights

Engine

Overall length

mm (in.)

4805 (189.2)

Model:
2AZ−FE and 2GR−FE

Overall width

mm (in.)

1820

(71.7)

Type:

mm (in.)

1465
1470

(57.7)∗2
(57.9)∗3

mm (in.)

2775 (109.3)

Front tread

mm (in.)

1575

(62.0)

Rear tread

mm (in.)

1565

(61.6)

Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage)

2AZ−FE engine
88.5 96.0 (3.48 3.78)

kg (lb.)

410

(900)

2GR−FE engine
94.0 83.0 (3.70 3.27)

Towing capacity
(trailer weight + cargo weight)

kg (lb.)

Overall

height∗1

Wheelbase

∗1 :

Unladen vehicle
∗2 : With P215/55R17 tires
∗3 : With P215/60R16 tires

453 (1000)

2AZ−FE engine
4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
2GR−FE engine
6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):
2AZ−FE engine
2GR−FE engine

2362 (144.1)
3456 (210.9)

406

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Fuel

Service specifications

Fuel type:
Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87
(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

ENGINE

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

Oil capacity (drain and refill), L (qt., Imp.
qt.):

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):
70 (18.5, 15.4)

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
Intake
0.19—0.29 (0.007—0.011)
Exhaust
0.38—0.48 (0.015—0.019)
Spark plug type:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
DENSO
SK20R11
NGK
IFR6A11
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
DENSO
FK20HR11
Spark plug gap, mm(in.):
1.1 (0.043)

NOTICE
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine—Use only
above spark plugs. Do not adjust
gaps for engine performance or
smooth driveability.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
With filter
4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
Without filter
4.1 (4.3, 3.6)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
With filter
6.1 (6.4, 5.4)
Without filter
5.7 (6.0, 5.0)
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in
your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
to satisfy the following grade and
viscosity.
Oil grade:
ILSAC multigrade engine oil

407

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Recommended oil viscosity:
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
SAE 5W−30

COOLING SYSTEM
Total capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
6.2 (6.6, 5.5)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
9.0 (9.5, 7.9)
Coolant type:

Outside temperature
Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is
used in your Toyota vehicle at factory
fill. In order to avoid technical problems,
only use “Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,
non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with
long−life hybrid organic acid technology.
(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for
further details.

408

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

BATTERY

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Open voltage∗ at 20C (68F):
12.6—12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2—12.4 V
Half charged
11.8—12.0 V
Discharged

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,
Imp. qt.):

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed with all the lights
turned off

Charging rates:
5 A max.
Note: If replacement is necessary, make
sure to do so with a battery that meets
the same standard as the original.
CLUTCH
Pedal free play, mm (in.):
5—15 (0.2—0.6)
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):
2.5 (2.6, 2.2)
Oil type:
Gear oil API GL−4 or GL−5

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine
3.5 (3.7, 3.1)
3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine
6.57 (6.94, 5.78)∗
∗: The fluid capacity is the quantity of
reference. If replacement is necessary,
contact your Toyota dealer.

Notice: Using automatic transmission
fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF
Type WS” may cause deterioration in
shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and
ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.
Please contact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Fluid type:
Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS
Change automatic transmission fluid only
as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change
automatic transmission fluid only if your
vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions
listed
in your
“Scheduled
Maintenance
Guide”
or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When
changing the automatic transmission fluid,
use only “Toyota Genuine ATF Type WS”
(ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in
assuring optimum transaxle performance.

Recommended oil viscosity:
SAE 75W−90

409

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

BRAKES

STEERING

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed
with the force of 500 N (51 kgf, 112 lbf)
with the engine running, mm (in.):
Manual transmission models
63 (2.5)
Automatic transmission models
61 (2.4)

Wheel free play:
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid type:
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII
or III

Pedal free play, mm (in.):
1—6 (0.04—0.24)
Pad wear limit, mm (in.):
1.0 (0.04)
Parking brake
Lever type—
Parking brake adjustment when pulled
with the force of 200 N (20 kgf, 44
lbf):
7—9 clicks
Pedal type—
Parking brake adjustment when depressed with the force of 300 N (31
kgf, 67 lbf):
7—10 clicks
Fluid type:
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

410

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Tires
Tire size and cold tire inflation pressure:
Front and rear
kPa (kgf/cm 2 or bar, psi)
Front

Tire size

Rear

Wheel size

P215/60R16 94V

210 (2.1, 30)

16 6 1/2 J
16 6 1/2 JJ

P215/55R17 93V

220 (2.2, 32)

17 7 J

When driving under the above vehicle conditions at sustained high speeds above 160 km/h (100 mph), in countries
where such speeds are permitted by−law, inflate the front and rear tires to 240 kPa (2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar, 35 psi) provided
that it does not exceed the maximum cold tire inflation pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
Spare
kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi)
Tire size

Front

Rear

Wheel size

P215/60R16 94V

210 (2.1, 30)

16 6 1/2 J
16 6 1/2 JJ

P215/55R17 93V

220 (2.2, 32)

17 7 J

T155/70D17 110M

420 (4.2, 60)

17 4T

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):
103 (10.5, 76)
NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 385 through 393, in Section 7−2.

411

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Fuses
ENGINE COMPARTMENT

14. DOOR NO.1 25 A: Main body ECU

1. RR FOG 10 A: No circuit

15. AMP 25 A: Audio system

2. FR DEF 15 A (2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−
FE] engine): No circuit

16. EFI MAIN 30 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, electronic throttle control
system, “EFI NO.2” and “EFI NO.3”
fuses

3. AM2 7.5 A: Starting system
4. ALT−S 7.5 A: Charging system
5. MAYDAY/TEL 7.5 A: No circuit
6. E−ACM 10 A (3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine): No circuit
7. ETCS 10 A: Electronic throttle control
system
8. HAZ 15 A: Turn signal lights
9. IG2 20 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system,
starting
system,
“GAUGE
NO.2” and “IGN” fuses

17. EFI NO.3 10 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
18. EFI NO.2 15 A: Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
19. S−HORN 7.5 A: Horn
20. A/F 20 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system

10. STR LOCK 20 A: Steering lock system

21. MPX−B 10 A: Gages and meters

11. DOME 10 A: Gages and meters, vanity
lights, trunk light, ignition switch light,
door courtesy lights, interior light, personal lights, clock, smart key system

22. EFI NO.1 10 A: Theft deterrent system, smart key system, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, electronic throttle
control system

12. ECU−B NO.1 10 A: Wireless remote
control system, front passenger occupant classification system, main body
ECU, vehicle stability control system
13. RADIO NO.1 15 A: Audio system, navigation system

23. HORN 10 A: Horns
24. H−LP(RL) 15 A: Right−hand headlight
(low beam)
25. H−LP(LL) 15 A: Left−hand headlight
(low beam)

412

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

26. H−LP(RH) 15 A: Right−hand headlight
(high beam)
27. H−LP(LH) 15 A: Left−hand headlight
(high beam)
28. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system
29. ABS NO.1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system,
traction control system, brake assist
system
30. FAN MAIN 50 A (3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE]
engine): Electric cooling fans
31. ABS NO.2 30 A: Anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system,
traction control system, brake assist
system
32. RR DEF 50 A: Rear window defogger,
“MIR HTR” fuse
33. RR PWR SEAT 30 A: No circuit
34. H−LP CLN 30 A: No circuit
35. CDS FAN 40 A (2.4 L 4−cylinder
[2AZ−FE] engine): Electric cooling fans
36. RDI FAN 40 A (2.4 L 4−cylinder
[2AZ−FE] engine): Electric cooling fans

38. ALT 120 A: “RR FOG”, “FR DEF”,
“AM2”,
“ALT−S”,
“MAYDAY/TEL”,
“E−ACM”, “ETCS”, “HAZ”, “IG2”, “STR
LOCK”, “DOME”, “ECU−B NO.1”, “RADIO NO.1”, “EFI MAIN”, “AMP”, “DOOR
NO.1”, “EFI NO.3”, “EFI NO.2”, “S−
HORN”, “A/F”, “MPX−B”, “EFI NO.1”,
“HORN”, “H−LP(RL)”, “H−LP(LL)”, “H−
LP(RH)”, “H−LP(LH)”, “HTR”, “ABS
NO.1”, “FAN MAIN”, “ABS NO.2”, “RR
DEF”, “RR PWR SEAT”, “H−LP CLN”,
“CDS FAN”, “RDI FAN”, “MSB”, “ALT”
and “ST/AM2” fuses
39. ST/AM2 30 A: Starting system

INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. RR DOOR RH 25 A: Rear right power
window
2. RR DOOR LH 25 A: Rear left power
window
3. FUEL OPN 7.5 A: No circuit
4. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights
5. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis system
6. ECU−B NO.2 7.5 A: No circuit

37. MSB 30 A: No circuit

413

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

7. STOP 10 A: Stop lights, high mounted
stoplight, shift lock control system,
multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system, main
body ECU, anti−lock brake system, vehicle stability control system, traction
control system, brake assist system,
electronic throttle control system

17. ECU IG NO.2 7.5 A: Anti−lock brake
system, vehicle stability control system,
traction control system, brake assist
system, shift lock control system, automatic transmission, cruise control system

27. ECU−ACC 7.5 A: Clock, main body
ECU, shift lock control system, outside
rear view mirror, smart key system

18. A/C NO.2 10 A: Air conditioning system, rear window defogger

30. RADIO NO.2 7.5 A: Audio system,
navigation system

8. TI&TE 30 A: No circuit

19. WASH 10 A: Windshield wipers and
washer

31. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mirror defoggers

20. S−HTR 20 A: Seat heaters

32. POWER 30 A: Power windows

21. GAUGE NO.1 10 A: Emergency flashers, back−up lights, charging system

33. P/SEAT 30 A: Power seats

9. AM1 7.5 A: Starting system, multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
10. A/C 7.5 A: Air conditioning system
11. PWR 25 A: Power windows
12. DOOR NO.2 25 A: Main body ECU

22. WIP 25
washer

13. S/ROOF 30 A: Electric moon roof

23. H−LP LVL 7.5 A: No circuit

14. TAIL 15 A: Front side marker lights,
tail lights, rear side marker lights, license plate lights, front turn signal/
parking lights

24. INJ 15 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system

15. PANEL 7.5 A: Navigation system, seat
heaters, emergency flashers, air conditioning system, audio system, clock,
glove box light, instrument panel lights,
steering switches
16. ECU IG NO.1 10 A: Main body ECU,
electric moon roof, tire pressure warning system, electric cooling fans, auto
anti−glare inside rear view mirror

Windshield

wipers

28. CIG 20 A: Power outlet
29. PWR OUTLET 20 A: Power outlet

and

25. IGN 10 A: Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection
system, theft deterrent system, SRS
airbag system, steering lock system,
front passenger occupant classification
system, smart key system, electronic
throttle control system
26. GAUGE NO.2 7.5 A: Gages and meters, multi−information display, clock

414

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

SECTION

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS FOR U.S.
OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416

415

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

’07Camry_U (L/O 0601)

Reporting safety defects for
U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy
campaign.
However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor
Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline
toll−free at 1−800−424−9393 (or
366−0123 in Washington, D.C.
area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S.
Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

416

2007 CAMRY from Jan. ’06 Prod. (OM33669U)

Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of the Navigation System. Please read this manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual
in your vehicle at all times.
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle accessories ever developed. The system receives satellite
signals from the Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Using these signals and other vehicle
sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination.
The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your present starting location to your destination. The system is also designed
to direct you to a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system uses DENSO maps. The calculated routes may not
be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own personal local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculated
routes.
The navigation system’s database includes about 75 Point of Interest categories to allow you to easily select destinations such as restaurants
and banks. If a destination is not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersection close to it and the system will guide
you there.
The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio instructions will announce the distance remaining and the direction
to turn in approaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are timed to provide enough
time to allow you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down.
Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limitations that may affect their ability to perform properly.
The accuracy of the vehicle’s position depends on the satellite condition, road configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of the system, refer to pages 184 through 185.

Important information about
this manual

Safety Instruction

For safety reasons, this manual indicates
items requiring particular attention with the
following marks.

For your safety, some functions may become
inoperable when driving. Unavailable
touch−screen buttons are dimmed. Only
when the vehicle is not moving, can the destination and route selection be done.

CAUTION
This is a warning against anything
which may cause injury to people if the
warning is ignored. You are informed
about what you must or must not do in
order to reduce the risk of injury to
yourself and others.

NOTICE
This is a warning against anything
which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what
you must or must not do in order to
avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your vehicle and its equipment.

Prior to the actual use of this system, learn
how to use it and become thoroughly familiar
with it. Read the entire Navigation System
Owner’s Manual to make sure you understand the system. Do not allow other people
to use this system until they have read and
understood the instructions in this manual.

To use this system in the safest possible
manner, follow all the safety tips shown below.

CAUTION

This system is intended to assist in reaching
the destination and, if used properly, can do
so. The driver is solely responsible for the
safe operation of your vehicle and the safety
of your passengers.

For safety, the driver should not
operate the navigation system while
he/she is driving.
Insufficient
attention to the road and traffic may
cause an accident.

Do not use any feature of this system to the
extent it becomes a distraction and prevents
safe driving. The first priority while driving
should always be the safe operation of the
vehicle. While driving, be sure to observe all
traffic regulations.

While driving, be sure to obey the
traffic regulations and maintain
awareness of the road conditions. If
a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, route guidance may
provide wrong information such as
the direction of a one way street.

INFORMATION
This provides additional information.
ii

While driving, listen to the voice instructions
as much as possible and glance at the
screen briefly and only when it is safe. However, do not totally rely on voice guidance.
Use it just for reference. If the system cannot
determine the current vehicle position correctly, there is a possibility of incorrect, late,
or non−voice guidance.
The data in the system may occasionally be
incomplete. Road conditions, including driving restrictions (no left turns, street closures,
etc.) frequently change. Therefore, before
following any instruction from the system,
look to see whether the instruction can be
done safely and legally.
This system cannot warn about such things
as the safety of an area, condition of streets,
and availability of emergency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive
into it. Under no circumstances is this
system a substitute for the driver’s personal judgement.
Use this system only in locations where it is
legal to do so. Some states/provinces may
have laws prohibiting the use of video and
navigation screens next to the driver.

iii

Quick guide —
— Overview buttons and guidance screen
1
North−up or heading−up symbol
This symbol indicates a map view with
north−up or heading−up. Touching this symbol changes the map orientation. . . . . . . 17
2
Scale indicator
This figure indicates the map scale. . . . 15
3
“DISP” button
Push this button to display the “Display”
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
4
Zoom out touch−screen button
Touch this button to reduce the map scale.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
5
“Mark”
Touch this button to register the current position or the cursor position as a memory point.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
6
“Route”
Touch this button to change the route.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 54
7
“Map View”
Touch this button to browse information
about guidance route, to set the Points of Interest to be displayed on the screen, or to record the route. . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 59, 61, 61

8
“OFF”
Touch this button to obtain a broader view.
Some of the buttons on the screen are not
displayed. They are displayed again by
touching “ON”. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
9
Zoom in touch−screen button
Touch this button to magnify the map scale.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
10 Foot print map touch−screen button
Touch this button to display the foot print
map and the building information. . . . . . 15
11 “MAP/VOICE” button
Push this button to repeat a voice guidance,
cancel one touch scroll, start guidance, and
display the current position. . . . . . . . . 8, 50
12 “DEST” button
Push this button to display the “Destination”
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix, x, 20, 21
13 Screen configuration touch−screen
button
Touch this button to change the screen
mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
14 “MENU” button
Push this button to display the “Menu”
screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi, vii, 64

15 Distance and time to destination
Displays the distance, the estimated travel
time to the destination, and the estimated arrival time at the destination. . . . . . . . . . . 50
16 “INFO” button
Push this button to display the “Information”
screen. . . . . . . . . . 2, 92, 95, 102, 144, 146
17 “GPS” mark (Global Positioning
System)
Whenever the vehicle is receiving signals
from the GPS, this mark is displayed.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
18 Speech command system indicator
The microphone is shown by pushing the
speech command switch. The speech command system can be operated while this indicator is shown. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

— Registering home

0U5047
2. Touch “My Places”.

4. There are 13 different methods to
search your home.
See “Destination search” on page 21.

1. Push “MENU” button.

3. Touch “Register” of the home.
5. Touch “Enter”.
The “Memory Point” screen is displayed.

— Registering preset
destinations

0U5047
6. Touch “OK”.
Registration of home is complete.
You can change the icon, quick access,
name, location and phone number. (See “ —
Editing memory points” on page 72.)

2. Touch “My Places”.

1. Push “MENU” button.

3. Touch “Register” of the memory
points.

vii

4. There are 13 different methods to
search preset destinations.
See “Destination search” on page 21.

6. Touch “Quick Access”.

7. Touch one of preset buttons 1 to 5.
5. Touch “Enter”.
The “Memory Point” screen is displayed.

viii

8. Touch “OK”.
Registration of preset destinations is complete.
You can change the icon, quick access,
name, location and phone number. (See “ —
Editing memory points” on page 72.)

— Operation flow: guiding
the route

0U5048
2. There are 13 different methods to
search destinations.
See “Destination search” on page 21.
1. Push “DEST” button.

3. Touch “Enter”.
The navigation system performs a search
for the route.

4. Touch “Guide”, and start driving.
Routes other than the one recommended
can also be selected. (See “Starting route
guidance” on page 40.)
5. Guidance to the destination is given
via voice and on the guidance screen.

— Setting home as the
destination

0U5048
2. Touch

1. Push “DEST” button.

The
can be used if your home has been
registered. (To register “Home”, see “ —
Registering home” on page 76.)

3. Touch “Enter”.
The navigation system performs a search
for the route.
x

BASIC FUNCTIONS

SECTION

BASIC FUNCTIONS
Basic information before operation
Initial screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Touch screen operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Inputting letters and numbers/List screen operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Function help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Map screen operation Current position display Screen scroll operation Switching
the screens Map scale Foot print map Orientation of the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Current position display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Screen scroll operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Switching the screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Map scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Foot print map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Orientation of the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

BASIC FUNCTIONS

Maintenance information

Initial screen

This system informs about when to replace
certain parts or components and shows dealer information (if registered) on the screen.
When the vehicle reaches a previously set
driving distance or date specified for a scheduled maintenance check, the “Information”
screen will be displayed when the navigation
system is in operation.

When the ignition switch is set at ACC or ON,
the initial screen will be displayed and the
system will begin operating.

CAUTION
When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, always apply the parking
brake for safety.
After a few seconds, the “CAUTION” screen
will be displayed.

Touch “English”, “Français” or “Español”
to select a language.
When “I Agree” is touched on the screen,
the map screen will be displayed.
The “CAUTION” screen will be displayed
when the “INFO” button is pushed and “Language” is touched. Then select a language.
(See “Selecting a language” on page 147.)
To disable this screen, touch “Do Not
Display This Message Again.”.
This
screen goes off if the screen is not operated for several seconds.
To prevent this information screen from being
displayed again, touch “Do Not Display This
Message Again.”.
To register “Maintenance information”, see
“Maintenance information” on page 92.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

Memo information

Touch screen operation

This system notifies about a memo entry. At
the specified date, the memo information will
be displayed when the navigation system is in
operation. The memo information screen will
be displayed every time the system is turned
on.

This system is operated mainly by the touch−
screen buttons on the screen.
To prevent damage to the screen, lightly
touch buttons on the screen with the finger. When a button on the screen is
touched, a beep sounds.
Do not use objects other than the finger to
touch the screen.

When you look at the screen through
polarised material such as polarised
sunglasses, the screen may be dark
and hard to see. If so, change the
angle of the screen or take off your
sunglasses.

INFORMATION
If the system does not respond to a
touch on a touch−screen button,
move the finger away from the screen
and then touch it again.
The memo of the current date can be
viewed by touching “Memo”. (See “ —
Editing a memo” on page 97.)
To disable this screen, touch “Do Not
Display This Message Again.”.
This
screen goes off if the screen is not operated for several seconds.
To prevent this information screen from being
displayed again, touch “Do Not Display This
Message Again.”.
To register “Memo information”, see “Calendar with memo” on page 95.

Dimmed touch−screen buttons cannot be operated.
Wipe off fingerprints using a glass
cleaning cloth. Do not use chemical
cleaners to clean the touch screen.
The displayed image may become
darker and moving images may be
slightly distorted when the display is
cold.
Under extremely cold conditions, the
map may not be displayed and the
data input by a user may be deleted.
Also, the touch−screen buttons may
be harder than usual to depress.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

Inputting letters and
numbers/List screen
operation

To input letters
To display the alphabet keys, touch “A−Z” or

“

On certain letter entry screens, letters can be
entered in upper or lower case.

”.

When searching for an address or a name, or
entering a memo, letters and numbers can be
input via the touch screen.

INFORMATION
Keyboard layout can be changed. (See
page 83.)

Enter letters by touching the alphabet keys directly.
:

Touching this button erases one letter. By holding this button, letters
will continue to be erased.

To enter in lower case.

To enter in upper case.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

To input numbers and symbols

To display the list

To display the number keys and symbol keys,
touch “0−9”.

Enter numbers and symbols by touching the
number keys and symbol keys directly.
:

Touching this button erases
one letter. By holding this
button, letters will continue to
be erased.

To search for an address or a name, touch
“List”. Matching items from the database are
listed even if the entered address or name is
incomplete.

If the number of matches is four or less, the list
is displayed without touching “List”.

INFORMATION
The number of matching items is shown
to the right side of the screen. If the
number of matching items is more than
9,999, the system displays “∗∗∗∗” on
the screen.

: Touching this button displays
other symbols.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

List screen operation
When a list is displayed, use the appropriate
button to scroll through the list.

If
appears to the right of the
item name, the complete name is
too long for the display. Touch
to scroll to the end of the name.

Sorting
The order of a list displayed on the screen can
be rearranged.
TYPE A

Touch
to scroll to the beginning
of the name.

To shift to the next or previous
page.
To scroll up or down one item at a
time.
This expresses a displayed
screen position.

1. Touch “Sort by”.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

TYPE B

Function help
Explanations for the functions of the “Destination”, “Setup” and “Menu” screens can be
viewed.

2. Select the desired sorting criteria.
Sorting criteria are as follows:
“Distance”: To sort in the order of distance
from your current location.
“Date”: To sort in the order of the date.
“Category”: To sort in the order of the category.
“Icon”: To sort in the order of the icons.
“Name”: To sort in order by name.
“Attribute”: To sort in order by attribute.

“Dist. Sort”: To sort in the order of distance
from the current vehicle location. The distance from current vehicle position up to the
destination is displayed to the right of the
name.
“Name Sort”: To sort in alphabetical order by
name.

Touch

BASIC FUNCTIONS

Map screen operation —
— Current position display
When starting the navigation system, the current position is displayed first.
This screen displays the current vehicle position and a map of the surrounding local area.

The current position is automatically set as
the vehicle receives signals from the GPS
(Global Positioning System). If the current
position is not correct, it is automatically corrected after the vehicle receives signals from
the GPS.

INFORMATION

:
:

After battery disconnection, or on a
new vehicle, the current position may
not be correct. As soon as the system
receives signals from the GPS, the
correct current position is displayed.

To view the previous page.
To view the next page.

To correct the current position manually, see page 88.

: To return to the previous screen.

The current vehicle position mark ( 1 ) appears in the center or bottom center of the
map screen.
A street name will appear on the bottom of the
screen, depending on the scale of the map
( 2 ).
You can return to this map screen that shows
your current position at any time from any
screen by pushing the “MAP/VOICE” button.
While driving, the current vehicle position
mark is fixed on the screen and the map
moves.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

— Screen scroll operation
(one−touch scroll)
When any point on the map is touched, that
point moves to the center of the screen and is
shown by the cursor mark ( 1 ).

After the screen is scrolled, the map remains
centered at the selected location until another
function is activated. The current vehicle
position mark will continue to move along
your actual route and may move off the
screen. When the “MAP/VOICE” button is
pushed, the current vehicle position mark returns to the center of the screen and the map
moves as the vehicle proceeds along the designated route.

To set the cursor position as a destination
A specific point on the map can be set as a
destination using the one−touch scroll function.

INFORMATION

Use the scroll feature to move the desired
point to the center of the screen for looking at
a point on the map that is different from the
current position of the vehicle.
If the finger is continuously held on the
screen, the map will continue scrolling in that
direction until the finger is removed.
A street name, city name, etc. of the touched
point will be shown, depending on the scale
of the map ( 2 ). Distance from the current
will also be shown ( 3 ).
position to

When the one−touch scroll feature is
used, the current vehicle position mark
may disappear from the screen. Move
the map with a one−touch scroll again or
push the “MAP/VOICE” button to return
to the current vehicle position map location display.

Touch “Enter ”.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
If there is already a set destination, “Add to
” and “Replace ” are displayed.
“Add to

”: To add a destination.

“Replace ”: To delete the existing destinations and set a new one.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

To see information about the icon

To register the cursor position as a
memory point
Memory point registration enables easy access to a specific point.

Touch “Mark”.
When you touch “Mark”, the following screen
appears for a few seconds, and then the map
screen returns.

where the cursor is set

The registered point is shown by
on the
map.
To change the icon or name, etc., see “ —
Editing memory points” on page 72.
Up to 106 memory points can be registered.
If there is an attempt to register more than
106, a message appears for confirmation.

To display information about an icon, set the
cursor on it.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

POI INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a POI icon, the
name and “Info.” are displayed on the top of
the screen.

If there is already a set destination, “Add to
” and “Replace ” are displayed.
“Add to

”: To add a destination.

“Replace ”: To delete the existing destinations and set a new one.
To register this POI as a memory point, touch
“Mark”. (See page 71.)

MEMORY POINT INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a memory point
icon, the name and “Info.” are displayed on
the top of the screen.

If
is touched, the registered telephone
number can be called.

INFORMATION
Touch “Info.”.

The desired Point of Interest can be displayed on the map screen. (See “ — Display POI icons” on page 57.)

Touch “Info.”.

Information such as the name, address, and
phone number are displayed.

If “Enter ” is touched, the position of the
cursor is set as a destination.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

If there is already a set destination, “Add to
” and “Replace ” are displayed.
“Add to

”: To add a destination.

“Replace ”: To delete the existing destinations and set a new one.
To edit a memory point, touch “Edit”. (See “
— Editing memory points” on page 72.)
To delete a memory point, touch “Delete”.

DESTINATION INFORMATION
When the cursor is set on a destination icon,
the name and “Info.” are displayed on the top
of the screen.

is touched, the registered telephone
If
number can be called.

Information such as the name, address, and
phone number are displayed.
To delete a destination, touch “Delete”.
Touch “Info.”.

is touched, the registered telephone
If
number can be called.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

— Switching the screens
Any one of the screen configurations can be
selected .

Depending on the conditions, certain screen
configuration buttons cannot be selected.
: To display the single map screen.
(See page 13.)
: To display the dual map screen. (See
page 14.)

Screen configurations
SINGLE MAP
This is a regular map screen.
While on a different screen, touching
will display the single map screen.

: To display the compass mode
screen. (See page 14.)
: To display the turn list screen. (See
page 48.)

1. Touch this button to display the following screen.

: To display the arrow screen. (See
page 48.)
: To display the freeway information
screen. (See page 47.)
: To display the intersection guidance
screen or the guidance screen on the
freeway. (See page 47.)

The screen shows the single map.

2. To select the desired screen configuration, touch one of the following buttons.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

DUAL MAP
A map can be displayed split in two.

COMPASS MODE
Current vehicle position is indicated with a
compass, not with a map.

While on a different screen, touching
will display the dual map screen.

The screen shows the dual map. The map on
the left is the main map.
The right side map can be edited by touching
any specific point on the right side map.

While on a different screen, touching
will display the compass mode screen.

This screen can perform the following procedures:
1. Changing the map scale
2. Displaying the POI icon
3. Changing the orientation of the map
Touch “OK” when you complete editing.
The screen returns to the dual map screen.

Information about the destination and current
position, as well as a compass, is displayed
on the screen.
The destination mark is displayed in the direction of the destination. When driving refer to
the longitude and latitude coordinates, and
the compass, to make sure that your vehicle
is headed in the direction of the destination.

INFORMATION
When the vehicle travels out of the coverage area, the guidance screen
changes to the compass mode screen.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

— Map scale

INFORMATION
When the map scale is at the maximum
range of 250 miles (400 km),
is not
shown. When the map scale is at the
minimum range of 150 feet (50 m),
is not shown. In areas where the foot
print map is available the map scale
changes from
to
when at
the minimum range.

Foot print map
For the area which is covered by the foot print
map (Some areas in the following cities:
Detroit, Chicago, N.Y., L.A), you can switch to
the foot print map on a scale of 75 feet (25 m).
To switch to the foot print map
changes into
when the map is
scaled down to 150 feet (50 m).

Touch
or
to change the scale of
the map display. The scale bar and indicator
at the bottom of the screen indicates the map
scale menu. The scale range is 150 feet (50
m) to 250 miles (400 km).
or
until the scale bar
Touch
changes normally. By continuing to touch the
button, the scale bar changes smoothly.
The scale of the map display can be changed
by touching the scale bar directly. It is not
available while driving.
The map scale is displayed under the north−
up symbol or heading−up symbol at the top
left of the screen.

To display the foot print map, touch

To delete the foot print map display, touch
.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

INFORMATION
If the map or the current position is
moved to the area which is not covered by the foot print map, the screen
scale automatically changes to 150
feet (50 m).

To display building information
Information is available only for buildings for
which information is recorded on the map
disc.

On the foot print map, a one way
street is displayed by
.
It is not possible to perform scrolling
on the foot print map (one−touch
scroll) while driving.

2. Using the eight−direction arrow, move
the cursor to the position of the building to
display building information.
3. Touch “Building Info.”.
1. Touch “Info.” while the foot print map
is displayed.
If the map is displayed by a split screen, the
map will change into a single map display.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

— Orientation of the map

North−up symbol
Regardless of the direction of vehicle travel,
North is always up.
Heading−up symbol
The direction of vehicle travel is always up.
A red arrow indicates North.

Details of POIs in some buildings may be displayed.
For detailed POI information, touch the building name. You can see details of the selected
POIs.

North−up screen

Heading−up screen
The orientation of the map can be changed
from North−up to Heading−up by touching the
orientation symbol at the top left of the screen.

BASIC FUNCTIONS

DESTINATION SEARCH

SECTION

DESTINATION SEARCH
Destination search
Quick reference (“Destination” screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Destination search Selecting the search area Destination search by Home
Destination search by Quick access Destination search by “Address”
Destination search by “POI Name” Destination search by “POI Category”
Destination search by “Emergency” Destination search by “Memory”
Destination search by “Previous” Destination search by “Map” Destination
search by “Intersection” Destination search by “Freeway Ent./Exit” Destination
search by “Coordinates” Destination search by “Phone #” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selecting the search area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Destination search by Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Destination search by Quick access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Destination search by “Address” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Destination search by “POI Name” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Destination search by “POI Category” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Destination search by “Emergency” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Destination search by “Memory” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Destination search by “Previous” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Destination search by “Map” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Destination search by “Intersection” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Destination search by “Freeway Ent./Exit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Destination search by “Coordinates” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Destination search by “Phone #” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Starting route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

DESTINATION SEARCH

Quick reference (“Destination” screen)

1
“Address”
A house number and the street address can
be input by using the input keys. . . . . . . . 24
2
“POI Name”
Select one of the many POIs (Points of Interest) that have already been stored in the system’s database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3
“POI Category”
A destination can be selected from the POI
category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4
“Previous”
A destination can be selected from any of the
last 100 previously set destinations and from
the previous starting point. . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
5
“Memory”
The location can be selected from the registered “Memory points”. (To register memory
points, see “ — Registering memory points”
on page 71.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6
“Emergency”
One of the four categories of emergency service points that are already stored in the system’s database can be selected. . . . . . . . 35

DESTINATION SEARCH
7
“Map”
A destination can be selected simply by
touching the location on the displayed map.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8
“Intersection”
The names of two intersecting streets can be
entered. This is helpful if only the general vicinity, not the specific address, is known.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9
“Freeway Ent./Exit”
The name of a freeway (interstate) entrance
or exit can be entered. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
10 “?”
Function help for the “Destination” screen can
be viewed on this screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
11 “Change”
To change the search area, touch this button.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
12 Quick access touch−screen buttons
One of 5 preset destinations can be selected
by touching the screen directly. To use this
function, it is necessary to set the “Quick
Access” for each memory point. (To register
a “Quick Access”, see “ — Editing memory
points” on page 72.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

13 Home touch−screen button
A personal home address can be selected
without entering the address each time. To
use this function, it is necessary to set “Home”
for the memory point. (To register “Home”,
see “ — Registering home” on page 76.)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
14 “Phone #”
A destination can be entered by the telephone
number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
15 “Coordinates”
A destination can be set by using latitude and
longitude as coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Destination search —
Push the “DEST” button and the “Destination” screen appears.

You can use one of 13 different methods to
search your destination. (See pages 24
through 40.)

INFORMATION
When searching the destination, the response to the touch−screen button may
be slow.

DESTINATION SEARCH

SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ON THE
INPUT SCREEN
Change the search area in order to set a destination from a different area by using “Address”, “POI Name”, “Freeway Ent./Exit” or
“Intersection”.

— Selecting the search area
SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA ON THE
DESTINATION SCREEN

1. Touch “Change” on the “Destination”
screen to display a map of the United
States and Canada divided into 11 areas.
(For map database information and updates,
see “Map database information and updates”
on page 186.)

2. Touch one of “US1” through “CAN” to
select a search area.
3. Touch “OK” and the “Destination”
screen returns.

1. Touch the search area button like
“US8” on the input screen to display a
map of the United States and Canada divided into 11 areas. (For map database information and updates, see “Map database
information and updates” on page 186.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

“US7”

Arkansas
Alabama
Louisiana
Mississippi
Tennessee

“US8”

Connecticut
Massachusetts
Maine
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New York
Rhode Island
Vermont

“US9”

Washington, D.C.
Delaware
Maryland
New Jersey
Pennsylvania
Virginia
West Virginia

“US10”

Florida
Georgia
North Carolina
South Carolina

Button

Provinces and regions included in
the search area

“CAN”

All provinces and regions in
Canada included in this button.

U.S.A.

2. Touch one of “US1” through “CAN” to
select a search area.
3. Touch “OK” and the previous screen
returns.

Button

States included in the search area

“US1”

Idaho
Oregon
Washington

“US2”

California
Nevada

“US3”

Arizona
Colorado
Montana
New Mexico
Utah
Wyoming

“US4”

Iowa
Kansas
Minnesota
Missouri
North Dakota
Nebraska
South Dakota

“US5”

Oklahoma
Texas

“US6”

Illinois
Indiana
Kentucky
Michigan
Ohio
Wisconsin

Canada

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by
Home

— Destination search by
Quick access

— Destination search by
“Address”
There are 2 ways to input a destination by address.
Touch “Address” on the “Destination”
screen.

Touch the home touch−screen button on
the “Destination” screen.
The screen changes and displays the map
location for home and the route preference.
(See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
To use this function, it is necessary to set
“Home” for the memory point. (To register
“Home”, see page 76.)

INFORMATION
Guidance starts from the current vehicle
position to your home if “Enter” is
touched even while driving.

Touch any of the quick access touch−
screen buttons on the “Destination”
screen.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the quick access point and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
To use this function, it is necessary to set
“Quick Access” for each memory point. (To
register “Quick Access”, see page 73.)

INFORMATION
Guidance starts from the current vehicle
position to the quick access point if “Enter” is touched even while driving.

DESTINATION SEARCH

(a) Inputting a house number and a street
name

2. Input the street name.
1. Touch numbers directly on the screen
to input a house number.
After inputting a house number, touch “OK”
to display the screen for inputting a street
name.
It is possible to input a street name first.
Touch “Street” to display the screen for inputting a street name.

3. When the desired street name is found,
touch the corresponding button.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
If the same address exists in more than one
city, the current screen changes to the city list
screen.

DESTINATION SEARCH

4. Select or enter the desired city.
“Input Name”: To narrow down the listed
items by inputting the city name.

If inputting a street name first, the screen
changes. The house number can then be input.

If the above screen appears, an address
range on the screen can be selected.

If the same address exists in more than one
city, the current screen changes to the city list
screen.

DESTINATION SEARCH

(b) Selecting a city to search

Touch “City”.

INPUTTING THE CITY NAME
1. Touch “Input City Name”.

To search by city, the following three methods
are possible.
1. Input the city name
2. Select from the nearest 5 cities
3. Select from the last 5 cities

2. Input a city name.

INFORMATION
To change the search area, touch
“Search Area”.
To cancel the city setting, touch “Any
City”.

DESTINATION SEARCH

SELECTING FROM THE NEAREST 5
CITIES
1. Touch “Nearest 5 Cities”.

3. Touch the button of the desired city
name from the displayed list.
“Map”: To display the selected destination
and the route preference. (See “Starting
route guidance” on page 40.)
The current screen changes to the screen for
inputting a house number or a street name.
(See “(a) Inputting a house number and a
street name” on page 25.)

2. Touch the button of the desired city
name from the displayed list.
The current screen changes to the screen for
inputting a house number or a street name.
(See “(a) Inputting a house number and a
street name” on page 25.)

SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES

Touch the button of the desired city name.
If the navigation has not be used, no cities will
be displayed on the screen.
The current screen changes to the screen for
inputting a house number or a street name.
(See “(a) Inputting a house number and a
street name” on page 25.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by “POI
Name”
1. Touch “POI Name” on the “Destination” screen.

2. Input the name of the Point of Interest.

3. Touch the button of the desired destination.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
When inputting the name of a specific Point of
Interest, and there are two or more sites with
the same name, the list screen is displayed.

Touch the button of the desired destination.
If the same name exists in more than one city,
a search can be performed more easily with
“City” and “Category”. (See “(a) Selecting
a city to search” on page 30 and “(b) Selecting from the categories” on page 31.)

INFORMATION
The desired Point of Interest can be displayed on the map screen. (See “ — Display POI icons” on page 57.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

(a) Selecting a city to search

Touch “City”.

INPUTTING THE CITY NAME
1. Touch “Input City Name”.

To search by city, the following three methods
are possible.
1. Input the city name
2. Select from the nearest 5 cities
3. Select from the last 5 cities

2. Input the city name.

INFORMATION
To change the search area, touch
“Search Area”.
To cancel the city setting, touch “Any
City”.

3. Touch the button of the desired city
name from the displayed list.

DESTINATION SEARCH

SELECTING FROM THE NEAREST 5
CITIES
1. Touch “Nearest 5 Cities”.

2. Touch the button of the desired city
name.

SELECTING FROM THE LAST 5 CITIES

(b) Selecting from the categories

Touch the button of the desired city name.
If the navigation has not be used, no cities will
be displayed on the screen.

Touch “Category”.

If the desired POI category is on the screen,
touch the name to display a detailed list of the
POI category.
If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list all
POI categories.

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by “POI
Category”

INPUTTING THE CITY CENTER
1. Touch “Input City Center”.

The destination can be set by selecting the
search point and the POI category.
Touch “POI Category” on the “Destination” screen.

When the desired category is touched, the
POI name list screen or POI name input
screen is displayed.

2. Input the city center name.

Set the search point by the following
method:
1. Input the city center
2. Set the current position as the search
point
3. Set the search point via the map screen
4. Set the search point from any destination
It is possible to display the names of POIs located within approximately 20 miles (32 km)
from the selected search point.

3. Touch the button of the desired city
center name.

DESTINATION SEARCH

SETTING THE CURRENT POSITION AS
THE SEARCH POINT
Touch “Current Position”.
The search point is set at the current position,
and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed.

When an arrow facing the desired point is
touched, the map scrolls in that direction. Releasing the finger from the arrow will stop the
scrolling.
4. Touch “Enter”.
The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed.

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT VIA THE
MAP SCREEN
1. Touch “Map”.

When an arrow facing the desired point is
touched, the map scrolls in that direction. Releasing the finger from the arrow will stop the
scrolling.
2. Touch “Enter”.
The search point is set and the “POI Category” screen will be displayed.

DESTINATION SEARCH

SETTING THE SEARCH POINT FROM
DESTINATIONS
1. Touch the destination buttons at the
bottom of the screen.

To search POIs near the search point
When the search point is set, the “POI Category” screen will be displayed.

Select the desired POI categories.
“List”: If the desired POI categories have already been selected, a list of POI will be displayed from among the selected categories.
The selected category icon appears on the
top left of the screen.
If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list all
POI categories.

Select the desired POI categories from the
list and touch “OK”.
The selected category icon appears on the
top left of the screen.

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by
“Emergency”

“Select Category”: To return to the POI
category selection screen.
“Show List”: To display the list of POIs in the
selected categories.

By touching the button of the desired item, the
screen changes and displays the map location of the selected destination and the route
preference. (See “Starting route guidance”
on page 40.)
The direction arrows of POIs are displayed
only when the current position is set as the
search point.
“On Route”: When the indicator is illuminated by touching this button, the list of the
items searched along the route is displayed.

1. Touching “Emergency” on the “Destination” screen.
The display changes to a screen to select police stations, dealers, hospitals or fire stations. While driving, only nearby police stations, dealers, hospitals, or fire stations are
shown. The current position is shown with an
address, and the latitude and the longitude at
the top of the screen.

2. Touch the desired emergency category.
The selected emergency category list is displayed.

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by
“Memory”

— Destination search by
“Previous”

1. Touch “Memory” on the “Destination”
screen.
A list of registered memory points is displayed. (To register or edit memory points,
see “My places” on page 70.)

1. Touch “Previous” on the “Destination”
screen.

3. Touch the button of the desired destination.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)

INFORMATION
The navigation system does not guide in
areas where route guidance is unavailable. (See page 185.)

2. Touch the button of your desired
memory point.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)

The previous starting point and up to 100 previously set destinations are displayed on the
screen.
2. Touch the button of the desired destination.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

INFORMATION
The list of previous destinations can be
deleted when the vehicle is stopped.
(See “ — Deleting previous points” on
page 80.)

— Destination search by
“Map”

— Destination search by
“Intersection”

Touch “Map” on the second page of the
“Destination” screen.

1. Touch “Intersection” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.

The screen changes and displays the map
location that was previously displayed just
before the destination input operation and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)

2. Input the name of the two intersecting
streets which are located near the destination to be set.

INFORMATION
Guidance starts if “Enter” is touched
even while driving. However, the cursor
cannot be moved.

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by
“Freeway Ent./Exit”
1. To input a freeway entrance or exit,
touch “Freeway Ent./Exit” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.

3. Touch the button of the desired item.
After inputting the two intersecting streets,
the screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)

If the same two streets cross at more than one
intersection, the screen changes and displays the menu to select the city name where
the streets intersect. Select the city, and the
map location of the selected destination and
the route preference. (See “Starting route
guidance” on page 40.)

Be sure to use the complete name of the freeway or highway, including the hyphen, when
entering the destination. Freeways and interstates use an “I” (I−405). US highways use
the state designation before the number
(CA−118).

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by
“Coordinates”
1. Touch “Coordinates” on the second
page of the “Destination” screen.

2. Select the desired freeway by touching
the button.

3. Either a freeway “Entrance” or “Exit”
can be selected.

4. Touch the button of the desired entrance or exit name.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
“Input Name”: An applicable list is displayed
by touching this button and inputting the
name.

2. Input the latitude and the longitude.
3. When the input is finished, touch
“OK”.
By touching the button of the desired point,
the screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)

DESTINATION SEARCH

— Destination search by
“Phone #”

Starting route guidance
After inputting the destination, the screen
changes and displays the map location of the
selected destination and the route preference.

1. Touch “Phone #” on the second page
of the “Destination” screen.

INFORMATION

2. Input a telephone number.
3. After inputting a telephone number,
touch “OK”.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and the
route preference. (See “Starting route guidance” on page 40.)
If there is more than one site having the same
number, the following screen will be displayed.

If there is no match for the telephone
number inputted, a list of identical
numbers with different area codes
will be displayed.
To set a memory point as a destination using the phone number, the
number must be registered previously. (See page 75.)

1. When an arrow facing the desired
point is touched, the map scrolls in that direction.
Releasing the finger from the arrow will stop
the scrolling.

DESTINATION SEARCH

2. Touch “Enter”.
The system starts route search and displays
recommended routes.
If there is already a set destination, “Add to
” and “Replace ” are displayed.
“Add to

INFORMATION
Guidance can be suspended or resumed. (See “Suspending and resuming guidance” on page 66.)
If “Guide” is touched until a beep
sounds, demo mode will start. Push
the “MAP/VOICE” button to finish
Demo mode.

”: To add a destination.

“Replace ”: To delete the existing destinations and set a new one.
“Route Preference”: To change the route
preference. (See page 42.)
“Info.”: If this button is displayed on the top
of the screen, touch it to view items such as
name, address, and phone number.

Current position
2
Destination point
3
Type of the route and the distance
4
Distance of the entire route
3. To start guidance, touch “Guide”.
“3 Routes”: To select the desired route from
three possible routes. (See page 43.)
“Route”: To change the route. (See pages
51 and 54.)

The route for returning may not be the
same as that for going.
The route guidance to the destination
may not be the shortest route nor a
route without traffic congestion.
Route guidance may not be available
if there is no road data for the specified location.
When setting the destination on a
map with a scale larger than 0.5 miles
(500 m), the map scale changes to 0.5
miles (500 m) automatically. Set the
destination again.
If a destination is entered, the road
nearest to the point you selected is
set as the destination.

DESTINATION SEARCH

CAUTION
Be sure to obey traffic regulations and
keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been
changed, the route guidance may provide wrong information.

To change the route before starting
guidance
ROUTE PREFERENCE

3. After choosing the desired route preference, touch “OK”.

INFORMATION
Even if the “Allow Freeway” indicator
is dimmed, the route cannot avoid including a freeway in some cases.
If the calculated route includes a trip
by ferry, the route guidance shows a
sea route. After you travel by ferry,
the current vehicle position may be
incorrect. Upon reception of GPS signals, it is automatically corrected.
1. You can change route preference by
touching “Route Preference”.

2. Select the desired route preference by
touching the button.
When searching for a route, the system will
avoid routes when the indicator is off.

DESTINATION SEARCH

3 ROUTES SELECTION

“Short”: A route by which you can reach the
destination in the shortest distance.
This route is indicated by a green line.
“Info.”: To display the following information
about each of the 3 routes.

1. To select the desired route from three
routes, touch “3 Routes”.

1
2
3
4
5

Time necessary for the entire trip
Distance of the entire trip
Toll road
Freeway
Ferry

2. Touch “Quick1”, “Quick2” or “Short”
to select the desired route.
“Quick1”: Recommended route.
This route is indicated by an orange line.
“Quick2”: Alternative route.
This route is indicated by a purple line.

DESTINATION SEARCH

ROUTE GUIDANCE

SECTION

III

ROUTE GUIDANCE
Route guidance
Route guidance screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Typical voice guidance prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distance and time to destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting and deleting destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reordering destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Search condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Detour setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting route from adjacent road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Map view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display POI icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Route trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

46
48
50
51
51
52
53
54
54
54
55
56
57
57
59
61
61

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Route guidance screen
During route guidance, various types of guidance screens can be displayed depending on
conditions.
Screen layout

INFORMATION
If the vehicle goes off the guidance
route, the route is searched again.
For some areas, the roads have not
been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select road that should not
be traveled on.

During freeway driving
During freeway driving, the freeway exit information screen will be displayed.
This screen displays the distance to the next
junction and exit, or POIs in the vicinity of the
freeway exit.

When you arrive at your destination,
the destination name will be displayed on the top of the screen.
Touching “OFF” clears the display.

1
2
3
4
5

Distance to the next turn and the arrow indicating turning direction
Current street name
Distance and travel/arrival time to the
destination
Current position
Guidance route

1
2
3
4
5

Current position
Points of Interest that are close to a
freeway exit
Exit number and junction name
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
Current street name

ROUTE GUIDANCE

: To display the selected map of the exit
vicinity.
: To scroll for farther junctions or exits.

When approaching a freeway exit or

When approaching an intersection

junction
When the vehicle approaches an exit or junction, the guidance screen for the freeway will
be displayed.

When the vehicle approaches an intersection, the intersection guidance screen will be
displayed.

: To scroll for closer junctions or exits.
: To scroll for the closest three junctions
or exits.

Road/area name
2
Distance from the current position to
the exit or junction
3
Current position
“OFF”: The guidance screen on freeway disappears and the map screen appears.
or pushing the “MAP/
When touching
VOICE” button, the guidance screen on freeway reappears.

Next street name
Distance to the intersection
3
Current position
“OFF”: The intersection guidance screen
disappears and the map screen appears.
2

or pushing the “MAP/
When touching
VOICE” button, the intersection guidance
screen reappears.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Other screens
TURN LIST SCREEN
On this screen, the list of turns on the guidance route can be viewed.
Touching
turn list.

during guidance displays the

ARROW SCREEN
On this screen, information about next turns
on the guidance route can be viewed.
during guidance displays the
Touching
arrow screen.

Typical voice guidance
prompts
The voice guidance provides various messages as you approach an intersection, or
other point where you need to maneuver the
vehicle.

4.7 miles
0.25 miles
+α

1
1
2
3
4

Next street name or destination name
Turn direction
Distance between turns
Current street name

2
3
4

Exit number, street name containing
number or next street name
Turn direction
Distance to the next turn
Current street name

“Proceed about 5 miles.”

“In a quarter of a mile, right turn.”

“Right turn.”

(Beep sound only)

ROUTE GUIDANCE

INFORMATION
4.2 miles

On freeways, interstates or other highways with higher speed limits, the voice
guidance will be made at earlier points
than on city streets in order to allow time
to maneuver.

One−way road

0.25 miles

One−way road

“Proceed about 4 miles to the traffic circle.”

“In a quarter of a mile, traffic circle
ahead, and then 3rd exit ahead.”

“The 3rd exit ahead.”

“The exit ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

∗:

The system indicates a U−turn if the distance between two one−way roads (of opposite directions) is less than 50 feet (15 m) in
residential areas or 164 feet (50 m) in non−
residential areas.
1

“In half of a mile, make a legal U−
turn.”

“Make a legal U−turn ahead.”

(Beep sound only)

ROUTE GUIDANCE

INFORMATION
If the system cannot determine the
current vehicle position correctly (in
cases of poor GPS signal reception),
the voice guidance may be made early or delayed.

Distance and time to
destination

If you did not hear the voice guidance
command, push the “MAP/VOICE”
button to hear it again.
To adjust the voice guidance volume,
see “Volume” on page 67.
The system announces the approach to the final destination.
1

“Your destination is ahead.”

“You have arrived at your destination. The route guidance is now
finished.”

When the vehicle is on the guidance route,
the distance and the estimated travel/arrival
time to the destination are displayed. When
the vehicle is not on the guidance route, the
distance and the direction of the destination
are displayed.
When driving on the guidance route and more
than one destination is set, the distance and
the estimated travel/arrival time from the current position to each destination are displayed.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

1. Touch this button to display the following screen.

To switch to estimated arrival
time.

Setting and deleting
destination —
— Adding destinations

To switch to estimated travel
time.

Adding destinations and searching again for
the routes can be done.

Displayed while driving off the
guidance route. The destination direction is indicated by
an arrow.
2. Touch the number button to display
the desired destination.
The distance, the estimated travel time and
the estimated arrival time from the current
position to the selected destination are displayed.
Estimated travel time is displayed.

INFORMATION
When the vehicle is on the guidance
route, the distance measured along the
route is displayed. Travel time and arrival time is calculated based on the set vehicle speed information. (See page 82.)
However, when the vehicle is not on the
guidance route, the distance is the linear
distance between the current position
and the destination.

1. Touch “Route”.

Estimated arrival time is displayed.

2. Touch “Add”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

3. Input an additional destination in the
same way as the destination search. (See
“Destination search” on page 21.)

4. Touch the desired “Add” to determine
the arrival order of the additional destination.

— Reordering destinations
When more than one destination is set, you
can change the arrival order of the destinations.

1. Touch “Route”.

2. Touch “Reorder”.

3. Select the destination in the order of
arrival by touching the destination button.
Reordered number of arrival is displayed on
the right side of the screen.
Touching “Undo” will cancel each selected
order number from the previously input number.
4. After selecting the destinations, touch
“OK”.
The system searches for the guidance route
again, and displays the entire route. Even if
“OK” is not touched, the entire route is displayed automatically within a few seconds
when the order is fixed.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

— Deleting destinations
A set destination can be deleted.

1. Touch “Route”.

When more than one destination is set, a list
will be displayed on the screen.

4. To delete the destination(s), touch
“Yes”.
If “Yes” is touched, the data cannot be recovered.
If “No” is touched, the previous screen will return.
5. If more than one destination is set,
touch “OK” after deleting the destinations.
The system searches for the guidance route
again, and displays the entire route.

3. Touch the destination for deletion.
“Delete All”: To delete all destinations on the
list.
A message appears to confirm the request to
delete.

2. Touch “Delete”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Setting route —
— Search condition

— Detour setting
While the route guidance is operating, you
can change the route to detour around a section of the route where a delay is caused by
road repairs, or an accident, etc.

You can designate the route conditions of the
route to the destination.

3. Touch “Quick”, “Quick1”, “Quick2” or
“Short” and touch “OK”.

1. Touch “Route”.

2. Touch “Search Condition”.

1. Touch “Route”.

The entire route from the starting point to the
destination is displayed.
“Guide”: To start guidance.
“Route”: To change a route. (See pages 51
and 54.)

2. Touch “Detour”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

— Route preference
A number of choices are provided on the conditions which the system uses to determine
the route to the destination.

3. Select the button below to select the
desired detour distance.
“1 mile (km)”, “3 miles (km)” or “5 miles
(km)”: Touch one of these buttons to start the
detour process. After detouring, the system
returns to the original guidance route.
“Whole Route”: By touching this button, the
system will calculate an entire new route to
the destination.

This picture shows an example of how the
system would guide around a delay caused
by a traffic jam.
1
This position indicates the location of a
traffic jam caused by road repairs or an
accident.
2
This route indicates the detour suggested by the system.

1. Touch “Route”.

INFORMATION
When your vehicle is on a freeway, the
detour distance selections are 5, 15,
and 25 miles (km).
The system may not be able to calculate a detour route depending on the
selected distance and surrounding
road conditions.

2. Touch “Route Preference” to change
the conditions that determine the route to
the destination.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

— Starting route from
adjacent road
You can start the route guidance from the adjacent road.
(ex. When route guidance is set on the freeway, but the vehicle is driven parallel along
the freeway.)

3. Select the desired route preference by
touching the button.
When searching for a route, the system will
avoid routes when the indicator is off.
4. After choosing the desired route preference, touch “OK”.

2. Touch “Start from Adjacent Road”.
When there is no adjacent road, this button
will not be displayed.

1. Touch “Route”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Selecting POIs to be displayed

Map view —
— Display POI icons

Up to 5 categories of icons can be displayed
on the screen.

Points of Interest such as gas stations and
restaurants can be displayed on the map
screen. You can also set their location as a
destination and use them for route guidance.

2. Touch “Display POI Icon” to display a
particular type of Point of Interest on the
screen.

1. Touch “Map View”.

A screen with a limited choice of Points of Interest will be displayed. (To change the displayed POI, see page 85.)

Touch the desired Point of Interest category to display POI location symbols on the
map screen.
By selecting the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI icons
are displayed on the map screen.
To turn off the Points of Interest icon on the
map screen, touch “Delete”.
“Other POIs”: If the desired Point of Interest
can not be found on the limited choice screen,
touch this button.
“Local POI List”: When searching for the
nearest Point of Interest, touch this button.
Then choose one of the categories. The system will list the points within 20 miles (32 km).
(See page 58.)

ROUTE GUIDANCE

To display the local POI list

Touch “Other POI’s” on the “Display POI
icons” screen.
When a Point of Interest category is selected
from either the limited list or the complete list,
the screen will display symbols of those locations on the map screen.

Points of Interest that are within 20 miles (32
km) of the current position will be listed from
among the selected categories.

Select the desired POI categories from the
list.

Select the desired POI categories.
The selected category icon appears on the
top left of the screen.
By selecting the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI icons
are displayed on the map screen.
If the desired POI category is not on the
screen, touch “List All Categories” to list all
POI categories.

The selected category icon appears on the
top left of the screen.
By selecting the desired POI category and
then touching “OK”, the selected POI icons
are displayed on the map screen.
To return to the POI category selection
screen, touch “More”.

1. Touch “Local POI List” on the “Display
POI icons” screen.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

To set a POI as a destination

— Route overview

You can select one of the Points of Interest
icons on the map screen as a destination and
use it for route guidance.

2. Touch the button of the desired Point
of Interest.
The selected Points of Interest are displayed
on the map screen.
“On Route”: When the indicator is illuminated by touching this button, the list of the
items searched along the route is displayed.

1. Touch “Map View”.
1. Directly touch the Point of Interest icon
that you want to set as a destination.
The map will shift so that the icon is centered
on the screen and overlaps with the cursor
. At this time, the distance from the current
position is displayed on the screen. The distance shown is measured as a straight line
from the current vehicle position to the POI.
2. When the desired Point of Interest
overlaps with the cursor, touch “Enter ”.
The screen changes and displays the map
location of the selected destination and route
preference. (See “Starting route guidance”
on page 40.)

2. Touch “Route Overview”.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

Touch “Map” on the “Turn List” screen.
The point which you choose is displayed on
the map screen.

The entire route from the current position to
the destination is displayed.
“Guide”: To start guidance.
“Route”: To change the route. (See pages
51 and 54.)
“Turn List”: The following screen displays
the list of the roads up to the destination.

You can scroll through the list of roads by
touching
or
. However, not all road
names in the route may appear on the list. If
a road changes its name without requiring a
turn (such as on a street that runs through two
or more cities), the name change will not appear on the list. The street names will be displayed in order from the starting point, along
with the distance to the next turn.
These marks indicate the
direction in which you should
turn at an intersection.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

— Route preview

— Route trace
It is possible to store the traveled route up to
124 miles (200 km) and retrace the route on
the display.

INFORMATION
This feature is available on the map with
more detailed map scale than 30 mile (50
km).
: To indicate the next destination.
1. Touch “Map View”.

: To preview the route to the next destination.
: To preview the route to the next destination in fast−forward mode.
: To stop the preview.
: To review the route to the previous
destination or starting point.

2. Touch “Route Preview”.

: To review the route to the previous
destination or starting point in fast−
forward mode.

Touch “Map View”.

: To indicate the previous destination
or starting point.

ROUTE GUIDANCE

“Record”: To start recording the route trace.
“Stop”: To stop recording the route trace.
If you touch “Stop” to display the following
screen.

Touching “Yes” stops recording and the
route trace remains displayed on the screen.
Touching “No” stops recording and the route
trace is erased.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

SECTION

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
Descriptions of functions for more effective use
Quick reference (“Menu” screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Quick reference (“Setup” screen) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Suspending and resuming guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
User selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
My places Registering memory points Editing memory points Deleting memory
points Registering home Deleting home Registering area to avoid Editing area
to avoid Deleting area to avoid Deleting previous points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Registering memory points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Editing memory points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Deleting memory points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Registering home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Deleting home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Registering area to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Editing area to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Deleting area to avoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Deleting previous points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Quick reference (“Menu” screen)

“Suspend Guidance” and “Resume
Guidance”
Suspends or resumes guidance. . . . . . . . 66
2
“Volume”
Sets the volume for voice guidance. . . . . 67
3
“?”
Function help for the “Menu” screen can be
viewed on this screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4
“Map DVD”
Displays information regarding the disc version or covered area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
5
“Select User”
Up to 3 different settings for different users
can be memorized. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
6
“Setup”
Enables various settings for the navigation
system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 81
7
“My Places”
Enables changes to “Memory points”, “Home”
and “Areas to avoid”. Enables deletion of the
previous point. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Quick reference (“Setup” screen)

1
“Distance”
The distance units “km” or “miles” can be
selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2
“Estimated Travel Time”
The system to display the travel time and the
arrival time to the destination on the route
guidance screen can be set. . . . . . . . . . . 82
3
“Keyboard Layout”
Key layout can be changed. . . . . . . . . . . . 83
4
“Time Zone”
The desired time zone can be selected.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5

“

Function”

The choice whether to display each touch−
screen button and current street name on the
map screen can be set. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
6
“Display POI Icons”
A selection of 6 icons displayed on the “Display POI Icons” top screen is possible.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
7
“Display Building Shapes”
Selection of either ON or OFF to display the
building shape on the map screen is possible.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
8
“Traffic Restrict. Notification”
Notification of seasonal restrictions can be
selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
9
“Voice Recognition Guidance”
Voice recognition guidance can be set.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
10 “Voice Guidance in All Modes”
Voice guidance can be set in all modes.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
11 “Auto Voice Guidance”
Automatic voice guidance can be set.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
12 “Pop−up Message”
Selection of either ON or OFF to display the
pop−up message is possible. . . . . . . . . . . 87
13 “Calibration”
Adjustment of the current vehicle position
mark can be done manually. . . . . . . . . . . 88
14 “Default”
This touch−screen button initializes all of the
settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
15 “?”
Function help for the “Setup” screen can be
viewed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Suspending and resuming
guidance
To suspend guidance
1. Push the “MENU” button.

The screen will return to the current position
map without route guidance.

2. Touch “Suspend Guidance”.

INFORMATION
Without route guidance, “Suspend
Guidance” cannot be used.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To resume guidance
1. Push the “MENU” button.

Volume
The voice guidance volume can be adjusted
or switched off.
1. Push the “MENU” button.

To adjust the volume, select the desired level
by touching the appropriate number.
If voice guidance is not needed, touch “OFF”
to disable the feature.

2. Touch “Resume Guidance”.
2. Touch “Volume”.

When selected the number or “OFF” will be
highlighted.
3. Touch “OK” to confirm your selection.

The screen will change to the current position
map with route guidance.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

INFORMATION
During route guidance, the voice guidance continues even if the navigation
screen is changed to other screens.
“Adaptive Volume Control”: By turning
“Adaptive Volume Control” on, the volume is
turned up automatically when the vehicle
speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h).
To turn the “Adaptive Volume Control” system
on, touch the button. The indicator will be
highlighted.

User selection
The system can memorize the following settings for up to three users.
Map direction
Map scale
Map configuration
Guidance mode
Setup
Volume
Language
Route trace
Travel time/arrival time
Right screen of dual map
Road preference
Maintenance notification

1. Push the “MENU” button.

2. Touch “Select User”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To register

1. Touch “Memorize”.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. To register, touch “Yes”. To return to
.
the previous screen, touch “No” or

When a button that is already registered is
touched, the following screen appears.

To change user

Touch “User number”.
To replace, touch “Yes”. To cancel the re.
placement, touch “No” or

The above message appears, then the map
screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To delete user

My places —
Points or areas on the map can be registered.
The registered points can be used on the
“Destination” screen. (See “ — Destination
search by Home” on page 24, “ — Destination
search by Quick access” on page 24 and “ —
Designation search by Memory” on page 36.)
Registered areas are avoided at the time of
route search.
1. Push the “MENU” button.

1. Touch “Delete”.
The confirmation screen will be displayed.

2. Touch “My Places”.

2. To delete, touch “Yes”. To return to the
.
previous screen, touch “No” or

On this screen, the following operations can
be performed.
1
Registers memory points
(See “ — Registering memory points” on
page 71.)
2
Edits memory points
(See “ — Editing memory points” on
page 72.)
3
Deletes memory points
(See “ — Deleting memory points” on
page 76.)
4
Registers or deletes home
(See “ — Registering home” on page 76
or “ — Deleting home” on page 77.)
5
Registers areas to avoid
(See “ — Registering area to avoid” on
page 77.)
6
Edits areas to avoid
(See “ — Editing area to avoid” on page
78.)

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS
7

9
10

Deletes areas to avoid
(See “ — Deleting area to avoid” on page
80.)
Deletes previous points
(See “ — Deleting previous points” on
page 80.)
Number of remaining memory points
Number of remaining areas to avoid

— Registering memory points

1. Touch “Register”.

3. Touch “OK”.
To edit registered information, see “ — Editing
memory Points” on page 72.

INFORMATION
Up to 106 memory points can be registered.

2. Enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “Destination
search” on page 21.)
After memory point registration is completed,
the “Memory Point” screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To change “Icon”
1. Touch “Icon” on the “Memory Point”
screen.

— Editing memory points
The icon, attribute, name, location and/or
telephone number of a registered memory
point can be edited.

1. Touch “Edit”.

2. Touch the desired memory point button.

3. Touch the button to be edited.
“Icon”: To select icons to be displayed on the
map. (See page 72.)
“Quick Access”: To set an attribute.
Memory points with a set attribute can be
used as a “Quick access” or “Home” button.
(See page 73.)
“Name”: To edit memory point names. The
names can be displayed on the map. (See
page 74.)
“Location”: To edit location information.
(See page 75.)
“Phone #”: To edit telephone numbers. (See
page 75.)
4. Touch “OK”.

2. Touch the desired icon.
Turn the page by touching “Page 1”, “Page
2” or “with Sound”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To change “Quick Access”
It is possible to change attributes of the quick
access points. Memory points with a set attribute can be used as a “Quick Access” or
“Home” touch−screen button. (See “ — Destination search by Home” on page 24 and “ —
Destination search by Quick access” on page
24.)
1. Touch “Quick Access” on the “Memory
Point” screen.

SOUND ICONS
When the vehicle approaches the memory
point, the selected sound will be heard.
1. Touch “with Sound” on the “Change
Icon” screen.

Touch either
or
to adjust the direction. Touch “Enter”.
The bell sounds only when the vehicle approaches this point in the direction that has
been set.
2. Touch the desired sound icon.
The next screen appears when “Bell (with
Direction)” is touched.
2. Touch the desired attribute.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

It is possible to replace a registered attribute.

DELETING “Quick Access”

3. To replace the attribute, touch “Yes”.
To return to the previous screen, touch
.
“No” or

1. Touch “Del.”.
2. Enter the name using the alphanumeric
keys.
Up to 24 letters can be entered.
3. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

INFORMATION
One “Home” and five “Quick Access”
can be set.

2. To delete an attribute, touch “Yes”. To
return to the previous screen, touch “No”
or
.

To change “Name”
1. Touch “Name” on the “Memory Point”
screen.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

DISPLAYING MEMORY POINT NAMES
The name of a memory point that may be displayed on the map can be set.

To change “Location”
1. Touch “Location” on the “Memory
Point” screen.

To show the name, touch “ON” on the
“Memory Point” screen. To not show it,
touch “OFF”.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−
screen button to move the cursor
to the
desired point on the map.
3. Touch “Enter”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

To change “Phone #” (telephone number)
1. Touch “Phone #” on the “Memory
Point” screen.

2. Enter the number using number keys.
3. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

— Deleting memory points

— Registering home
If home has been registered, that information
can be recalled by using the “Home” touch−
screen button on the “Destination” screen.
(See “ — Destination search by Home” on
page 24.)

2. Enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search. (See “Destination
search” on page 21.)
When registration of home is completed, the
“Memory Point” screen will be displayed.

1. Touch “Delete”.

1. Touch “Register”.

2. Touch the button to be deleted.
“Delete All”: To delete all memory points in
the system.
3. To delete the memory point, touch
“Yes”. To cancel the deletion, touch “No”.

3. Touch “OK”.
To edit registered information, see “ — Editing
memory points” on page 72.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

— Deleting home

— Registering area to avoid
Areas you want to avoid because of traffic
jams, construction work or other reasons can
be registered as areas to avoid.

3. Touch the eight directional touch−
screen button to move the cursor
to the
desired point on the map.
4. Touch “Enter”.

1. Touch “Delete”.
2. To delete home, touch “Yes”. To cancel
the deletion, touch “No”.
1. Touch “Register”.

2. Enter the location in the same way as
for a destination search, or display the
map of the area to be avoided. (See “Destination search” on page 21.)

5. Touch either
or
to change
the size of the area to be avoided.
6. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

INFORMATION
If a destination is input in the area to
avoid or the route calculation cannot
be made without running through the
area to avoid, a route passing through
the area to be avoided may be shown.

— Editing area to avoid
The name, location and/or area size of a registered area can be edited.

Up to 10 locations can be registered
as points/areas to avoid. If there are
10 locations already registered, the
following message will be displayed:
“Unable to register additional points.
Perform operation again after deleting unnecessary points.”.
1. Touch “Edit”.

2. Touch the desired area button.

3. Touch the button to be edited.
“Name”: To edit the name of the area to
avoid. The names can be displayed on the
map. (See page 79.)
“Location”: To edit area location. (See page
79.)
“Area Size”: To edit area size. (See page
80.)
“Active”: To turn on or off the area to avoid
feature. To turn on the feature touch “ON” on
the “Edit Area to Avoid” screen. To turn off the
feature touch “OFF” on the “Edit Area to
Avoid” screen.
4. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To change “Name”
1. Touch “Name” on the “Edit Area to
Avoid” screen.

2. Enter the name using alphanumeric
keys.
Up to 24 letters can be entered.
3. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

DISPLAYING NAMES OF AREAS TO BE
AVOIDED
The name of an area to be avoided that may
be displayed on the map can be set.

To show the name, touch “ON” on the
“Edit Area to Avoid” screen. To not show
it, touch “OFF”.

To change “Location”
1. Touch “Location” on the “Edit Area to
Avoid” screen.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−
screen button to move the cursor
to the
desired point on the map.
3. Touch “Enter”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

To change “Area Size”
1. Touch “Area Size” on the “Edit Area to
Avoid” screen.

— Deleting area to avoid

— Deleting previous points
The previous destination can be deleted.

1. Touch “Delete”.
1. Touch “Delete Previous Points”.

2. Touch either
or
to change
the size of the area to be avoided.
3. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

2. Touch the button to be deleted.
“Delete All”: To delete all registered areas to
avoid in the system.
3. To delete the area, touch “Yes”. To cancel the deletion, touch “No”.

2. Touch the button you want to delete.
“Delete All”: To delete all previous points in
the system.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Setup
Setting the items shown on the “Setup”
screen can be done. (See page 65.)
1. Push the “MENU” button.

3. To delete the point, touch “Yes”. To
cancel the deletion, touch “No”.

3. Touch the items to be set.
4. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.
2. Touch “Setup”.

INFORMATION
To reset all setup items, touch “Default”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Distance unit
Distance unit can be changed.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

2. Touch “km” or “miles” of “Distance” to
choose the distance unit.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

INFORMATION
This function is available only in English
or Spanish. To switch language, see
“Selecting a language” on page 147.

Estimated travel time
The speed that is used for the calculation of
the estimated travel time and the estimated
arrival time can be set.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

2. Touch “Set Speed” of the “Estimated
Travel Time”.

3. Touch
or
to set the average vehicle speeds for “Residential”, “Main
street”, and “Freeway”.
To set the default speeds, touch “Default”.
4. After setting of the desired speeds is
completed, touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

INFORMATION
The displayed time to the destination
is the approximate driving time that is
calculated based on the selected
speeds and the actual position along
the guidance route.

Input key layout
Key layout can be changed.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

The time shown on the screen may
vary greatly depending on progress
along the route, which may be affected by road conditions such as
traffic jams, and construction work.

LAYOUT TYPE

“ABC” type

It is possible to display up to 99 hours
59 minutes.
2. Touch “ABC” or “QWE” of “Keyboard
Layout” to choose the input key layout.

“QWE” type
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Time zone
Time zone can be changed.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

2. Touch “Change” of “Time Zone”.
The “Adjust Time Zone” screen will be displayed on the display.

Screen layout function
(

Function)

Each touch−screen button and current street
name on the map screen can be displayed or
hidden.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

3. Touch the desired time zone.
The selected button is highlighted.
“Daylight Saving Time”: Daylight saving
time can be set or cancelled.
To set daylight saving time, touch “ON”, and
to cancel it, touch “OFF”.
4. Touch “OK”.

2. Touch “Change” of “

Function”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

POI category change
(Display POI Icons)
Select from among the 6 icons displayed on
the “Display POI Icons” top screen, so that
setting of the icons to be displayed on the map
screen can be done easily.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Then touch
up” screen.

to display page 2 of the “Set-

3. Touch the button to be turned off. The
button becomes dimmed.
To set the default, touch “Default”.
4. Touch “OK”.

3. Touch the category button to be
changed.

2. Touch “Change” of “Display POI
Icons”.
4. Touch the category button to be displayed on the “Display POI Icons” top
screen.
5. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Display of building shape
When the “Display Building Shapes” feature
is turned on, the system will display the building shape on the map screen using a scale of
150 feet (50 m) to 300 feet (100 m).
To turn the “Display Building Shapes” on:
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Then touch
up” screen.

to display page 2 of the “Set-

2. Touch “ON” of “Display Building
Shapes”.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

Notifying traffic restriction
When the “Traffic Restrict. Notification” feature is turned on, the system notifies you of
traffic or seasonal restrictions.
To turn the “Traffic Restrict. Notification” on:
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Voice recognition guidance
When the “Voice Recognition Guidance” feature is turned on, the voice recognition guidance can be heard automatically.
To turn the “Voice Recognition Guidance” on:
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Then touch
up” screen.

to display page 2 of the “Set-

2. Touch “ON” of “Traffic Restrict. Notification”.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

to display page 2 of the “Set-

2. Touch “ON” of “Voice Recognition
Guidance”.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

Voice guidance in all modes
When the “Voice Guidance in All Modes” feature is turned on, the voice guidance in all
modes can be heard.
When the “Voice Guidance in All Modes” feature is turned off, voice guidance cannot be
heard when using the audio system.
To turn the “Voice Guidance in All Modes” on:
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Auto voice guidance
When the “Auto Voice Guidance” feature is
turned on, the voice guidance can be heard
automatically.
When the “Auto Voice Guidance” feature is
turned off, the voice guidance can be heard
only if the “MAP/VOICE” button is pushed.
To turn the “Auto Voice Guidance” mode on:
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.

Then touch
up” screen.

Then touch
twice to display page 3 of the
“Setup” screen.

to display page 2 of the “Set-

Pop−up message
When the “Pop−up Message” is turned on,
the pop−up message will be displayed.
To turn the “Pop−up Message” on:
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Then touch
twice to display page 3 of the
“Setup” screen.

2. Touch “ON” of “Pop−up Message”.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.
2. Touch “ON” of “Voice Guidance in All
Modes”.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

2. Touch “ON” of “Auto Voice Guidance”.
The selected button is highlighted.
3. Touch “OK”.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

When the “Pop−up Message” is turned off, the
following messages will not displayed.

Current position/tire change calibration
The current vehicle position mark can be adjusted manually. Miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement can also be
adjusted.
1. Touch “Setup” on the “Menu” screen.
Then touch
twice to display page 3 of the
“Setup” screen.
3. Touch the desired button.

This message appears when the system is in
the POI mode and the map scale is 1 mile (1.6
km) or greater.

INFORMATION
For additional information on the accuracy of a current vehicle position, see
“Limitations of the navigation system”
on page 184.

2. Touch “Adjust” of “Calibration”.

The message appears when the map is
switched to the dual map screen mode.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

POSITION/DIRECTION CALIBRATION
When driving, the current vehicle position
mark will be automatically corrected by GPS
signals. If GPS reception is poor due to location, you can manually adjust the current vehicle position mark.

1. Touch “Position/Direction”.

3. Touch “Enter”.

TIRE CHANGE CALIBRATION
The tire change calibration function will be
used when replacing the tires. This function
will adjust the miscalculation caused by the
circumference difference between the old
and new tires. If this procedure is not performed when the tires are replaced, the current vehicle position mark may be incorrectly
displayed.

4. Touch either
or
to adjust the direction of the current vehicle position
mark.
5. Touch “Enter”.
The map screen will be displayed.

To perform a distance calibration procedure, touch “Tire Change” on the “Calibration” screen.
The message appears and the quick distance
calibration is automatically started. A few
seconds later, a map screen will be displayed.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−
screen button to move the cursor
to the
desired point on the map.

ADVANCED FUNCTIONS

OTHER FUNCTIONS

SECTION

OTHER FUNCTIONS
Other functions
Maintenance information Maintenance information setting Dealer setting . . . . 92
Maintenance information setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Dealer setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Calendar with memo Adding a memo Editing a memo Memo list . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Adding a memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Editing a memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Memo list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Hands−free system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Speech command system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Help screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Screen adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Screen setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Beep setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Selecting a language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Maintenance information —
— Maintenance information
setting
When the navigation System is turned on, the
“Information” screen displays when it is time
to replace a part or certain components. (See
page 2.)
1. Push the “INFO” button.

2. Touch “Maintenance”.

3. Touch the desired button.
For details of each touch−screen button, see
“INFORMATION ITEMS” on page 92.
“Delete All”: To cancel all conditions which
have been inputted.
“Reset All”: To reset the item which has satisfied a condition.
“Set Dealer”: To register or edit dealer information. (See “ — Dealer setting” on page
93.)
If “ON” is selected, the system gives maintenance information with the “Information”
screen when the system is turned on. (See
page 2.)
If “OFF” is selected, the “Information” screen
is disabled.
When the vehicle needs to be serviced, the
touch−screen button color will change to
orange.

INFORMATION ITEMS
“ENGINE OIL”: Replace engine oil
“OIL FILTER”: Replace engine oil filter
“ROTATION”: Rotate tires
“TIRES”: Replace tires
“BATTERY”: Replace battery
“BRAKE PAD”: Replace brake linings
“WIPERS”: Replace wiper blades
“LLC”: Replace engine coolant
“BRAKE OIL”: Replace brake fluid
“ATF”: Replace ATF (Automatic Transmission Fluid)
“SERVICE”: Scheduled maintenance
“AIR FILTER”: Replace air filter
“PERSONAL”: New information items can
be created separately from provided ones.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

INFORMATION
For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Scheduled
Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s
Manual Supplement”.
Depending on driving or road conditions, the actual date and distance
may differ from the stored date and
distance in the system.
4. Input the conditions.
Notice of “Date”: The next maintenance
date can be input.
Notice of “Distance”: The driving distance
until the next maintenance check can be input.
“Delete”: To cancel the date and distance
conditions.
“Reset”: To reset the date and distance conditions.
5. Touch “OK”.
The screen then returns to the “Maintenance”
screen.

— Dealer setting
It is possible to register a dealer in the system.
With dealer information registered, route
guidance to the dealer is available.
1. Touch “Set Dealer” on the “Maintenance” screen.

V
2. If the dealer has not been registered,
enter the location of the dealer in the same
way as for a destination search. (See “Destination search” on page 21.)
When “Set Dealer” registration is finished, the
“Edit Dealer” screen will be displayed.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

3. Touch the button to be edited.
“Dealer”: To enter the name of a dealer. (See
page 94.)
“Contact”: To enter the name of a dealer
member. (See page 94.)
“Location”: To set a location. (See page
94.)
“Phone #”: To set a telephone number. (See
page 95.)
“Delete Dealer”: To delete the dealer information displayed on the screen.
“Enter ”: To set the displayed dealer as a
destination. (See “Starting route guidance”
on page 40.)

To edit “Dealer” or “Contact”
1. Touch “Dealer” or “Contact” on the
“Edit Dealer” screen.

To edit “Location”
1. Touch “Location” on the “Edit Dealer”
screen.

2. Enter the name using the alphanumeric
keys.
Up to 24 letters can be entered.
3. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

2. Touch the eight directional touch−
screen button to move the cursor
to the
desired point on the map.
3. Touch “Enter”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

To edit “Phone #” (telephone number)
1. Touch “Phone #” on the “Edit Dealer”
screen.

Calendar with memo —
It is possible to enter memos for particular
dates on the calendar. The system informs
you of the memo entry when the system is
turned on. (See page 3.)
Memos can also be used for route guidance
if the memo has been registered with location
information.
1. Push the “INFO” button.
On this screen, the current date is highlighted
in yellow.

2. Enter the number using number keys.
3. Touch “OK”.
The previous screen will be displayed.

2. Touch “Calendar”.

: To change month.

: To change year.

“Today”: To display the current month calendar (if another month will be displayed).
“List”: To display the list of registered memos. (See “ — Memo list” on page 98.)
Touching a date button on the “Calendar”
screen displays the “Memo” screen.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

— Adding a memo
If a memo is added, the system informs of the
memo entry when the system is started on the
memo date. (See page 3.)
1. Touch the date you want to add a memo
on the “Calendar” screen.

Memos can be edited by touching the list button. (See “ — Editing a memo” on page 97.)
“Add Memo”: To add a memo. (See “ — Adding a memo” on page 96.)
“Mark ”: To change the color of the mark
displayed next to the date. To default the
mark color, touch “Delete” on the “Mark color” screen.
“Date ”: To change the color of the date. To
default the date color, touch “Delete” on the
“Date color” screen.
“Prev. Day”: To go to the “Memo” screen of
the previous date.
“Today”: To go to the “Memo” screen for the
current day.
“Next Day”: To go to the “Memo” screen of
the next date.

3. Touch “Memo”.

2. Touch “Add Memo”.
Up to 100 memos can be added.

4. Enter text using the keys.
Up to 24 letters can be entered.
After entering the text, touch “OK” at the bottom right of the screen.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

— Editing a memo
The registered memo can be edited.
1. Touch the day you want to edit a memo
on the “Calendar” screen.

5. When registering information on the
memo, touch “Location”.
A screen similar to the destination search
screen appears. Search the same way as
searching a destination. (See “Destination
search” on page 21.)

2. Touch the memo to be edited.

3. Touch the item to be edited.
“Memo”: To edit a memo. (See “ — Adding
a memo” on page 96.)
“Location”: To change a registered location.
(See “ — Adding a memo” on page 96.)
“Enter ”: To set the registered location as
a destination. (See “Starting route guidance”
on page 40.)
“Delete”: To delete the memo.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

To display memos for a specified peri-

— Memo list

od of time
1. Touch “Period” on the “Memo Search”
screen.

It is possible to display a memo list by setting
a condition.
1. Touch “List” on the “Calendar” screen.

2. Touch the desired search condition to
list the memos.
“This Week”: To display the list of memos for
the current week.
“This Month”: To display the list of memos
for the current month.
“Future”: To display a list of future memos.
“Past”: To display the list of past memos.
“All”: To display the list of all memos.
“Period”: To display the list of memos for a
specified period. (See page 98.)

3. To delete and/or edit the memo, touch
the desired memo button.
“Delete All”: To delete all the displayed memos.
A message will be displayed.
4. To delete, touch “Yes”. To cancel the
deletion, touch “No”.

2. Enter the period using the numeral
keys.
The period from January 1, 2005 through December 31, 2024 can be set for searching.
3. After setting the period, touch “OK”.
The “Memo List” screen will be displayed.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Hands−free system
Hands−free system allows you to make or
receive a call without taking your hands
off the steering wheel by connecting your
cellular phone.
This system supports Bluetooth. Bluetooth is
a wireless data system by which you can call
without your cellular phone being connected
with a cable or placed on a cradle.
If your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth, this system can not function.

INFORMATION
In the following conditions, the system
may not function.
The cellular phone is turned off.
The current position is outside the
communication area.
The cellular phone is not connected.
The cellular phone has a low battery.

4 spokes type

CAUTION

By pushing the telephone switch above,
you can receive a call or hang up without
taking your hands off the steering wheel.

While driving, do not use a cellular
phone or connect the Bluetooth
phone.

NOTICE
Do not leave your cellular phone in the
car. The temperature indoor may be
high and damage the phone.

3 spokes type

OTHER FUNCTIONS

The other party’s voice outputs from the driver’s speaker. When the received calls or received voice outputs, the audio from the audio
system or voice guidance from the navigation
system will be muted.

INFORMATION
Talk alternately with the other party on
the phone. If you talk at the same time,
the voice may not reach each other. (It
is not a malfunction.)
Microphone
You can use the microphone above when
talking on the phone.

Keep the volume of receiving voice
down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.
When you talk on the phone, speak
clearly towards the microphone.
In the following situations, your voice
may not reach the other party.
Driving on unpaved road. (Making
a traffic noise.)
Driving at the high speed.

Indicates the condition of Bluetooth
connection.
“Blue” indicates an excellent connection to
Bluetooth.
“Yellow” indicates a bad connection to Bluetooth, resulting in possible deterioration of
voice quality.
2

: No connection to Bluetooth.
Indicates the amount of battery
charge left.

The window is open.
Turning the air−conditioning vents
towards the microphone.
The sound of the air−conditioning
fan is loud.

100

Empty
Full
It is not displayed while the Bluetooth is connecting or the phone book data is being transferred.
The amount left does not always correspond
with the one of your cellular phone. This system doesn’t have a charging function.

OTHER FUNCTIONS
3
Indicates the receiving area.
“Rm” is displayed when receiving in Roaming area.
“Hm” is displayed when receiving in Home
area.
4
Indicates the level of reception.

Too bad
Excellent
The level of reception does not always correspond with the one of your cellular phone.

INFORMATION
This system supports the following service.
HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0
OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1

An antenna for the Bluetooth connection
is built in the display. The indication of the
Bluetooth connection may turn yellow and
the system may not function when you
use the Bluetooth phone in the following
conditions and places.
Your cellular phone is hiding behind the
display (behind the seat or in the glove box
and console box).
Your cellular phone touches or is covered
with metal materials.
Leave the Bluetooth phone on the place
where “Blue” indication is displayed.

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc.

When you release your car:
A lot of personal data is registered when
you use the Hands−free system. When
you release your car, initialize your data.
(See “(c) Delete personal data” on page
145.)
If you initialize it, the former state will never
come back again. Pay much attention when
initializing the data.
You can initialize the following data in the system.
Phone book data
Dialed numbers and received calls
Speed dial
Bluetooth phone data
Security code

If your cellular phone does not support
HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth
phone, and take OPP service individually.

101

OTHER FUNCTIONS

FCC ID: HYQDNNS016
IC ID: 1551A−DNNS016
MADE IN JAPAN

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS−210 Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

— Enter a Bluetooth phone
To use the hands−free system, you need
to enter your phone into the system. Once
you have registered it, you can make a
hands−free call.
1. Push the “INFO” button to display the
“Information” screen.

3. Touch “Settings” to display “Settings”
screen.

CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

2. Touch “Telephone” to display “Telephone” screen.
You can also push
of the steering wheel to
display this screen when the vehicle is
stopped.

102

4. Touch “Bluetooth” to display the
“Bluetooth Settings” screen.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Connecting a Bluetooth phone
AUTOMATICALLY

5. Touch “Register” to connect your cellular phone to the system.

6. When this screen is displayed, input
the Passkey displayed on the screen into
the phone.
For the operation of the phone, see the manual that comes with your cellular phone.
If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”.

7. When the connection is completed,
this screen is displayed.
You do not need to enter the phone in case of
using the same one.

When you register your phone, auto connection will be turned on. Always set it to
this mode and leave the Bluetooth phone
in a condition where connection can be
established.
Each time you touch “Auto Connect”, auto
connection will be switched on or off.

When this screen is displayed, follow the
guidance on the screen to try again.

103

OTHER FUNCTIONS

MANUALLY
When the auto connection failed or turned
off, you have to connect Bluetooth manually.

When the ignition switch is set at ACC or
ON, the selected Bluetooth phone will be
automatically connected and the connection result is displayed.
This screen appears when the Bluetooth
phone is first connected after the ignition
switch is set at ACC or ON.

Touch “Connect” after having enabled the
Bluetooth connection on the phone.

When the connection is completed, this
screen is displayed.
Now you can use the Bluetooth phone.

104

Reconnecting the Bluetooth phone
If the Bluetooth phone is disconnected
with a poor reception from the Bluetooth
network when the ignition switch is set at
ACC or ON, the system automatically reconnects the Bluetooth phone. In this
case, the connection result is not displayed.
If the Bluetooth is disconnected on purpose
such as you turned your cellular phone off,
this does not happen. Reconnect it by the following methods.
Select the Bluetooth phone again.
Enter the Bluetooth phone.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

— Call on the Bluetooth
phone
After you enter the Bluetooth phone, you
can call by using hands−free system. You
can call using the 7 methods described
below.
By dial
You can call by inputting the telephone
number.
This cannot be operated while driving.

By phone book
You can call by phone book data which is
transferred from your cellular phone.
The system has one phone book. You can
register up to 1000 numbers.
This cannot be operated while driving.

2. Select the desired number from the list.

V
Touch the desired key to input the telephone number.
1. Touch “Phone Book” to display
“Phone Book” screen.
Touch the desired key to input the telephone number.
Each time you touch , an inputted digit is deleted.
When you touch
last is inputted.
Touch

or push

Touch

or push

of the steering wheel.

, the number you called
of the steering wheel.

105

OTHER FUNCTIONS

By dialed numbers
You can call by dialed number. The system memorizes up to 5 dialed numbers. If
it is more than 5, the oldest number is deleted.
This cannot be operated while driving.

By received calls
You can call by received calls. When a call
is received, the system memorizes up to 5
numbers. If it is more than 5, the oldest
number is deleted.
This cannot be operated while driving.

When you call by phone book, the name
(if registered) is displayed.

When you call the same number

continuously, only the newest number is
registered.
2. Select the desired number from the list.
1. Touch “Call Log” to display “Outgoing
Calls” screen.

1. Touch “Call Log” to display “Outgoing
Calls” screen.

Touch

or push

of the steering wheel.
2. Touch “Incoming Calls” to display the
“Incoming Calls” screen.

106

OTHER FUNCTIONS

By speed dial
You can call by registered telephone number which you selected from a phone
book, dialed numbers and received calls.
(See “(a) Registering the speed dial” on
page 113 for registering the speed dial.)

When a telephone number registered in

phone book is received, the name and the
number are displayed.
Received calls which you did not answer
are also memorized in the system and
“Abs.” is displayed on the left side of the
number.
Unnoticed telephone number such as a
public telephone is not memorized in the
system.
3. Select the desired number from the list.

Touch

or push

of the steering wheel.

An international phone call may not be

made depending on the cellular phone
which you have.
1. Touch “Speed Dial” to display “Speed
Dial” screen.

107

OTHER FUNCTIONS

By voice recognition

2. Touch the desired number to call.
You can change the page by touching
“Speed Dial 2” or “Speed Dial 3”.
When you push the telephone switch while
driving, the screen above appears. Touch the
desired name to call. (The telephone number
is not displayed.)

108

You can call by giving a command. (For the
operation and command of voice recognition, see “Speech command system” on
page 140 and “Help screen” on page 143.)

DIALING BY NAME
You can call by giving a voice tag registered in the phone book. For setting the
voice recognition, see “ Setting the voice
recognition” on page 125.
Example: Call Charlize.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Push the talk switch.
“After the beep, please say the
name.”
You:
“Charlize.”
System: “Charlize chosen, when ready,
please briefly push the talk switch
or push the off−hook switch to
dial.”
You:
Push the talk switch.
System: “After the beep, please say “Dial”.”
You:
“Dial.”
System: “Dialing the name.”
Now you can call Charlize.

Cancelling the voice recognition
The voice recognition will be cancelled
when you do the following.
Keep on pushing the talk switch.

You:
System:

Push
of the steering wheel.
Touch “Cancel”. (Except for recognizing
the command.)

Say “Cancel”.
“Next” is displayed when multiple entries are
found for a searched name.
Up to 6 entries can be displayed including the
first searched one.
Do the following to change the entry to the
next one.
Touch “Next”.
Push the talk switch to say “Next Candidate”.
Calling without the voice recognition
After the entry number is displayed, you can
also call by pushing the telephone switch or
touching “Dial”.

109

OTHER FUNCTIONS

DIALING BY PHONE NUMBER
You can call by giving a desired number.

You:
System:

Push the talk switch.
“After the beep, please say the
number.”
You:
“812387.”
System: “When ready, please briefly push
the talk switch or push the
off−hook switch to dial.”
You:
Push the talk switch.
System: “After the beep, please continue to
add numbers or say “Dial”.”
You:
“Dial.”
System: “Dialing the number.”
Now you can call 812387.

110

SENDING A TONE
You can send a tone by giving a desired
number.

You:
Push the talk switch.
System: “Say numbers, pound, or star.”
You:
“1234.”
System: “1234.” “Push the talk switch.”
You:
Push the talk switch.
System: “Send? Say “Yes” or “No”.”
You:
“Yes.”
System: “Sending.”
Now you can send the tone.

By POI call

You can call by touching
when it is displayed on the screen from navigation system. (See page 11 for details.)

OTHER FUNCTIONS

— Receive on the Bluetooth
phone

— Talk on the Bluetooth
phone

When a call is received, this screen is disor push
played with a sound. Touch

While you are talking on the phone, this
screen is displayed. You can do the operation below on the screen.
To adjust the volume of the other party’s
voice:
Touch “–” or “+” or use the volume
switch of the steering wheel.
To hang up the phone:
or push
of the steering
Touch
wheel.
To mute your voice:
Touch “Mute”.
To input a Key:
Touch “0−9”.
To transfer the call
Touch “Transfer Call”.

of the steering wheel to talk on the
phone.
To hang up the phone:
Touch
or push
of the steering
wheel again.
To refuse to receive the call:
Touch
and hold it.
To adjust the volume of received call:
Touch “–” or “+” or use the volume
switch of the steering wheel.
On the international phone call, the other
party’s name may not be displayed correctly
depending on the cellular phone which you
have.

You cannot change from Hands−free call to
cellular phone call while driving.
When you change from cellular phone call to
Hands−free call, the Hands−free screen will
be displayed and you can operate it on the
screen.
Transferring method and behavior are different depending on the cellular phone which
you have.
For the operation of the phone, see the manual that comes with your cellular phone.

111

OTHER FUNCTIONS

You can do this operation when you want to
operate an answering machine or use a telephone service in bank for example. You can
register the phone number and the code number in the phone book.

Touch the desired number to input the key.
To hang up the phone:
or push
of the steering
Touch
wheel.
This cannot be operated while driving.

112

If the continuous tone signal is registered
in a phone book, this screen appears. (If
not registered, “Send” and “Exit” are not
displayed.)
Confirm the number displayed on the
screen and touch “Send”. The number before marked sign will be sent.
When you touch “Exit”, this function will be
finished and normal tone screen appears.
To hang up the phone:
Touch
or push
of the steering
wheel.
The continuous tone signal is the marked sign
(p or w) and the number following telephone
number. (ex. 056133p0123w#1)

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Sending a tone by the speed tone
You can send a tone by the speed tone.
(For registering the speed tone, see “(b)
Registering the speed tone” on page 115.)

1. Touch “Speed Tone”.

— Change the settings of the
Bluetooth phone

(a) Registering the speed dial
You can register the desired telephone
number from phone book, dialed numbers
and received calls. Up to 17 speed dial
numbers can be registered.
The 6th entry is the speed dial for redialing.

Touch “Settings” to display “Settings”
screen.
1. Touch “Speed Dial” to display the
“Speed Dial Settings” screen.

2. Touch the desired switch to send a
tone.

You can change the settings of the phone.

2. Touch “Register” of “Speed Dial”.

113

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting the speed dial individually
You can delete “01” − “17” of the speed
dial individually.
If you delete them all at once, all of 17 numbers are deleted.

3. Select the data you want to register.

5. Touch the touch−screen button you
want to register in.
The latest dialed number is registered in the
6th item (speed redial).
1. Touch “Delete” of “Speed Dial”.

4. Touch the desired telephone number.

If you select a touch−screen button you
registered before, this screen is displayed.
6. Touch “Yes” if you want to overwrite it.

114

2. Touch the touch−screen button you
want to delete.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting all of the speed dial

(b) Registering the speed tone
You can register the desired tone number.
Up to 6 speed tone numbers can be registered.

3. Touch “Yes”.
1. Touch “Delete All” of “Speed Dial”.

1. Touch “Register” of “Speed Tone”.

2. Touch “Yes”.

2. Use the software keyboard to input the
name.

115

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Editing the speed tone
You can edit the speed tone.

3. Input the number and touch “OK”.

If you select a touch−screen button you
register before, this screen is displayed.
5. Touch “Yes” if you want to overwrite it.

1. Touch “Edit” of “Speed Tone”.

4. Touch the desired touch−screen button you want to register in.
2. Touch the touch−screen button you
want to edit.

116

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting the speed tone individually
You can delete “1” to “6” of the speed
tone.
If you delete them all at once, all of 6 numbers
are deleted.

3. Use the software keyboard to input the
name.

5. Touch “YES”.

1. Touch “Delete” of “Speed Tone”.

4. Input the number and touch “OK”.

2. Touch the touch−screen button you
want to delete.

117

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting all the speed tone

1. Touch “Delete All” of “Speed Tone”.

1. Touch “Volume” to display the “Volume Settings” screen.

3. Touch “Yes”.

2. Touch “Yes”.
2. Touch “−” or “+” to adjust the “Voice
Volume” or “Ring Volume”.
“Voice Volume” . . . . . Adjusting the other
party’s voice.
“Ring Volume” . . . . . . Adjusting the ring volume.

118

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Automatic volume settings for high
speed
You can set the volume one step up when
the speed is over 50 mph (80 km/h). (When
it is under 43 mph (70 km/h), previous volume is back.)
Each time you touch “Adaptive Volume
Control”, you can switch on or off.

Initializing the settings
You can initialize the settings.

Touch “Default”.

(d) Setting the screen

1. Touch “Screen” to display the “Screen
Settings” screen.

Touch “Yes”.

2. Do the detail settings of the screen and
touch “OK”.

119

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Incoming call display
You can select the method of the receiving
call display.

Touch “Full” or “Icon”.
“Full” mode . . . . . When a call is received,
the Hands−free screen is
displayed and you can
operate it on the screen.
“Icon” mode . . . . . The message is displayed
on the upper side of the
screen. You can only operate the steering switch.

Auto answer
When a call is received, the display automatically changes to the talking screen
and you can start to talk on the phone
(without touching any button) after the
preset time.

The Bluetooth connection status at
startup

When the ignition switch is set at ACC or
ON and the Bluetooth is automatically
connected, the connection check is displayed.
Touch “ON” of “Auto Answer” and “−” or
“+” to adjust the waiting time of auto answer within 1 − 60 seconds.

Touch “ON” or “OFF” of “Show Bluetooth
connection status at start up”.

120

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Initializing the settings
You can initialize the settings.

(e) Setting the phone book
You can register phone numbers in the
phone book.

Transferring a telephone number
You can transfer the telephone numbers in
your Bluetooth phone to the system. Up to
1000 person’s data (up to 2 numbers a person) can be registered in the phone book.
Transfer it while the engine is running.

Touch “Default”.
Touch “Phone Book” to display the
“Phone Book Management” screen.

V
1. Touch “Transfer” to display the “Select
Group” screen.

Touch “Yes”.
You can do the detail settings of phone
book.

121

OTHER FUNCTIONS

2. Select the group you want to transfer
the data to.

3. Touch “Overwrite” or “Add To”.

122

4. Transfer the phone book data to the
system using the Bluetooth phone.
This screen appears while transferring. To
cancel it, touch “Cancel”. If the transferring
is interrupted on the way, the phone book data
transferred until then can be memorized in the
system.

5. When this screen is displayed, the
transfer is completed.

When this screen is displayed, try the
transfer operation again.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Registering the phone book data
You can register the phone book data.

Editing the name
When you don’t input the name, the number is displayed.

3. When you complete the edit, touch
“OK”.
1. Touch “Register” of “Phone Book”.
1. Touch “Name”.

2. Touch the desired touch−screen button to edit the phone book.

2. Use the software keyboard to input the
name.

123

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Editing the phone number
You can register a phone number in
“TEL1” and “TEL 2” separately. Up to 2
numbers a person can be registered.

Selecting the group
You can set a group for a contact (for example: “Family”, “Friends”, “Office”...). It
will then be easier for you to find this contact when needed, by using the group display.
You can select “No group” or “Group 01”
to “Group 19”.
“No Group” is displayed if you don’t set the
group.
3. Select the desired icon.

1. Touch “TEL1” or “TEL2”.

1. Touch “Group”.

2. Input the number and touch “OK”.

124

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Setting the voice recognition
You can set the voice recognition. Up to 20
numbers can be registered for the voice
recognition.

2. Select the desired group.

3. Touch “PLAY” to play the voicetag.
If you want to delete it, touch “Delete” and
“OK”.
1. Touch “Voice Rec.”.

2. Select the phone number and touch
“REC” to record a voicetag.

125

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Adding the data to the phone book
You can add data to the phone book.

Editing the data
You can edit the registered data.

3. Confirm the added data on the screen
and touch “OK”.
1. Touch “Add to”.

1. Touch “Edit”.

2. Select the data you want to add log data
to.

2. Select the data you want to edit.

126

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting the data
You can delete the data.
When you release your car, delete all your
data on the system.

3. Touch the desired touch−screen button.
When you edit the data, touch “OK”.

3. Touch “Yes”.
You can also delete it in the following way.

1. Touch “Delete” of “Phone Book”.

1. Touch “Phone Book”.
When you also touch “Edit” on this
screen, you can edit it.
2. Touch the desired touch−screen button.

127

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting all the phone data

2. Select the desired data.

4. Touch “Yes”.
1. Touch “Delete All” of “Phone Book”.

3. Touch “Delete”.
2. Select the deleting method.
“Group Data”
. . . . . Deleting all the phone data in
group.
“All Contact Data”
. . . . . Deleting all the phone data.

128

OTHER FUNCTIONS

3. When you select “Group Data”, the
“Select Group” screen is displayed.

You can also delete it in the following way.

3. Touch “Yes”.
1. Touch “Phone Book”.
4. Select the desired group.

2. Touch “Delete All”.
5. Touch “Yes”.

129

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Registering a group name
You can register 20 groups. “No Group”,
“Group 01” − “Group 19” are registered by
default.
You can change “Group 01” − “Group 19”
into desired names.

Selecting a group icon

3. When you complete all the edit, touch
“OK”.

1. Touch “Icon”.

1. Touch “Register” of “Group Name”.

2. Select the desired icon.

2. Select the group you want to register.

130

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Editing a group name

Deleting a group name
You can delete the group names individually or all at once. If you delete a group
name, that group will return to the default
setting (excluding “No Group”).

3. Touch “Yes”.
1. Touch “Name”.

1. Touch “Delete” of “Group Name”.

2. Use the software keyboard to input the
name.

2. Select the group you want to delete the
name of.

131

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Deleting all the group name

Deleting the log data
You can delete the log data individually or
all at once.
When you release your car, delete all the
data on the system.
INDIVIDUALLY

1. Touch “Delete All” of “Group Name”.

ALL AT ONCE

1. Touch “Delete All” on the “Outgoing
Calls” or “Incoming Calls” screen.

1. Touch “Delete” on the “Log Data”
screen.

2. Touch “Yes”.
2. Touch “Yes”.

2. Touch “Yes”.

132

OTHER FUNCTIONS

(f) Setting the security
When you set the security, you can prevent people from using some functions of
the Hands−free system. It is useful when
you leave your car with the hotel or you
don’t want others to see the data you registered.
When you set or unlock the security, you have
to input the security code. Be sure to change
the default code when you use the security for
the first time.

Changing the security code
The security code is 4 digits and the default is “0000”.
Change a new code that is hard for other
people to know.
When you change the security code, don’t forget the code. The dealers cannot unlock the
security when you forget it.
If you forget the security code, initialize your
personal data. When you initialize it, not only
the phone book data but also the memory
points in the navigation system, etc. will be
deleted. (See “ Initializing the security code”
on page 135.)

2. Touch “Change”.

1. Touch “Phone Book Lock”.

3. Input the security code.
Each time you touch , an input digit is deleted.

133

OTHER FUNCTIONS

4. Touch “Yes”.

Phone Book Lock
When you set the phone book lock, you
can have the following functions locked.
Display of the phone book screen and
transferring, registering, editing, deleting
the phone book data.
Display of speed dial screen, registering,
deleting the speed dial and speed dialing.
Display of the other party’s name for calls
being received or made.
Display of dialed numbers screen and
received calls screen, deleting dialed
numbers and received numbers.
Display of phone information screen.
Changing the security code.
When you set this function, the speed dial
screen is not displayed while driving.

1. Touch “ON”.

2. Input the security code and touch
“OK”.

134

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Initializing the security code
You can initialize the settings.

— Set a Bluetooth phone
Selecting a Bluetooth phone
In case you register more than one Bluetooth phone, you need to choose a favorite one.

3. Touch “Yes”.
1. Touch “Default”.

1. Touch “Settings” to display the “Settings” screen.

2. Input the security code and touch
“OK”.

2. Touch “Select Telephone” to display
the “Select Telephone” screen.

135

OTHER FUNCTIONS

You can select the Bluetooth phone from
a maximum of 6 numbers.
“Empty” is displayed when you have not registered a Bluetooth phone yet.
Bluetooth mark is displayed when you
choose the phone.

When the result message is displayed, you
can use the Bluetooth phone.
When another Bluetooth phone is trying to
connect, this screen is displayed.

Displaying Bluetooth information
You can see or set the information of the
Bluetooth phone on the system.
“Device Name”
. . . . The name of Bluetooth phone
which is displayed on the screen.
You can change it into a desired
name.
“Bluetooth Device Address”
. . . . The address peculiar to the system. You cannot change it.

Although you can register up to 6 Bluetooth
phones in the system, only one Bluetooth
phone can function at a time.

1. Select the desired phone and touch
“Information”.
Touch “Yes” or “No”.

3. Touch “OK”.

136

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Changing a device name
You can change a device name. If you
change a device name, the name registered in your cellular phone is not
changed.

2. Touch “Change”.

1. Touch “Change”.

Changing the Bluetooth settings
You can change the display and settings of
Bluetooth information on the system.
The information displays the following items.
“Device Name”
. . . . The name in the Bluetooth network. You can change it.
“Passkey”
. . . . The password when you register
your cellular phone in the system.
You can change it into the figure of
4−8 digits.
“Bluetooth Device Address”
. . . . The address peculiar to the system. You can not change it. If you
have registered two Bluetooth
phones with the same Device
Name or Passkey and you cannot
distinguish one from the other, refer to it.
When you change the device name or
Passkey, do the followings.

3. When you complete the setting, touch
.

2. Use the software keyboard to input the
device name.

137

OTHER FUNCTIONS

1. Touch “Bluetooth”.

3. Use the software keyboard to input the
device name.
You can input up to 20 characters.

2. Touch “Change” of “Device Name” or
“Passkey”.
4. Input a Passkey with 4 − 8 digits.
When you touch , the input number is deleted.

138

5. When you complete the setting, touch
.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Initializing the Bluetooth settings.
You can initialize the settings.

1. Touch “Default”.

Deleting a Bluetooth phone

1. Touch “Delete” of “Bluetooth Telephone”.

3. Touch “Yes”.
When you delete the telephone while
another Bluetooth phone is connecting,
this message is displayed.

2. Touch “Yes”.

2. Select the telephone you want to delete
and touch “OK”.

Touch “Yes”.

139

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Displaying the information of the Blue-

Speech command system

tooth phone you delete
You can display the information of the
Bluetooth phone before you delete it and
you can make sure whether the telephone
you delete is correct or not.

The speech command system enables
you to operate the navigation system and
audio system by giving a command.

2. When you complete confirming it,
touch
.

1. Select the telephone you want to display the information about.

140

3 spokes type

OTHER FUNCTIONS

4 spokes type
1. Push the speech command switch.
A beep sounds and on screen message is
displayed with an indicator at the top left.

2. Give a command while an indicator is
shown in the display.
If you want to check the command list,
touch “Help” to display the help screen.
(See “Help screen” on page 143.) When
you touch “Cancel”, the previous screen
returns.
If the navigation system does not respond or
the confirmation screen does not disappear,
please push the speech command switch
and try again.
If no command is given, a beep sounds and
the indicator disappears 6 seconds later.
If the system does not recognize your
speech, the system will respond with this
message (“System does not recognize this
command, please rephrase your command.”). Start the operation from the beginning.

Microphone
It is unnecessary to speak directly into the
microphone when giving a command.
Speech command example: Searching for
a route to your home.
1. Push the speech command switch.
2. Say “Home”.
You can also say the street name or address.
(ex. say “Woodridge Avenue”.)
If your home is not registered, you will hear
“Home is not registered”.

141

OTHER FUNCTIONS

3. If the system recognized the command,
the recognition result “Home” is displayed on the top of the screen with the
screen message. (Displayed message
and the touch−screen buttons on the
screen depend on the situation.)
Touch or say “Cancel”, and the system will be
canceled. Touch or say “Help”, and displays
the help screen.

4. Touch “Enter” or say “Enter destination”, and the system starts searching for
a route to your home. (If the destination is
already registered, “Add to
” or “Replace ” is displayed on the screen.)
Touch or say “Cancel”, and the search will be
canceled.
When you search the destination by “POI
Name”, this screen is displayed.

Touch “Enter” or say “Enter destination”.
When you touch “Show List”, you can
search another spot in its category.

INFORMATION
In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command properly.
The command is not correct or clear.
There are some noises such as wind
noise, etc.

142

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Help screen
This system has a function which displays
the voice recognition help screen. You
can see the command list and operating
guide on it.
(a) Command list
1. If the “Operating Guide” screen is displayed, touch “Command List” on the upper side of the screen.

(b) Operating guide
1. If the “Command List” screen is displayed, touch “Operating Guide” on the
upper side of the screen.

2. Select the desired category by touching the buttons on the right side of the
“Operating Guide” screen.
3. You can scroll through the list of the operating guide by touching
2. Select the desired category by touching the buttons on the right side of the
“Command List” screen.
3. You can scroll through the list of the
command list by touching
Touch “OK” after you check it.

Touch “OK” after you check it.

Screen adjustment
The brightness or contrast of the screen can
be adjusted depending on the brightness of
your surroundings. You can also turn the display off.
To display the “Display” screen, push the
“DISP” button.

V
1. Touch the desired button to adjust contrast and brightness.
“Contrast” “+”: Strengthens the contrast of
the screen.
“Contrast” “–”: Weakens the contrast of the
screen.
“Brightness” “+”: Brightens the screen.
“Brightness” “–”: Darkens the screen.
2. After adjusting the screen, touch “OK”.

143

OTHER FUNCTIONS

The screen goes off when “Screen Off” is
touched. To turn the display screen back on,
push any button such as “INFO”, etc. The selected screen appears.

Screen setting
1. Push the “INFO” button to display the
“Information” screen.

INFORMATION
When you do not touch any button on
the “Display” screen for 20 seconds, the
previous screen will be displayed.
Depending on the position of the headlight
switch, the screen changes to the day mode
or night mode.
To display the screen in the day mode even
with the headlight switch on, touch “Day
Mode” on the adjustment screen for brightness and contrast control.
If the screen is set in the day mode with the
headlight switch turned on, this condition is
memorized in the system even with the engine turned off.

144

2. Touch “Screen Setting”.

OTHER FUNCTIONS

(a) Automatic transition
You can select a function that enables automatic return to the navigation screen from the
audio screen.

Select “ON” or “OFF” and then touch
“OK”.
“ON”: The navigation screen automatically
returns from the audio screen 20 seconds after the end of audio screen operation.
“OFF”: The audio screen remains on.

(b) Switch color
You can select the color of the touch−screen
buttons.

Select “Green” or “Orange” and then
touch “OK”.

(c) Delete personal data
The following personal data can be deleted or
returned to their default settings:
Maintenance conditions
Maintenance information “off” setting
Memory points
Areas to avoid
Previous points
Route trace
User selection settings
Phone book data
Dialed numbers and received calls
Speed dial
Bluetooth phone data
Security code
This function is available only when the vehicle is not moving.

145

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Beep setting
You can set a beep sound off.
1. Push the “INFO” button.

1. Touch “Delete personal data”.
The “Delete personal data” screen appears.

3. Touch “Yes”.

2. Touch “Beep Off”.
“Beep Off” is highlighted.
To switch the beep sound on, touch “Beep
Off” again.

2. Touch “Delete”.
The “Confirmation to delete all personal data”
screen appears.

146

OTHER FUNCTIONS

Selecting a language
The language of the touch−screen buttons,
pop−up messages and the voice guidance
can be changed.
1. Push the “INFO” button.

2. Touch “Language”.

3. Touch “English”, “Français” or “Español” to select a language.
If a screen other than for the navigation system is displayed, the current screen would
change to the “CAUTION” screen by pushing
the “MAP/VOICE”, “DEST” or “MENU” button.

4. Touch “I Agree”.
The language is changed and the screen returns to the map display.

147

OTHER FUNCTIONS

148

AUDIO SYSTEM

SECTION

AUDIO SYSTEM
Audio system
Quick reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Using your audio system Some basics Radio operation CD changer operation . .
151
Some basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Radio operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
CD changer operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Audio remote controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

149

AUDIO SYSTEM

Quick reference
1

150

Function menu display screen
To control the radio or CD changer,
touch the touch−screen buttons. For details, see page 153.
“TUNE·FILE” knob
Turn this knob to move the station band
and files up or down. For details, see
pages 155 and 170.
“AM·SAT” button
Push this button to choose an AM or SAT
station. For details, see pages 153 and
155.
“FM1” or “FM2” button
Push this button to choose an FM station. For details, see pages 153 and
155.
“DISC·AUX” button
Push this button to turn the CD changer
and AUX on. For details, see pages 153,
155, 166 and 167.
“SCAN” button
Push this button to scan radio stations.
For details, see pages 156 and 160.
“AUDIO” button
Push this button to display the audio
control screen. For details, see page
152.

AUDIO SYSTEM
8

“
CLOSE” button
Push this button to display the
“LOAD·EJECT” screen or close the display. For details, see page 165.
“SEEK·TRACK” button
Push either side of this button to seek up
or down for a station, or to access a desired track or file. For details, see pages
156, 160, 167 and 170.
“POWER·VOLUME” knob
Push this knob to turn the audio system
on and off, and turn it to adjust the volume. For details, see page 152.

Using your audio system —
— Some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of your audio system. Some information
may not pertain to your system.
Your audio system works when the ignition
switch is set at ACC or ON.

NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not leave the audio system
on longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

CAUTION
For vehicles
Canada:

sold

U.S.A.

and

Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
Laser products

Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself. This is an intricate unit that
uses a laser pickup to retrieve information from the surface of compact discs. The laser is carefully
shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet. Therefore, never
try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts since you may
be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
This product utilizes a laser. Use
of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein may result
in hazardous radiation exposure.

151

AUDIO SYSTEM

Turning the system on and off

Speech command system

4 spokes type
3 spokes type

152

By pushing the switch above, you can operate the speech command system.
For the operation of the speech command
system and the list of commands, see pages
140 and 143.

“POWER·VOLUME”: Push this knob to turn
the audio system on and off. Turn this knob
to adjust the volume. The system turns on in
the last mode used.
“AUDIO”: Push this button to display touch−
screen buttons for audio system (audio control mode).
You can select the function that enables automatic return to the previous screen from the
audio screen. See “(a) Automatic transition”
on page 145 for details.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Switching between functions

The function buttons for radio and CD changer operation are displayed on the screen
when the audio control mode is selected.
Touch them lightly and directly on the
screen.
The selected button is highlighted.

INFORMATION
If the system does not respond to a
touch of a touch−screen button,
move your finger away from the
screen and then touch it again.
Push “AM·SAT”, “FM1”, “FM2” or
“DISC·AUX” button to turn on the desired
mode. The selected mode turns on immediately.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from
one mode to another.
If the disc is not set, the CD changer does not
turn on.
You can turn off the CD changer by ejecting
the all disc. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire audio system will be
turned off when you eject the disc. If another
function was previously playing, it will come
on again.

You cannot operate dimmed touch−
screen buttons.
Wipe off fingerprints on the surface of
the display using a glass cleaning
cloth.

153

AUDIO SYSTEM

Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is
largely determined by the mix of the treble,
midrange, and bass levels. In fact, different
kinds of music and vocal programs usually
sound better with different levels of treble, midrange, and bass.
A good balance of the left and right stereo
channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, changing the
right/left balance will increase the volume of
one group of sounds while decreasing the volume of another.

1. Touching “SOUND” displays
sound adjustment screen.

154

the

Automatic sound levelizer (ASL)
When the audio sound becomes difficult to be
heard due to road noise, wind noise or other
noises while driving, the system adjusts to the
optimum volume according to the noise level.
To turn this function on, touch “ASL” on the
audio control screen.
Your CD changer

2. Touch the desired button.
“TREB” “+” or “–”: Adjusts high−pitched
tones.
“MID” “+” or “–”: Adjusts mid−pitched
tones.
“BASS” “+” or “–”: Adjusts low−pitched
tones.
“FRONT” or “REAR”: Adjusts sound balance between the front and rear speakers.
“L” or “R”: Adjusts sound balance between
the left and right speakers.
3. Touch “OK”.
The tone of each mode (for such as AM, FM1
and CD changer) can be adjusted.

When you insert a disc, touch “
CLOSE”
and gently push the disc in with the label side
up. This CD changer can store up to four
discs. The changer will play from track 1
through to the end of the disc. Then it will play
from track 1 of the next disc.
The changer is intended for use with 12 cm
(4.7 in.) discs only.

AUDIO SYSTEM

AUX adapter

— Radio operation

The sound of portable audio players connected to the AUX adapter can be enjoyed.
Push the “DISC·AUX” button to switch to
AUX mode. For details, refer to the “Owner’s
Manual”.

Listening to the radio

NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any
part of the changer. Do not insert
anything other than a disc into the slot.
Do not stack up two discs for insertion, or it will cause damage to the
changer. Insert only one disc into
slot at a time.

Push these buttons to choose either an
AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the screen.
If your vehicle is equipped with a satellite radio broadcast system, when you push the
“AM·SAT” button, “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2”,
“SAT3” station appears on the display. For
details about satellite radio broadcast, see
“— Radio operation (XM satellite radio broadcast)” on page 158.

155

AUDIO SYSTEM

Presetting a station

Turn the knob clockwise to step up the station band or counterclockwise to step
down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo
reception when a stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the screen. If the
signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the
amount of channel separation to prevent the
weak signal from creating noise. If the signal
becomes extremely weak, the radio switches
from stereo to mono reception. In this case,
“ST” disappears from the screen.

156

1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Touch one of the channel selector buttons (1 — 6) you want and hold it until a
beep is heard.
This sets the station to the touch−screen button and the frequency appears on the touch−
screen button.
Each radio mode can store up to 6 stations.
To change the preset station to a different
one, follow the same procedure.
The preset station memory is cancelled when
the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.

Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the
following methods.
Preset tuning: Touch the channel selector
button (1 — 6) for the station you want. The
touch−screen button is highlighted and the
station frequency appears on the screen.
Seek tuning: Push the “ ” or “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK”. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time
you push the button, the stations will be
searched automatically one after another.
To scan all the frequencies: Touch “SCAN”
on the screen or push the “SCAN” button
briefly. “SCAN” appears on the screen. The
radio will find the next station and stay there
for a few seconds, and then scan again. To
select a station, touch “SCAN” or push the
“SCAN” button again.
To scan the preset stations: Touch
“SCAN” on the screen or push the “SCAN”
button for longer than approximately a second. “P·SCAN” appears on the screen. The
radio will tune in the next preset station, stay
there for a few seconds, and then move to the
next preset station. To select a station, touch
“SCAN” or push the “SCAN” button again.

AUDIO SYSTEM

RDS (Radio Data System)
Your audio system is equipped with Radio
Data Systems (RDS). RDS mode allows you
to receive text messages from radio stations
that utilize RDS transmitters.
When RDS is on, the radio can
— select only stations of a particular program
type,
— display messages from radio stations,
— search for a stronger signal station.
RDS features are available for use only on FM
stations which broadcast RDS information.
If the system receives no RDS stations,
“NOTHING” appears on the display.

“TYPE ”
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO
PTY” appears on the display.
Each time you touch “TYPE ” or “TYPE
”, the program type changes as follows:
ROCK
MISC (Miscellaneous)
INFORM (Information)
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and Jazz)
R & B (Rhythm and Blues)
RELIGION
ALARM (Emergency message)

“TYPE SEEK”
When a program is set, “TYPE SEEK” appears. Touch this button and the system
starts to seek the station in the relevant program type.
If any type program station is not found,
“NOTHING” appears on the display.

157

AUDIO SYSTEM

Traffic announcement

“MSG” (MESSAGE)
If the system receives a radio text from RDS
station, “MSG” appears on the display. Touch
“MSG”, and a text message is displayed on
the screen. The text message is displayed
only when the vehicle is not moving.
When the system can show the station name,
“RDS” appears on the display. Each time you
touch “MSG” or “MSG OFF”, indication on
the display changes from the band to the station name, a radio text in this order.

158

“TRAF”
The tuner automatically seeks a station that
regularly broadcasts traffic information.
When you touch “TRAF”, “TRAF SEEK” appears on the display, and the radio will start
seeking any station broadcasting traffic program information.
If no traffic program station is found, “NOTHING” appears on the display.
Traffic information may not be broadcasted
when searching.
If a traffic program station is found, the name
for traffic program station is displayed for a
while until a traffic announcement is received.

— Radio operation
(XM satellite radio broadcast)
To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in your
vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota satellite
receiver and antenna must be purchased and
installed, and the subscription to the XM satellite radio is necessary.
How to subscribe to an XM satellite radio
An XM satellite radio is a tuner designed exclusively to receive broadcasts provided under a separate subscription. Availability is
limited to the 48 contiguous states.
How to subscribe: You must enter into a
separate service agreement with the XM radio in order to receive satellite broadcast programming in the vehicle. Additional activation
and service subscription fees apply that are
not included in the purchase price of the vehicle and optional digital satellite tuner. For
complete information on subscription rates
and terms, or to subscribe to the XM radio,
visit XM on the web at www.xmradio.com or
call an XM’s Listener Care at (800) 852−9696.
The XM radio is solely responsible for the
quality, availability and content of the satellite
radio services provided, which are subject to
the terms and conditions of the XM radio customer service agreement.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Customers should have their radio ID ready;
the radio ID can be found by selecting “channel 000” on the radio. For details, see the
“Displaying the radio ID” that follows.
All fees and programming are the responsibility of the XM satellite radio and are subject to
change.
Satellite tuner technology notice: Toyota’s
satellite radio tuners are awarded Type
Approval Certificates from XM Satellite Radio
Inc. as proof of compatibility with the services
offered by the XM satellite radio.
Displaying the radio ID
Each XM tuner is identified with a unique radio ID. You will need the radio ID when activating XM service or when reporting a problem.
If you select the “CH 000” using the “TUNE”
knob, the ID code of 8 alphanumeric characters appears. If you select another channel,
display of the ID code is canceled. The channel (000) alternates the display between the
radio ID and the specific radio ID code.

Listening to satellite radio

Push the “AM·SAT” button to choose either an AM station or an SAT channel.
Besides “AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” appears on the display.

Turn this knob to select the next or previous channel.
If you turn continuously, you can rapidly scroll
forward or down through the channels.

159

AUDIO SYSTEM

Channel category

Touch either “TYPE” or “TYPE” to go to
the next or previous category.

160

Presetting a channel

Selecting a channel

1. Tune in the desired channel.

Tune in the desired channel using one of the
following methods.
Preset tuning: Touch the channel selector
button (1 — 6) for the channel you want. The
button (1 — 6) is highlighted and channel
number appears on the display.
To select channel within the current category: Push the “ ” or “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK”. The radio will step up or
down the channel within the current channel
category. Touch “TYPE SEEK”. The radio
will step up the channel within the current
channel category.

2. Touch one of the channel selector buttons (1 — 6) and hold it until a beep is
heard.
This sets the channel to the touch−screen
button and the name and number of the channel appears on the touch−screen button.
Each touch−screen button can store three
SAT channels. To change the preset channel
to a different one, follow the same procedure.
The preset channel memory is cancelled
when the power source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Displaying the title and name

To scan the currently selected channel
category: Touch “TYPE SCAN” or push the
“SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” appears on
the display. The radio will find the next channel in the same channel category, stay there
for a few seconds, and then scan again. To
select a channel, touch “TYPE SCAN” or
push the “SCAN” button a second time.
To scan the preset channels: Push the
“SCAN” button and hold it until you hear a
beep. “P.SCAN” appears on the display. The
radio will find the next preset channel, stay
there for a few seconds, and then move to the
next preset channel. To select a channel,
push the “SCAN” button a second time.

When you touch “TEXT”, the song/program
title and the artist name/feature are displayed.
Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be displayed. (Some information will not be fully
displayed.)
When you touch “TEXT” again, the display
returns.

161

AUDIO SYSTEM

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions
When problems occur with the XM tuner, a message will appear on the display. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the
suggested corrective action.
ANTENNA

UPDATING

NO SIGNAL

The XM antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM antenna cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
You have not subscribed to the XM satellite radio. The radio is being updated with the latest encryption code.
Contact the XM satellite radio for subscription information. When a contact is canceled, you can choose the
“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel. If you want to listen to the
premium channel, contact the XM satellite radio.
The XM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.

The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until the unit has received the information.

OFF AIR

The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select another channel.

−−−−−

There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associated with the channel at that time. No action needed.

−−−

The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous
channel or “CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select another channel.

The XM Listener Care Center is also available on the phone, please call (800) 852−9696 during the following hours:
Monday — Saturday: 7 a.m. — 1 a.m. Sunday: 12 p.m. — 12 a.m. (EST)

162

AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTICE
This equipment has been tested and
found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following
measures:

— Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
— Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
Information to user
Alternation or modifications carried out
without appropriate authorization may
invalidate the user’s right to operate the
equipment.

— CD changer operation
The CD changer can play audio CDs, CD
text, WMA discs, MP3 discs.
Audio CD, CD text . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
MP3/WMA disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
For appropriate discs for this changer, see
“Audio system operating hints” on page 175.

INFORMATION
This XM tuner supports “Audio Services” (Music and Talk) of only XM satellite radio and “Text Information”* linked
to the respective “Audio Services”.
*Text Information includes, Station
Name, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title and
Category Name.

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
— Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.

163

AUDIO SYSTEM

(a) Inserting discs
The ignition switch must be set at ACC or ON.
Your CD changer can store up to 4 discs.
You can set a disc at the lowest empty disc
number.

3. The amber indicators at either side of
the slot start blinking. When the indicators change to green, insert only one disc.
After the disc is loaded, the amber indicators at either side of the slot start blinking
again. When the indicators change to
green, you can insert the next disc.

2. Touch “LOAD”. The display opens.

CLOSE” button to close
4. Push the “
the display.
The changer will automatically start playing
from the last disc you inserted.
If the label faces down, the disc cannot be
played. In this case, “CD CHECK” appears on the screen.

CAUTION
Do not place anything on the opened
1. Push the “
CLOSE” button. The
“LOAD·EJECT” screen appears.

164

display, as such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking or
in an accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case
of an accident or sudden stop while
driving, keep the display closed.
Take care not to jam your hand while
the display is moving. Otherwise, you
could be injured.

AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTICE

(b) Ejecting discs
A single disc alone:

Do not obstruct the display while it is
moving. It could damage your audio
system.
Do not insert one disc stacked on top
of another one or feed them in continuously, to prevent discs from getting
stuck in the changer.

The display opens and the amber indicators
at either side of the slot start blinking. After
the disc is ejected, the amber indicators
change to green. A disc can be inserted.
All the discs:
CLOSE” button. The
1. Push the “
“LOAD·EJECT” screen appears.

INFORMATION
Under extremely cold conditions, the
display may react slowly or operation
sound may become louder.
1. Push the “
CLOSE” button. The
“LOAD·EJECT” screen appears.
2. Touch “All_CD

”.

The display opens and the amber indicators
at either side of the slot start blinking. After
the disc is ejected, the blinking indicators stay
on.

2. Touch the disc number to be ejected.

165

AUDIO SYSTEM

3. Remove the disc.
The indicators start blinking again and the
next disc is ejected.
If a disc is not remove within 15 seconds after
it is ejected, the operation will be canceled.
When all the discs are removed, the amber indicators change to green. A disc can be inserted.

The numbers of the trays where the disc is not
set are dimmed.

Push the “DISC·AUX” button if the discs
are already loaded in the changer.
“CD CHANGER” appears on the screen.
The discs set in the changer are played continuously, starting with the last disc you inserted. The disc number of the disc currently
being played, the track number and the time
from the beginning of the program appear on
the screen.
When play of one disc ends, the first track of
the following disc starts. When play of the final disc ends, play of the first disc starts
again.
The changer will skip any empty disc trays.

166

AUDIO SYSTEM

(d) Selecting a desired disc

(e) Operating an audio CD

Selecting a desired track

Playing an audio CD

Touch the desired disc number on the
screen.
The selected disc number is highlighted.
The changer will start playing the selected
disc from the first track.

Push the “AUDIO” button to display this
screen.
CD text only — The disc title and track title will
appear on the screen when pushing the
“DISC·AUX” button.
You can operate the touch−screen buttons
and choose the number of the disc you want
to play. The selected disc is automatically
played.

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for a direct access to a desired track.
Push the “ ” or “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK” and repeat it until the desired track number appears on the screen.
As you release the button, the changer will
start playing the selected track from the beginning.
“TRACK LIST”: The desired track can be selected from a list. This function is available
only when the vehicle is not moving.
Touch “TRACK LIST”. The track list is displayed.

167

AUDIO SYSTEM

Searching for a desired track or a disc

Touch the desired track number. The changer
will start playing the selected track from the
beginning.
: By touching this button, the list moves
up by 6 track groups. If this button is touched
when the top page of the list is displayed, the
last page is displayed.
: By touching this button, the list moves
down by 6 track groups. If this button is
touched when the last page of the list is displayed, the top page is displayed.
Fast forward: Push the “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK” and hold it to fast forward
the disc. When you release the button, the
changer will resume playing from that position.
Reverse: Push the “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK” and hold it to reverse the
disc. When you release the button, the
changer will resume playing.

168

Searching for a desired track —
While the disc is playing, touch “SCAN”
briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the screen. The changer
will play the next track for 10 seconds, then
scan again. To select a track, touch “SCAN”
once again. If the changer reaches the end
of the disc, it will start playing at track 1.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass,
normal play resumes.

Searching for a desired disc —
While the disc is playing, touch “SCAN”
and hold it until the “D·SCAN” appears on
the screen.
The program at the beginning of each audio
disc will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice,
touch “SCAN” once again.
After all the audio discs are scanned in one
pass, normal play resumes.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Other functions

“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of the
track or disc you are currently listening to.
Repeating a track —
While the track is playing, touch “RPT”
briefly.
“RPT” appears on the screen. When the track
is finished, the changer will automatically go
back to the beginning of the track and play the
track again. To cancel it, touch “RPT” once
again.
Repeating a disc —
While the disc is playing, touch “RPT” and
hold it until the “D·RPT” appears on the
screen.
When the disc is finished, the changer will automatically go back to the beginning of the
disc and play the disc again. To cancel it,
touch “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and random
selection.
Playing the tracks on one disc in random
order —
While the disc is playing, touch “RAND”
briefly.
“RAND” appears on the screen. The system
selects a track on the disc being listened to in
random order. To cancel it, touch “RAND”
once again.
Playing the tracks on all the audio discs in
random order —
While the disc is playing, touch “RAND”
and hold it until the “D·RAND” appears on
the screen.
The system selects a track on all the audio
discs in the changer in random order. To cancel it, touch “RAND” once again.
If a CD−TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the
disc and track will be displayed. Up to 29 letters can be displayed.

(f)

Operating a MP3/WMA disc

Playing a MP3/WMA disc

Push the “AUDIO” button and touch a
MP3/WMA disc number to display this
screen.
You can operate the touch−screen buttons
and choose the number of the disc you want
to play. The selected disc is automatically
played.

169

AUDIO SYSTEM

Selecting a desired file

Selecting a desired folder
“FOLDER”: Touch this button to go to the
next folder.
“FOLDER”: Touch this button to go to the
previous folder.
“FOLDER LIST”: The desired folder can be
selected in a list. This function is available
only when the vehicle is not moving.
Touch “FOLDER LIST”. The folder list is displayed.
Touch the desired folder number. The changer will start playing the first file of the selected
folder.
: By touching this button, the list moves
up by 6 folder groups. If this button is touched
when the top page of the list is displayed, the
last page is displayed.
: By touching this button, the list moves
down by 6 folder groups. If this button is
touched when the last page of the list is displayed, the top page is displayed.
“FILE”: The file list is displayed.
“DETAIL”: Details of the file currently playing
is displayed. This function is available only
when the vehicle is not moving.

170

“SEEK·TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired file.
Push the “ ” or “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK” and repeat it until the desired file number appears on the display. As
you release the button, the changer will start
playing the selected file from the beginning.
When “RAND” or “FLD·RPT” is on, the file
number within the folder you are currently being listened to appears.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Fast forward: Push the “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK” and hold it to fast forward
the disc. When you release the switch, the
changer will resume playing from that position.
Reverse: Push the “ ” button of
“SEEK·TRACK” and hold it to reverse the
disc. When you release the button, the
changer will resume playing.

“TUNE·FILE” knob: Use for direct access to
a desired file in the disc.
Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob to step up or
down all the files in the disc you are currently
listening to. The file number appears on the
display. When “RAND” or “FLD·RPT” is on, all
the files in the folder you are currently being
listened to can be stepped up or down.

“FILE”: The desired file can be selected in a
list. This function is available only when the
vehicle is not moving.
Touch “FILE”. The file list is displayed.

171

AUDIO SYSTEM

Touch the desired file number. The changer
will start playing the selected file from the beginning.
: By touching this button, the list moves
up by 6 file groups. If this button is touched
when the top page of the list is displayed, the
last page is displayed.
: By touching this button, the list moves
down by 6 file groups. If this button is touched
when the last page of the list is displayed, the
top page is displayed.
“FOLDER”: The folder list is displayed.
“DETAIL”: Details of the file currently playing
is displayed. This function is available only
when the vehicle is not moving.

172

Searching for a desired file

Searching for a desired folder

While the disc is playing, touch “SCAN”
briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the screen. The changer
will play the next file in the folder for 10 seconds, then scan again. To select a file, touch
“SCAN” once again. If the changer reaches
the end of the folder, it will start playing from
file 1.
After all the files are scanned in one pass, normal play resumes.

While the disc is playing, touch “SCAN”
and hold it until the “FLD·SCAN” appears
on the screen.
The program at the beginning of each folder
will be played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of your choice, touch
“SCAN” once again.
After all the folders are scanned in one pass,
normal play resumes.

AUDIO SYSTEM

Other functions

“RPT”: Use it for automatic repeat of the file
or folder you are currently listening to.
Repeating a file —
While the file is playing, touch“RPT” briefly.
“RPT” appears on the screen. When the file
is finished, the changer will automatically go
back to the beginning of the file and play the
file again. To cancel it, touch “RPT” once
again.
Repeating a folder —
While the folder is playing, touch “RPT”
and hold it until the “FLD·RPT” appears on
the screen.
When the folder is finished, the changer will
automatically go back to the beginning of the
folder and play the folder again. To cancel it,
touch “RPT” once again.

“RAND”: Use it for automatic and random
selection of the folder or the disc which you
are currently listening to.
Playing the files in one folder in random
order —
While the disc is playing, touch “RAND”
briefly.
“RAND” appears on the screen. The system
selects a file in the folder you are currently listening to. To cancel it, touch “RAND” once
again.
Playing the files in all the folders on one
disc in random order —
While the disc is playing, touch “RAND”
and hold it until the “FLD·RAND” appears
on the screen.
The system selects a file in all the folders. To
cancel it, touch the button once again.
When a file is skipped or the system is inoperative, touch “RAND” to reset.

(g) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with the
player malfunctions, your audio system will
display following messages.
If “No CD” appears on the display: It indicates that there is no disc in the CD changer.
If “CD Check” appears on the display:
It indicates that the disc dirty, damaged, or it
was inserted upside down. Clean the disc or
insert it correctly. If a disc which is not playable is inserted, “CD Check” will also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs for
this player, see “Audio system operating
hints” on page 175.
If “CD Error” appears on the display: The
following causes are possible.
There is a trouble inside the system. Eject
the disc.
The inside of the player unit may be too
hot due to the very high ambient temperature. Eject the disc and allow the player to
cool down.
If “NO MUSIC FILE” appears on the display: It indicates that the disc has no playable
data.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take
your vehicle to your dealer.
If an MP3/WMA disc contains CD−DA files,
only CD−DA files are played. If an MP3/WMA
disc contains files other than CD−DA, only
MP3/WMA files are played.

173

AUDIO SYSTEM

Audio remote controls —
— Steering switches

4 spokes type
3 spokes type

174

Some parts of the audio system can be adjusted with the switches on the steering
wheel.
Details of the specific switches, controls, and
features are described below.
1
Volume control switch
2
“ ” “ ” switches
3
“MODE” switch

1
Volume control switch
Push “+” side to increase the volume. The
volume continues to increase while the switch
is being pressed.
Push “−” side to decrease the volume. The
volume continues to decrease while the
switch is being pressed.
2
“ ” “ ” switches (Seek, search,
track)
Radio
To select a preset station:
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
switch. Do this again to select the next preset
station.
To seek a station:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until
you hear a beep. Do this again to find the next
station. If you push either the “ ” or “ ”
switch in seek mode, the seek mode will cancel.
CD changer
Use this button to skip up or down to a different track, file or chapter in either direction.
To select a desired track, file or chapter:
Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
switch until the track, file or chapter you want
to play is set. If you want to return to the beginning of the current track, file or chapter,
push the “ ” switch once, quickly.

AUDIO SYSTEM

To select a desired disc:
Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch until
you hear a beep to change to the next or the
previous disc. Repeat this operation until you
reach the disc you want to listen to.
3
“MODE” switch
Each time you push the “MODE” switch, the
system changes the audio mode.
To turn the audio system on, push the
“MODE” switch.
To turn the audio system off, push and hold
the “MODE” switch until you hear a beep.

Audio system operating hints
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio system.
Do not put anything other than on appropriate discs into the CD changer.
The use of a cellular phone inside or
near the vehicle may cause a noise
from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to.
However, this does not indicate a
malfunction.

Radio reception
Usually, the problem with radio reception
does not mean there is a problem with your
radio − it is just the normal result of conditions
outside the vehicle.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain
can interfere with FM reception. Power lines
or telephone wires can interfere with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited range, and the farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal will be. In addition,
reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems
that probably do not indicate a problem with
your radio:
FM
Fading and drifting stations — Generally,
the effective range of FM is about 40 km (25
miles). Once outside this range, you may notice fading and drifting, which increase with
the distance from the radio transmitter. They
are often accompanied by distortion.
Multi−path — FM signals are reflective, making it possible for two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this happens, the
signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.

175

AUDIO SYSTEM

Static and fluttering — These occur when
signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing the bass level
may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping — If the FM signal you are
listening to is interrupted or weakened, and
there is another strong station nearby on the
FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked
up again.
AM
Fading — AM broadcasts are reflected by the
upper atmosphere — especially at night.
These reflected signals can interfere with
those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately
strong and weak.
Station interference — When a reflected
signal and a signal received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making
it difficult to hear the broadcast.
Static — AM is easily affected by external
sources of electrical noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical motors. This results in static.

176

MP3/WMA files

The emphasis function is available only

MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) are audio compression standards.
The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 and
WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and CD−
RW discs.
The unit can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level 2 and
with the Romeo and Joliet file system.
When naming an MP3 or WMA file, add
the appropriate file extension (.mp3 or
.wma).
The MP3/WMA player plays back files
with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3
or WMA files. To prevent noise and playback errors, use the appropriate file extensions.
The player can play only the first session
using multi−session compatible CDs.
MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 Tag
Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot display disc title,
track title and artist name in other formats.
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is
used in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA
tags carry information such as track title,
artist name.

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded at
32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system can
play MP3 files with sampling frequencies
of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz. However, the
emphasis function is not available for files
recorded at these frequencies.)
The sound quality of MP3/WMA files generally improves with higher bit rates. In order to achieve a reasonable level of sound
quality, discs recorded with a bit rate of at
least 128 kbps are recommended.
Playable bit rates
MP3 files:
MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps
WMA files:
Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps
Ver. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps
The MP3/WMA player does not play back
MP3/WMA files from discs recorder using
packet write data transfer (UDF format).
Discs should be recorded using “pre−
mastering” software rather than packet−
write software.
The m3u playlists are not compatible with
the audio player.
MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO formats are not compatible with the audio
player.

AUDIO SYSTEM

The MP3 player is compatible with VBR

(Variable Bit Rate).
When playing back files recorded as VBR
(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time will
not be correctly displayed if fast−forward
or reverse operations are used.
It is not possible to check folders that do
not include MP3/WMA files.
MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levels
deep can be played. However, the start of
playback may be delayed when using
discs containing numerous levels of folders. For this reason, we recommend
creating discs with no more than two levels of folders.
It is possible to play up to 192 folders or
255 files on one disc.

001.mp3
002.wma
Folder 1
003.mp3
Folder 2
004.wma
005.mp3
Folder 3
006.mp3

The play order of the compact disc with
the structure shown on the left is as follows:

CD−R AND CD−RW DISCS
CD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been
subject to the “finalizing process” (a process that allows discs to be played on a
conventional CD player) cannot be
played.
It may not be possible to play CD−R/CD−
RW discs recorded on a music CD recorder or a personal computer because of disc
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the
disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the
lens of the unit.
It may not be possible to play discs recorded on a personal computer depending on the application settings and the environment.
Record with the correct
format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.)
CD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged by
direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit
may be unable to play some damaged
discs.
If you insert a CD−RW disc into the
MP3/WMA player, playback will begin
more slowly than with a conventional CD
or CD−R disc.
Recordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot be
played using the DDCD (Double Density
CD) system.

177

AUDIO SYSTEM

CARING FOR YOUR CD CHANGER AND
DISCS
Your CD changer is intended for use with
12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
Extremely high temperature can keep
your CD changer from working. On hot
days, use air conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you listen to a disc.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may
make your CD changer skip.
If moisture gets into your CD changer, you
may not hear any sound even though your
CD changer appears to be working. Remove the discs from the CD changer and
wait until it dries.

CD changer

Audio CDs

Use only compact discs marked as shown
above. The following products may not be
playable on your CD changer.
SACDs
dts−CDs
Copy−protected CDs

Special shaped discs

CAUTION
CD changer uses an invisible laser
beam which could cause hazardous
radiation exposure if directed outside
the unit. Be sure to operate the changer
correctly.

Transparent/translucent discs

178

AUDIO SYSTEM

NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled
discs such as those shown in the illustrations. The use of such discs
may damage the player or changer, or
it may be impossible to eject the disc.
This system is not designed for use of
dual discs. Do not use dual discs because it may cause damage to the
player.
Low quality discs

Correct

Wrong

Handle discs carefully, especially when

Labeled discs

you are inserting them. Hold them on the
edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting
fingerprints on them, particularly on the
shiny side.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other disc damage could cause the player to
skip or to repeat a section of a track. (To
see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the
light.)
Remove discs from the players when you
are not using them. Store them in their
plastic cases away from moisture, heat,
and direct sunlight.

179

AUDIO SYSTEM

To clean a compact disc: Wipe it with a soft,
lint−free cloth that has been dampened with
water. Wipe in a straight line from the center
to the edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it
with another soft, lint−free cloth. Do not use
a conventional record cleaner or anti−static
device.

180

TERMS
Packet write—
This is a general term that describes the process of writing data on−demand to CD−R,
etc., in the same way that data is written to
floppy or hard discs.
ID3 Tag—
This is a method of embedding track−related
information in an MP3 file. This embedded information can include the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 tag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted to the number
of characters, the information can be viewed
when the track is played back.
WMA Tag—
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is used
in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMA tags
carry information such as track title, artist
name.

ISO 9660 format—
This is the international standard for the formatting of CD−ROM folders and files. For the
ISO 9660 format, there are two levels of regulations.
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (8 character file
names, with a 3 character file extension. File
names must be composed of one−byte capital letters and numbers. The “_” symbol may
also be included.)
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters
(including the separation mark “.” and file extension). Each folder must contain fewer than
8 hierarchies.

AUDIO SYSTEM

m3u—
Playlists created using “WINAMP” software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3—
MP3 is an audio compression standard determined by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO
(International Standard Organization). MP3
compresses audio data to about 1/10 the size
of that on conventional discs.
WMA—
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio
compression format developed by Microsoft.
It compresses files into a size smaller than
that of MP3 files. The decoding formats for
WMA files are Ver. 7, 8, and 9.

181

AUDIO SYSTEM

182

APPENDIX

SECTION

VII

APPENDIX
Appendix
Limitations of the navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Map database information and updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

VII

183

APPENDIX

Limitations of the
navigation system
This navigation system calculates the current vehicle position using satellite signals, various vehicle signals, map data,
etc. However, the accurate position may
not be shown depending on the satellite
condition, road configuration, vehicle
condition or other circumstances.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) developed and operated by the U.S. Department of
Defense provides an accurate current vehicle
position using 3 to 4 satellites. The GPS system has a certain level of inaccuracy. While
the navigation system will compensate for
this most of the time, occasional positioning
errors of up to 300 feet (100 m) can and
should be expected. Generally, position errors will be corrected within a few seconds.

184

NOTICE
The installation of window tinting may
obstruct the GPS signals. Most window
tinting contains some metallic content
that will interfere with GPS signal reception. We advise against the use of window tinting on vehicles equipped with
navigation systems.
When your vehicle is receiving signals from
the satellites, the “GPS” mark appears at the
top left of the screen.
The GPS signal may be physically obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehicle position on the map display. Tunnels, tall buildings, trucks, or even the placement of objects
on the instrument panel may obstruct the
GPS signals.
The GPS satellites may not send signals due
to repairs or improvements being made to
them.
Even when the navigation system is receiving
clear GPS signals, the vehicle position may
not be shown accurately or inappropriate
route guidance may occur in some cases.

APPENDIX

(a) Accurate current vehicle position
may not be shown in the following cases:
When driving on a small angled Y−shaped
road.
When driving on a winding road.
When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.
When driving on a long straight road.
When motorway and surface streets run
in parallel.
After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.
When a long route is searched during high
speed driving.
When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.
After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turning on
a turntable in the parking lot.
When leaving a covered parking lot or
parking garage.
When a roof carrier is installed.
When driving with tire chains installed.
When the tires are worn.
After replacing a tire or tires.
When using tires that are smaller or larger
than the factory specifications.

When the tire pressure in any of the four
tires is not correct.

INFORMATION
If your vehicle cannot receive GPS signals, you can correct the current position manually. For information on setting the current position calibration, see
page 88.

(b) Inappropriate route guidance may occur in the following cases:
When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.
If you set more than one destination but
skip any of them, auto reroute will display
a route returning to the destination on the
previous route.
When turning at an intersection for which
there is no route guidance.
When passing through an intersection for
which there is no route guidance.
During auto reroute, the route guidance
may not be available for the next turn to
the right or left.
It may take a long time to operate auto reroute during high speed driving. In auto
reroute, a detour route may be shown.
After auto reroute, the route may not be
changed.
An unnecessary U−turn may be shown or
announced.
A location may have multiple names and
the system will announce one or more.
Some routes may not be searched.
If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route
guidance may not be shown.
Your destination point might be shown on
the opposite side of the street.

185

VII

APPENDIX

When a portion of the route has regulations prohibiting the entry of the vehicle
that vary by time or season or other reasons.
The road and map data stored in your navigation system may not be complete or
may not be the latest version.
After replacing a tire, implement the operation described in the “TIRE CHANGE
CALIBRATION”. (See page 89.)
This navigation system uses tire turning data
and is designed to work with factory−specified tires for your vehicle. Installing tires that
are larger or smaller than the originally
equipped diameter may cause inaccurate
display of the vehicle’s position. The tire pressure also affects the diameter of the tires so
please make sure the tire pressure of all four
tires is correct.

186

Map database information and
updates —
This system uses the maps of DENSO.
 GDT, Geographic Data Technology,
Inc.
 2004 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
Data by infoUSA Copyright 2004, All
Rights Reserved.
 2005 VISA Corporation
National Research Bureau 2004
The Bullseye Design is a registered
trademark of Target Brands, Inc.
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT
CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
THIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR
YOUR COPY OF THE MAP DATABASE
(“The
DATABASE”),
ORIGINALLY
MADE BY Geographic Data Technology,
Inc. (“GDT”), USED IN THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM. BY USING THE DATABASE, YOU ACCEPT AND AGREE TO
ALL TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET
FORTH BELOW.

OWNERSHIP
The DATABASE and the copyrights and
intellectual property or neighboring rights
therein are owned by GDT or its licensors.
LICENSE GRANT
GDT grants you a non−exclusive license
to use your copy of the DATABASE for
your personal use or for use in your business’ internal operations. This license
does not include the right to grant sub−licenses.
LIMITATIONS ON USE
The DATABASE is restricted for use in
the specific system for which it was
created. Except to the extent explicitly
permitted by mandatory laws, you may
not extract or re−utilize any portion of the
contents of the DATABASE, nor reproduce, copy, modify, adapt, translate, disassemble, decompile, or reverse engineer any portion of the DATABASE.

APPENDIX

TRANSFER
You may not transfer the DATABASE to
third parties, except together with the
system for which it was created, provided
that you do not retain any copy of the DATABASE, and provided that the transferee agrees to all terms and conditions of
this AGREEMENT.
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
GDT does not warrant or make any representations regarding, either express or
implied, regarding the use or results of
the use of the DATABASE in terms of its
correctness, accuracy, reliability, or
otherwise, and expressly disclaims any
implied warranties of quality, performance, merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or non−infringement.
GDT does not warrant that the DATABASE is or will be error free. No oral or
written information or advice provided by
GDT, your supplier or any other person
shall create a warranty.

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
The price of the DATABASE does not include any consideration for assumption
of risk of consequential, indirect or unlimited direct damages which may arise in
connection with your use of the DATABASE. Accordingly, in no event shall GDT
or supplier of the navigation system using the DATABASE (“Supplier”) be liable
for any consequential, special, incidental
or indirect damages, including without
limitation, loss of revenue, data, or use,
incurred by you or any third party arising
out of your use of the DATABASE, whether in an action in contract or tort or based
on a warranty, even if GDT or the Supplier has been advised of the possibility of
such damages. In any event GDT’s liability for direct damages is limited to the
price of your copy of the DATABASE.
THE DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SET
FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT
AFFECT OR PREJUDICE YOUR STATUTORY RIGHTS WHERE YOU HAVE
ACQUIRED THE DATABASE OTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSE OF A
BUSINESS. Some states and laws do
not allow the exclusion of implied warranties, so the above disclaimer may not apply to you.

WARNINGS
The DATABASE reflects reality as existing before you received the DATABASE
and it comprises data and information
from government and other sources,
which may contain errors and omissions.
Accordingly, the DATABASE may contain inaccurate or incomplete information
due to the passage of time, changing circumstances, and due to the nature of the
sources used. The DATABASE does not
include or reflect information on − inter
alia − neighborhood safety; law enforcement; emergency assistance; construction work; road or lane closures; vehicle
or speed restrictions; road slope or
grade; bridge height, weight or other limits; road or traffic conditions; special
events; traffic congestion; or travel time.

VII

187

APPENDIX

GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the DATABASE is for a region of North
America and is being acquired by or on
behalf of the United States government
or any other entity seeking or applying
rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government, the DATABASE is licensed with
“limited rights.” Utilization of the DATABASE is subject to the restrictions
specified in the “Rights in Technical Data
and Computer Database” clause at
DFARS 252.227−7013, or the equivalent
clause for non−defense agencies.
Manufacturer of the DATABASE for
North America is Geographic Data
Technology, Inc., at 11 Lafayette Street,
Lebanon, New Hampshire 03766, USA.

188

END USER NOTICE
PLEASE READ THIS NOTICE CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THIS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Point Of Interest Data (“POI” Data) in
the navigation system is in part provided
by infoUSA Inc. (“infoUSA”). By using
the POI Data, you accept and agree to all
terms and conditions set forth below.
1. Ownership
All rights, title and interest to the infoUSA
POI Data shall be retained by infoUSA.
2. Limitations on use
Except to the extent explicitly permitted
by mandatory laws, you may not extract
or re−utilize any portion of the contents of
the POI Data, nor reproduce, copy,
modify, adapt, translate, disassemble,
decompile, or reverse engineer any portion of the POI Data.
3. Transfer
You may not transfer the POI Data to third
parties, except together with the system
for which it was created, provided that
you do not retain any copy of the POI
Data.

4. Disclaimer of warranty
EXCEPT AS STATED HEREIN,
INFOUSA MAKES NO EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT
LIMITATION,
ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY.
5. Limitation of Liability
EITHER INFOUSA OR SUPPLIER OF
POI DATA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR
ANY INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES MADE OR ALLEGED IN CONNECTION WITH YOUR
USE OF THE POI DATA.

APPENDIX

END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
Personal Use Only. You agree to use this
information for solely personal, non−
commercial purposes, and not for service bureau, time−sharing or other similar purposes. You may not modify the information or remove any copyright notices that appear on the information in
any way. You may not decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion
of this information, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose. Without limiting the foregoing, you
may not use this information with any
products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet management or similar applications.

No Warranty. This information is provided to you “as is,” and you agree to use
it at your own risk. DENSO and its licensors (and their licensors and suppliers,
collectively “DENSO”) make no guarantees, representations or warranties of
any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, and DENSO expressly disclaims any
warranties regarding content, quality, accuracy, completeness, effectiveness,
reliability, fitness for a particular purpose,
non−infringement, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from this information,
or that the information or server will be
uninterrupted or error−free.
Some
states, territories and countries do not allow certain warranty exclusions, so to
that extent, the above exclusion may not
apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: DENSO SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF ITS NATURE, ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE OR
CONTRACTS ARISING OUT OF YOUR
POSSESSION, USE OF OR INABILITY
TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE
BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN
CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON
A WARRANTY, EVEN IF DENSO OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. Some states, territories and
countries do not allow certain liability exclusions or damages limitations, so to
that extent the above may not apply to
you.

VII

189

APPENDIX

Indemnity. You agree to indemnify, defend and hold DENSO and its licensors
(including their respective licensors, suppliers, assignees, subsidiaries, affiliated
companies, and the respective officers,
directors, employees, shareholders,
agents and representatives of each of
them) free and harmless from and
against any liability, loss, injury (including
injuries resulting in death), demand, action, cost, expense, or claim of any kind
or character, including but not limited to
attorney’s fees, arising out of or in connection with any use or possession by
you of this information.

190

END USER NOTICE
The marks of companies displayed by
this product to indicate business locations are the marks of their respective
owners. The use of such marks in this
product does not imply any sponsorship,
approval, or endorsement by such companies of this product.
END−USER TERMS
The Map Data Disc (“Data”) is provided
for your personal, internal use only and
not for resale. It is protected by copyright, and is subject to the following terms
and conditions which are agreed to by
you, on the one hand, and DENSO CORPORATION (“[LICENSEE]”) and its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. Such licensors include NAVTEQ North America,
LLC. Without limiting the foregoing, you
agree that NAVTEQ North America, LLC
shall have the right to enforce these
Terms directly against you.
 2004 NAVTEQ. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including:  Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, 
Queen’s Printer for Ontario,  Canada
Post Corporation, Geobase .

TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Personal Use Only. You agree to use this
Data for the solely personal, non commercial purposes for which you were licensed, and not for service bureau,
time−sharing or other similar purposes.
Accordingly, but subject to the restrictions set forth in the following paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i)
view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse engineer any portion
of this Data, and may not transfer or distribute it in any form, for any purpose, except to the extent permitted by mandatory laws. You may transfer the Data and
all accompanying materials on a permanent basis if you retain no copies and the
recipient agrees to these End−User
Terms. Multi−disc sets may not be transferred on a divided basis.

APPENDIX

Restrictions. Except where you have
been specifically licensed to do so by [LICENSEE] and without limiting the preceding paragraph, you may not (a) use
this Data with any products, systems, or
applications installed or otherwise connected to or in communication with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication with any positioning devices or any
mobile or wireless−connected electronic
or computer devices, including without
limitation cellular phones, palmtop and
handheld computers, pagers, and personal digital assistants or PDAs.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to
you “as is,” and you agree to use it at your
own risk. [LICENSEE] and its licensors
(and their licensors and suppliers) make
no guarantees, representations or warranties of any kind, express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including but
not limited to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness, use or results to be obtained from
this Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error−free.

Disclaimer of Warranty: [LICENSEE]
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE OR NON−INFRINGEMENT.
Some States, Territories and Countries
do not allow certain warranty exclusions,
so to that extent the above exclusion may
not apply to you.

Disclaimer of Liability: [LICENSEE] AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL
NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN RESPECT
OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF
THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS
OF PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS
OR SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE
OF OR INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF
THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF [LICENSEE] OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries
do not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.

191

VII

APPENDIX

Export Control. You agree not to export
from anywhere any part of the Data provided to you or any direct product thereof
except in compliance with, and with all licenses and approvals required under,
applicable export laws, rules and regulations.
Entire Agreement. These terms and conditions constitute the entire agreement
between [LICENSEE] (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers)
and you pertaining to the subject matter
hereof, and supersedes in their entirety
any and all written or oral agreements
previously existing between us with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the Illinois, without giving effect to (i) its
conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of Illinois for any and
all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided to you hereunder.

192

Government End Users. If the Licensed
Data is being acquired by or on behalf of
the United States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights similar
to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, (i) for acquisitions conducted by the Department of
Defense, the Licensed Data is licensed
with “Limited Rights” in accordance with
the rights set forth at DFARS
252.227−7013(b)(3),
TECHNICAL
DATA−NONCOMMERCIAL ITEMS, and
Licensed Data delivered or otherwise furnished with “Limited Rights” shall be
marked with the following “Limited Rights
Notice”
set
forth
at
DFARS
252.227−7013(f)(3), and shall be treated
in accordance with such Notice:

LIMITED RIGHTS
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME:
NAVTEQ North America, LLC
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS:
222 Merchandise Mart Plaza,
Suite 900, Chicago, Illinois 60654
The Government’s rights to use,
modify, reproduce, release, perform,
display, or disclose these technical
data are restricted by paragraph (b)(3)
of the Rights in Technical Data−Noncommercial Items clause contained in
the above identified contract. Any reproduction of technical data or portions
thereof marked with this legend must
also reproduce the markings. Any person, other than the Government, who
has been provided access to such
data must promptly notify the above
named Contractor.

APPENDIX

and; (ii) for civilian agency acquisitions,
the Licensed Data is licensed in accordance with the rights set forth at FAR
52.227−14(g)(1), RIGHTS IN DATA−
GENERAL (Protection of limited rights
data and computer software). In the
event that the Contracting Officer requires the delivery of limited rights Licensed Data that has been withheld or
would otherwise be withholdable in accordance with FAR 52.227−14(g)(1), the
Licensed Data is licensed with “Limited
Rights” as set forth in the following “Limited
Rights
Notice”
at
FAR
52.227−14(g)(2) (Alternate II), which
shall be affixed to the Licensed Data and
the Licensed Data shall be treated in accordance with such Notice (which shall
be marked on any reproduction of these
data, in whole or in part):

LIMITED RIGHTS NOTICE
(JUN 1987)
These data may be reproduced and
used by the Government with the express limitation that they will not, without written permission of the Contractor, be used for purposes of manufacture nor disclosed outside the Government; except that the Government
may disclose these data outside the
Government for the following purposes, if any, provided that the Government makes such disclosure subject to prohibition against further use
and disclosure: There are no additional purposes permitting disclosure of
such Data.
The manufacturer/supplier of the Data
is NAVTEQ North America, LLC, 222
Merchandise Mart Plaza, Suite 900,
Chicago, Illinois 60654.
If the Contracting Officer refuses to use
either of the licenses provided in (i) or (ii),
herein, the Contracting Officer must
notify NAVTEQ North America, LLC prior
to seeking additional or alternative rights
in the Licensed Data.

There are two types of areas available for
route guidance. In one type of area, primarily around metropolitan centers, detailed route guidance is available for the
entire area. In the other type of area, all
roads are displayed on the map but route
guidance is limited. The navigation route
might lack precision because the data (no
right turns, one−way traffic, etc.) is not
complete. It is still possible to reach the
destination by following the arrow direction and distance as shown on the bottom
left of the screen. The arrow points in the
direction of the destination. The distance
shown is as measured in a straight line
from the current vehicle position to the
destination area.
In order to provide you with as accurate map
information as possible, we are always gathering information such as on road repairs and
carrying out on−site investigations. However,
the names of roads, streets, facilities, and
their locations frequently change. In some
places, construction on roads may be in progress. For that reason, information on some
areas in this system might be different from
the actual location.
The map database is normally updated once
a year. Contact your Toyota dealer for information about the availability and pricing of an
update.

193

VII

APPENDIX

— Changing the map
DVD−ROM

4. Push the “
CLOSE” button to close
the display.
The map database is normally updated once
a year. Contact your dealer for information
about the availability and pricing of an update.

CAUTION
Do not place anything on the opened
2. Touch “MAP
”. The display opens
and the map disc is ejected.

1. Push the “
CLOSE” button. The
“LOAD·EJECT” screen appears.

display, as such items may be thrown
about and possibly injure people in
the vehicle during sudden braking or
in an accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in the
case of an accident or sudden stopping while driving, keep the display
closed.
Take care not to jam your hand while
the display is moving. Otherwise, you
could be injured.

NOTICE
Do not obstruct the display while it is
moving. It could damage your navigation system.
3. Insert the new map DVD−ROM with the
label side up.

194

APPENDIX

INFORMATION
Under extremely cold conditions, the
display may react slowly or operation
sound may become louder.

To confirm the database version and
disc coverage area
1. Push the “MENU” button.

To display the disc coverage area, touch
“Covered Area”. Confirm the covered area
on the screen.
Contact your Toyota dealer to find out if there
is a more recent update released.

2. Touch “Map DVD”.

VII
Make sure the version of the database on this
screen. (The database version on the screen
above may be different from the actual
screen.)

195

APPENDIX

196

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Author                          : Provided By MANUALSLIB.COM - http://www.manualslib.com/
Create Date                     : 2012:09:24 12:27:35Z
Keywords                        : manuals, instruction manuals, user manuals, service manuals, user guides, pdf manuals, owners manuals, installation guides
Modify Date                     : 2014:12:07 14:15:59+08:00
Subject                         : Search through 700.000 manuals online & and download pdf manuals.
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Provided By MANUALSLIB.COM - http://www.manualslib.com/
Description                     : Search through 700.000 manuals online & and download pdf manuals.
Title                           : ManualsLib - Makes it easy to find manuals online!
Creator Tool                    : pdftk 1.44 - www.pdftk.com
Metadata Date                   : 2014:12:07 14:15:59+08:00
Producer                        : itext-paulo-155 (itextpdf.sf.net-lowagie.com)
Document ID                     : uuid:4da56774-e171-ff4e-b00c-c6869a881d02
Instance ID                     : uuid:98661a23-c016-884f-a6cc-f6c72ac39199
Page Count                      : 635

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Toyota Camry 2007 Owners Manual ManualsLib Makes It Easy To Find Manuals Online!

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation